IBM i 7.1 Information Center
  About IBM i information
    Overview and what's new
    PDF files and manuals
    Information FAQ
    Information updates
    Site map
    Memo to users
    Notices
    Accessibility features for this product
  Availability
    Availability roadmap
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Availability roadmap
      Availability concepts
      Estimating the value of availability
      Deciding what level of availability you need
      Preventing unplanned outages
        Preparing for disk failures
        Preparing for power loss
        Using effective systems management practices
        Preparing the space for your system
      Shortening unplanned outages
        Reducing the time to restart your system
        Recovering recent changes after an unplanned outage
        Recovering lost data after an unplanned outage
        Reducing the time to vary on independent disk pools
      Shortening planned outages
        Shortening backup windows
          Performing online backups
          Backup from a second copy
          Backing up less data
        Shortening software maintenance and upgrading windows
        Shortening hardware maintenance and upgrade windows
      High availability
      Related information for Availability roadmap
    Single-system availability
    High availability
      High availability overview
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for High availability overview
        Benefits of high availability
          Planned outages
          Unplanned outages
          Disaster recovery
          Backup window reduction
          Load balancing
        Components of high availability
          Application resilience
          Data resilience
          Environment resilience
          Simplicity
        High availability criteria
          Budget
          Uptime requirements
          Outage coverage
          Recovery time objective (RTO)
          Recovery point objective (RPO)
          Resilience requirements
          Automated failover and switchover
          Distance requirements
          Number of backup systems
          Access to a secondary copy of the data
          System performance
          Data resilience method comparison
        Choosing a IBM i high availability solution
          Levels of application resiliency
          Comparison of data resiliency technologies
            Logical replication characteristics
            Switched disk characteristics
            Switched logical unit characteristics
            Geographic mirroring characteristics
            Metro Mirror characteristics
            Global Mirror characteristics
          High availability management
            IBM PowerHA for i interfaces
              High Availability Solutions Manager graphical interface
              Cluster Resource Services graphical interface
              IBM PowerHA for i commands
              IBM PowerHA for i APIs
            Option 41 (HA Switchable Resources)
            Advanced node failure detection
            High availability function in the base operating system
            Cluster middleware IBM Business Partners and available clustering products
        Related information for High availability overview
      High availability technologies
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for High availability technologies
        IBM i Cluster technology
          Cluster concepts
            Cluster node
            Cluster resource group (CRG)
              Application CRG
              Data CRG
              Device CRG
              Peer CRG
              Recovery domain
              Cluster resource group exit programs
            Cluster version
            Device domain
            Cluster jobs
          Base cluster functions
            Heartbeat monitoring
            Reliable message function
          Cluster events
            Switchover
            Failover
              Cluster message queue
              Failover message queue
            Cluster partition
            Merge
              Example: Merge
            Rejoin
              Example: Rejoin
        Advanced node failure detection
        Cluster administrative domain
        Switched disks
        Switched logical units
        Switchable devices
        Cross-site mirroring
          Geographic mirroring
          Metro mirror
          Global mirror
        FlashCopy
        High availability management
          IBM PowerHA for i interfaces
            High Availability Solutions Manager graphical interface
            Cluster Resource Services graphical interface
            IBM PowerHA for i commands
            IBM PowerHA for i APIs
          IBM PowerHA for iversion support
          Option 41 (HA Switchable Resources)
          High availability function in the base operating system
          Cluster middleware IBM Business Partners and available clustering products
        Related information for High availability technologies
        Resource Monitoring and Control (RMC)
      Implementing high availability
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for Implementing high availability
        Installing IBM PowerHA for i licensed program
        Uninstalling IBM PowerHA for i licensed program
        Implementing high availability with the solution-based approach
          Selecting a high availability solution
            Overview: Switched disk between logical partitions
            Overview: Switched disk between systems
            Overview: Switched disk with geographic mirroring
            Overview: Cross-site mirroring with geographic mirroring
          Verifying requirements for your high availability solution
          Setting up a high availability solution
            Placing high availability systems in dedicated state
            Changing backup procedures for a high-availability solution
            Verifying applications after each setup step
          Managing a high availability solution
            Working with high availability status messages
            Working with high availability solution tasks
              Shutting down a high availability solution with data available
              Shutting down a high availability solution with data unavailable
              Resuming a high availability solution
              Performing switchovers
              Recovering from partition state
              Collecting service information
            Managing high availability resources
              Managing nodes
                Starting nodes
                Stopping nodes
                Working with all nodes
                Displaying node properties
              Managing cluster resource groups (CRG)
                Starting a CRG
                Stopping a CRG
                Deleting a CRG
                Working with all CRGs
                Displaying CRG properties
              Managing monitored resources
                Working with all monitored resources
                Displaying monitored resource properties
              Managing independent disk pools
                Starting mirroring
                Stopping mirroring
                Working with all independent disk pools
                Displaying independent disk pool properties
              Managing TCP/IP interfaces
                Starting TCP/IP interfaces
                Stopping TCP/IP interfaces
                Working with all TCP/IP interfaces
                Displaying properties for TCP/IP interfaces
              Managing policies
            Working with high availability event log
          Working with messages
          Reference: Panel help for the solution-based interface
            High Availability Solutions Manager welcome
            Select your high availability solution
            Customized shopping list
            Executive summary
            Save or print high availability solution information
            Verify requirements list
            Set up your high availability solution
            Display high availability log
            Set up high availability policies
            Set up high availability environment
            Verify administrative switchover
            Migrate user profiles
            Migrate libraries
            Migrate directories
            Finish set up and clean up files
            Manage your high availability solution - Nodes
            Manage high availability solution - Cluster Resource Groups
            Manage high-availability solution - Monitored resources
            Manage high-availability solution - Independent disk pools
            Manage high-availability solution - TCP/IP interfaces
            Manage high availability solution - Policies
            Collect service information
            Verify administrative switchover
            Recover from partition state
            Shut down high availability solution - keep data available
            Shut down high availability solution - make data not available
            Resume high availability solution
            No help is available
        Implementing high availability with a task-based approach
          Planning your high availability solution
            Cluster applications
              Identifying resilient applications
              i5/OS architecture for cluster-enabled applications
              Writing a highly available cluster application
                Making application programs resilient
                Restarting highly available cluster applications
                Calling a cluster resource group exit program
              Application CRG considerations
                Managing application CRG takeover of IP addresses
                  Enabling application switchover across subnets with IPv4
                  Enabling application switchover across subnets with IPv6
                Example: Application cluster resource group failover actions
                Example: Application exit program
            Planning data resiliency
              Determine which data should be made resilient
              Planning switched disks
                Hardware requirements for switched disks
                Software requirements for switched disks
                Communications requirements for switched disks
              Planning cross-site mirroring
                Planning geographic mirroring
                  Hardware requirements for geographic mirroring
                  Software requirements for geographic mirroring
                  Communications requirements for geographic mirroring
                  Journal planning for geographic mirroring
                  Backup planning for geographic mirroring
                  Performance planning for geographic mirroring
                Planning metro mirror
                  Hardware requirements for metro mirror
                  Software requirements for Metro Mirror
                  Communications requirement for metro mirror
                  Journal planning for metro mirror
                  Backup planning for metro mirror
                  Performance planning for metro mirror
                Planning global mirror
                  Hardware requirements for global mirror
                  Software requirements for Global Mirror
                  Communications requirement for global mirror
                  Journal planning for global mirror
                  Backup planning for global mirror
                  Performance planning for global mirror
                Planning switched logical units (LUNs)
              Planning for logical replication
                Determine which systems to use for logical replication
                Cluster middleware IBM Business Partners and available clustering products
                Journal planning for logical replication
                Backup planning for logical replication
                Performance planning for logical replication
            Planning environment resiliency
              Planning for a cluster administrative domain
              Planning monitored resources entries (MRE)
            Planning clusters
              Hardware requirements for clusters
              Software requirements for clusters
              Communications requirements for clusters
                Dedicate a network for clusters
                Tips: Cluster communications
                Performance planning for clusters
                  Tunable cluster communications parameters
                  Changing cluster resource services settings
                Planning multiple-release clusters
              Performance planning for clusters
              Planning advanced node failure detection
                Hardware requirements for the advanced node failure detection
                Software requirements for the advanced node failure detection
              Planning checklist for clusters
            Planning the FlashCopy feature
              Hardware requirements for the FlashCopy feature
              Software requirements for the FlashCopy feature
              Communications requirements for the FlashCopy feature
            Security planning for high availability
              Distributing cluster-wide information
              Considerations for using clusters with firewalls
              Maintaining user profiles on all nodes
          Configuring high availability
            Scenarios: Configuring high availability
              Scenario: Switched disk between logical partitions
              Scenario: Switched disk between systems
              Scenario: Switched disk with geographic mirroring
              Scenario: Cross-site mirroring with geographic mirroring
              Scenario: Cross-site mirroring with metro mirror
              Scenario: Cross-site mirroring with global mirror
            Setting up TCP/IP for high availability
              Setting TCP/IP configuration attributes
              Starting the INETD server
            Configuring clusters
              Creating a cluster
                Enabling nodes to be added to a cluster
                Adding nodes
                Starting nodes
                Adding a node to a device domain
                Creating cluster resource groups (CRGs)
                  Creating application CRGs
                  Creating data CRGs
                  Creating device CRGs
                  Creating peer CRGs
                Starting a CRG
            Specifying message queues
            Performing switchovers
            Configuring nodes
              Starting nodes
              Enabling nodes to be added to a cluster
              Adding nodes
              Adding a node to a device domain
            Configuring advanced node failure detection
              Configuring hardware management console (HMC)
              Configuring virtual I/O server (VIOS)
            Configuring CRGs
              Starting a CRG
              Creating cluster resource groups (CRGs)
                Creating application CRGs
                Creating data CRGs
                Creating device CRGs
                Creating peer CRGs
            Configuring cluster administrative domains
              Creating a cluster administrative domain
              Adding a node to the cluster administrative domain
              Starting a cluster administrative domain
              Synchronization of monitored resource
              Adding monitored resource entries
          Configuring switched disks
            Creating an independent disk pool
            Starting mirrored protection
            Stopping mirrored protection
            Adding a disk unit or disk pool
            Evaluating the current configuration
            Making a disk pool available
          Configuring switched logical units (LUNs)
          Configuring cross-site mirroring
            Configuring geographic mirroring
            Configuring metro mirror session
            Configuring global mirror session
            Configuring switched logical units (LUNs)
        Managing high availability
          Scenarios: Managing high availability solutions
            Scenarios: Performing backups in a high-availability environment
              Scenario: Performing backups in geographic mirroring environment
              Scenario: Performing a FlashCopy function
            Scenario: Upgrading operating system in a high-availability environment
              Example: Upgrading operating system
            Scenario: Making a device highly available
          Managing clusters
            Adjusting the PowerHA version
            Adjusting the cluster version of a cluster
            Deleting a cluster
            Displaying cluster configuration
            Saving and restoring cluster configuration
            Monitoring cluster status
            Specifying message queues
            Cluster deconfiguration checklist
            Managing nodes
              Displaying node properties
              Stopping nodes
              Removing nodes
              Removing a node from a device domain
            Add a cluster monitor to a node
            Removing a cluster monitor
            Managing cluster resource groups (CRGs)
              Displaying CRG status
              Stopping a CRG
              Deleting a CRG
              Creating switchable devices
              Changing the recovery domain for a CRG
                Creating site names and data port IP addresses
            Managing failover outage events
            Managing cluster administrative domains
              Stopping a cluster administrative domain
              Deleting a cluster administrative domain
              Changing the properties of a cluster administrative domain
              Managing monitored resource entries
                Working with monitored resource entry status
                Removing monitored resource entries
                Listing monitored resource entries
                Selecting attributes to monitor
                  Attributes that can be monitored
                Displaying monitored resource entry messages
          Managing switched disks
            Making a disk pool unavailable
            Making your hardware switchable
            Quiescing an independent disk pool
            Resuming an independent disk pool
          Managing cross-site mirroring
            Managing geographic mirroring
              Suspending geographic mirroring
              Resuming geographic mirroring
              Detaching mirror copy
              Reattaching mirror copy
              Deconfiguring geographic mirroring
              Changing geographic mirroring properties
            Managing metro mirror sessions
              Suspending metro mirror sessions
              Resuming Metro Mirror sessions
              Deleting metro mirror session
              Displaying or changing Metro Mirror properties
            Managing global mirror
              Suspending global mirror sessions
              Resuming Global Mirror sessions
              Deleting global mirror sessions
              Changing Global Mirror session properties
            Managing switched logical units (LUNs)
              Making switched logical units (LUNs) available and unavailable
              Quiescing an independent disk pool
              Resuming an independent disk pool
          Managing the FlashCopy technology
            Configuring a FlashCopy session
            Updating a FlashCopy session
            Reattaching a FlashCopy session
            Detaching a FlashCopy session
            Deleting a FlashCopy session
            Restoring data from a FlashCopy session
            Changing FlashCopy properties
        Troubleshooting your high availability solution
          Troubleshooting clusters
            Determine if a cluster problem exists
            Gathering recovery information for a cluster
            Common cluster problems
            Partition errors
              Determining primary and secondary cluster partitions
              Changing partitioned nodes to failed
              Partitioned cluster administrative domains
              Tips: Cluster partitions
            Cluster recovery
              Recovering from cluster job failures
              Recovering a damaged cluster object
              Recovering a cluster after a complete system loss
              Recovering a cluster after a disaster
              Restoring a cluster from backup tapes
          Troubleshooting cross-site mirroring
            Geographic mirroring messages
          Installing IBM PowerHA for i licensed program
      Related information for Implementing high availability
    Maximum capacities
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Maximum capacities
      Cluster limits
      Communications limits
      Database and SQL limits
      File system limits
      Journal limits
      Save and restore limits
      Security limits
      Work management limits
      Miscellaneous limits
      Related information for Maximum capacities
  Basic system operations
    PDF file for Basic system operations
    Overview of basic system operations
      Using system interfaces
      Working with devices
      Working with printer output
        Managing printer output
        Starting printers
        Starting a printer from System i Navigator
      Working with storage
      Working with the control panel
        Control panel concepts
          Types of control panels
            Physical control panel
            Remote control panel
            Virtual control panel
          Control panel functions
          Control panel buttons, lights, and indicators
        Setting up your control panel
        Accessing control panel functions
        Instructions and descriptions for control panel functions
          Normal control panel functions
          Extended control panel functions
          Low-level debug panel functions 57 through 70
        Using remote control panel APIs
          System power and test APIs
            Turning on the system
            Performing panel lamp test
            Clearing panel lamp test
            Powering off the system
          IPL-related APIs
            Setting IPL mode to Manual
            Setting IPL mode to Normal
            Setting IPL mode to Auto
            Setting IPL mode to Secure
            Setting IPL type to A
            Setting IPL type to B
            Setting IPL type to C
            Setting IPL type to D
            Starting an IPL
            Setting IPL speed to Fast
            Setting IPL speed to Slow
            Setting IPL speed to system default
          Other system function APIs
            Starting dedicated service tools on the primary or alternate console
            Starting a main storage dump
            Disabling continuously powered main storage
          APIs that check the system status
            Is CPM present?
            Is CPM enabled?
            Is the key inserted?
            Is the system turned on?
            Is the attention light lit?
            Is SPCN present?
            Getting the IPL mode
            Getting the IPL type
            Getting the IPL speed
            Getting type and model information
            Getting the SPCN system reference code
            Getting all system reference codes 1 - 9
    Starting and stopping the system
      Starting the system
        Starting the system without making configuration changes (unattended IPL)
        Changing the system during IPL (attended IPL)
          Attended IPL displays
            Setting major system options
            Defining or changing the system at IPL
            Editing access paths during attended IPL
            Editing check pending constraints during attended IPL
        Changing your system IPL from the control panel
          IPL type
          Operating mode of an IPL
          Changing operating modes and IPL types
          Changing system values during IPL
        Changing the IPL startup program
          Source for CL startup program
          Startup program to set the (QSTRUPPGM) system value
        Scheduling a system shutdown and restart
          Displaying the power-on and power-off schedule
          Changing power-on and power-off schedule defaults
          Changing the power-on and power-off schedule for a single event
          Solving problems with the automatic power schedule
        Causes of abnormal IPLs
      Signing on to the system
        Signing on to the system using System i Navigator
        Signing on to the system using the character-based interface
        Changing your password
          Changing the system password
          Bypassing the system password
      Stopping the system
        Turning off the system immediately
        Using the Power button
      System values that control IPL
    i5/OS concepts
      Messages
      i5/OS commands
      Security and user authority
        Authority to access objects
        Security levels
        User profiles
        Authorization lists
      Files and file systems
      i5/OS restricted state
      Jobs
      Subsystems, job queues, and memory pools
      Objects
      Logs and journals
      Software fixes
    Printing the system configuration list
    Analyzing and reporting system problems
    Related information for basic system operations
  Blade and System x
    What's new for IBM i 7.1
    PDF file
    Concepts for integrated servers
      Overview
      Capabilities
      Attaching servers to IBM i using iSCSI
        Typical server installation
        Single-server environment
        Multiple-server environment
        Initiator system and service processor connection
        Booting over the iSCSI network
      Server management
        Integrated Windows servers
        Integrated VMware ESX servers
        Integrated server console
        Software updates
      Storage management
        Virtual storage
        IBM i storage management
        Predefined virtual storage
        Virtual storage linking
      Shared tape and optical devices
      Networking
        Service processor connection
        Service processor functions and support
        Service processor connection methods
        iSCSI network
        Integrated DHCP server
        Networking between IBM i and integrated servers
        Virtual Ethernet networks
        Physical networks
        Network security
      Performance concepts
        Storage performance
        Virtual Ethernet performance
        MTU considerations
      IBM i configuration objects
      High availability concepts
        Multipath I/O
        Hot spare support
        IBM i clustering
      User and group enrollment concepts
        Enrolled user account options
        User enrollment templates
        Password considerations
        QAS400NT user
      IBM i NetServer
      IBM i Access for Windows
    Installation road map
      Prerequisites
      Preparing for the hardware installation
      iSCSI Network Planning Guide (Deprecated)
      Installing the hardware (Deprecated)
      Preparing IBM i for the installation
      Installing the integrated server
    Managing integrated server environments
      Creating and deleting integrated servers
        Installing integrated servers
        Cloning integrated servers
        Uninstalling integrated servers
          Deleting shareable IBM i objects
          Uninstalling IBM i Integrated Server Support
      Managing integrated servers
        Starting and stopping integrated servers
          Starting integrated servers
          Starting an integrated server when IBM i TCP/IP starts
          Stopping integrated servers
          Shutting down your IBM i system when integrated servers are present
        Viewing or changing configuration information
        Configuring security between IBM i and integrated servers
          Configuring CHAP for integrated servers
          Changing a service processor password
          Configuring a firewall
        Configuring multipath I/O
        Using hot spare hardware (Deprecated)
        Configuring high availability (Deprecated)
        Viewing integrated server messages
        Launching the Web console
      Managing integrated Windows servers (Deprecated)
        Updating the integration software
        Managing virtual Ethernet and external networks (Deprecated)
        Sharing tape and optical devices with Windows servers
        Running Windows commands remotely
      Managing integrated VMware ESX servers (Deprecated)
        Updating the integration software
        Configuring the QVMWINT user
        Managing connections for ESX servers
        Migrating VMware ESX servers
      Managing storage
        Displaying information about virtual storage
        Adding virtual storage
          Creating virtual storage
          Linking virtual storage
          Formatting virtual storage
        Copying virtual storage
        Expanding virtual storage
        Expanding a system disk
        Unlinking virtual storage
        Deleting virtual storage
        Accessing IBM i IFS from an integrated server
      Administering Windows users from IBM i
        Enrolling IBM i users to Windows
        Enrolling IBM i groups to Windows
        Configuring the QAS400NT user
        Creating user enrollment templates
        Specifying a home directory in a user template
        Changing the local password management attribute
        Configuring EIM for integrated Windows servers
        Ending user enrollment
        Ending group enrollment
        Preventing enrollment to a Windows server
      Managing network server host adapters
        Creating a network server host adapter
          Determining the hardware resource name
        Creating an NWSH based on another one
        Displaying network server host adapter properties
        Changing network server host adapter properties
        Starting a network server host adapter
        Stopping a network server host adapter
        Deleting a network server host adapter
          Deleting a TCP/IP interface
          Deleting a line description
      Managing remote system configurations
        Creating a remote system configuration
        Creating a remote system configuration based on another one
        Displaying remote system configuration properties
        Changing remote system configuration properties
        Displaying remote system status
        Deleting a remote system configuration
        Launching the Web console
      Managing service processor configurations
        Creating a service processor configuration
        Creating a service processor configuration based on another one
        Displaying service processor configuration properties
        Changing service processor configuration properties
        Initializing a service processor
        Deleting a service processor configuration
        Launching the Web console
        Converting pre-IBM i 7.1 service processor configurations to use an IP address or host name
      Managing connection security configurations
        Creating a connection security configuration
        Creating a connection security configuration based on another one
        Displaying connection security configuration properties
        Changing connection security configuration properties
        Deleting a connection security configuration
    Backing up and recovering
      Backing up the NWSD and other objects
        What objects to save
        Backing up the NWSD
        Backing up virtual storage
        Backing up virtual storage for active Windows servers
        Backing up NWSH objects and associated LIND objects and interfaces
        Backing up NWSCFG objects
      Backing up individual Windows files
        File-level backup restrictions
        Installing and configuring IBM i NetServer
        Configuring Windows for file-level backup
        Creating shares on Windows
        Adding members to the QAZLCSAVL file
        Verifying that NetServer and Windows are in same domain
        Saving integrated Windows server files
          Examples: Saving parts of integrated servers
      Saving user enrollment information
      Restoring the NWSD and other objects
        Restoring the NWSD and virtual storage
          Restoring virtual storage
          Restoring NWSDs
        Restoring NWSH objects
        Restoring NWSCFG objects
      Restoring individual Windows files
      Restoring user enrollment information
    Related information
  Connecting to your system
    Choose your connection
      Connecting to System i: Web clients
      Connecting to System i: Windows clients
      Connecting to System i: Linux clients
      Connecting to System i: Wireless clients
      Connecting to System i: Interfaces
      Connecting to System i: Consoles
    IBM i Access
      IBM i Access for Web
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for IBM i Access for Web
        License information
        Planning
          IBM i Access for Web offerings
            Web application
            Portal application (Standard)
            Portal application (IBM)
          Security considerations
            Single sign-on considerations
          Checklist: Planning, installing, and configuring
          Prerequisites for installing IBM i Access for Web
            Hardware requirements
              Tune performance
            IBM i software requirements
              PTF requirements
            Web browser requirements
              Browser considerations
            Upgrade considerations
        Installing IBM i Access for Web
        Installing IBM i Access for Web PTFs
        IBM i Access for Web in a Web application server environment
          Configuring IBM i Access for Web
            Examples for configuring a new Web application server environment
              integrated Web application server for i
              WebSphere Application Server V7.0 for IBM i
              WebSphere Application Server V7.0 for IBM i with Single sign-on
              WebSphere Application Server - Express V7.0 for IBM i
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V7.0 for IBM i
              WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS with Single sign-on
              WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
            Examples for configuring an existing Web application server environment
              integrated Web application server for i
              WebSphere Application Server V7.0 for IBM i
              WebSphere Application Server - Express V7.0 for IBM i
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V7.0 for IBM i
              WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
            New Web application server considerations
          Customizing IBM i Access for Web
            Policies
            Default page content
              Home page
                Customized content
                Special tags
                Style sheets
              Main page
                Customized content
              Page template
                Customized content
                Special tags
                Style sheets
              Login template
                Customized content
                Special tags
                Style sheets
          IBM i Access for Web functions
            5250
            Command
            Customize
            Database
              Database considerations
              Database restrictions
            Download
            File
              File considerations
              File restrictions
            Jobs
            Mail
            Messages
            My folder
            My home page
            Other
            Print
              Print considerations
              Print restrictions
          URL interfaces
          Automating tasks
          NLS considerations
          Saving and restoring IBM i Access for Web
        IBM i Access for Web in a portal environment
          Portal application (Standard)
            Portal concepts
              Cross-site scripting
            Configuring IBM i Access for Web
            Customizing IBM i Access for Web
              Creating pages
              Customizing portlets
              Portal roles
            IBM i Access for Web functions
              5250
              Command
              Database
                Database considerations
                Database restrictions
              Files
                File considerations
                File restrictions
              Other
              Print
            NLS considerations
            Saving and restoring System i Access for Web
          Portal application (IBM)
            Portal concepts
              Cooperative portlets
              Cross-site scripting
            Configuring IBM i Access for Web
              Examples for configuring a new portal environment
                IBM WebSphere Portal V6.1
              Examples for configuring an existing portal environment
                IBM WebSphere Portal V6.1
            Customizing IBM i Access for Web
              Creating pages
              Customizing portlets
              Portal roles
            IBM i Access for Web functions
              5250
              Command
              Database
                Database considerations
                Database restrictions
              Files
                File considerations
                File restrictions
              IFrame
              Other
              Print
            NLS considerations
            Saving and restoring IBM i Access for Web in a portal environment
        Deleting IBM i Access for Web
        Removing IBM i Access for Web from an unsupported environment
        Related information
      IBM i Access for Windows
        Introduction
          Installation and setup
            What's new for IBM i 7.1
            PDF file for IBM i Access for Windows: Installation and setup
            License information
            Setting up the IBM i platform
              Prerequisites to install IBM i Access for Windows on IBM i
                IBM i release requirements
                IBM i storage requirements
                Required and optional programs to install
              Installing IBM i Access for Windows on the IBM i
              Obtaining and installing PTFs
              Configuring TCP/IP on IBM i platform
              Configuring IBM i NetServer on IBM i
              Removing IBM i Access for Windows from IBM i
            Setting up the PC
              Prerequisites to set up the PC
              Setting up TCP/IP on the PC
                Installing a network adapter or modem
                Configuring TCP/IP support on the PC
                  Configuring TCP/IP on Windows operating systems
                  Adding the system name to the HOSTS file
                Verifying the TCP/IP configuration
              Configuring the PC for IBM i NetServer
              Installation considerations
              SSL considerations
              Preparing an installation image to install on multiple PCs
                Deploying from IBM i NetServer
                Administrative installation image
                  Creating an administrative installation image
                  Patching an administrative installation image
                Deploying from a network drive
                Using command programs
                Using remote scheduled tasks
                Deploying on Active Directory using Group Policy
                Deploying using SMS
                Finding the installation image to be tailored
                Methods to tailor an installation package
                  Tools available for creating transforms
                  Creating transforms with Orca
                    Restricting the set of features that users can install
                      Feature Tree
                    Setting public properties using transforms
                  Changing the default options for the log files
                  Public properties
                  Defining the level of user interface throughout the installation
                  Modifying the installation by using setup.ini
                Telling your users how to install
                Windows Installer Policies
                  Using Windows Installer policies
              Installing IBM i Access for Windows on the PC
                Finding your installation image
                  Using Licensed Program 5770-XE1 as the installation source
                  Using the IBM i Access for Windows DVD as the installation source
                    Creating a DVD
                  Using an installation image that has been prepared to install on multiple PCs as the installation source
                Using command line parameters to change the installation behavior
              Preparing to install service packs on multiple PCs
                Obtaining and installing PTFs
                  Check Service Level function
                    Setting Check Service Level properties
                    Scheduling Check Service Level
                    Controlling service pack and release upgrades
                Service packs from download sites
                  Site for downloading service packs
                  Patching an administrative installation image
                  Distributing service packs on Active Directory
                  Distributing service packs on SMS
                    Reinstalling clients from an updated full image
                    Distributing a patch to clients
                  Making individual patches available to your users
              Installing service packs on the PC
                Install a service pack using Check Service Level
                Installing a service pack from an updated full installation image
                Installing a service pack by applying a patch
              Integrating System i Navigator plug-ins
              Installing or removing individual features
              Installing other language versions
              Publishing directory information to LDAP
              Upgrading IBM i Access for Windows
              Uninstalling IBM i Access for Windows from the PC
              Troubleshooting
            Related information
          Using
        Administration
          What's new for IBM i 7.1
          PDF file for IBM i Access for Windows: Administration
          IBM i Access for Windows network environments
            Microsoft Windows Terminal Server
            Use IBM i Access for Windows in a three-tier environment
              Using distributed transaction support
              Access IBM i services from the middle tier
            Add TCP/IP configuration to all users
            Set PC5250 files location for all users
            User profiles for PCs with multiple users
          ODBC administration
            Overview of the IBM i Access ODBC driver
            Set up your system for the IBM i Access ODBC driver
              Adding the local system to the RDB directory
              Specify the ODBC data source
              Use independent ASPs through ODBC
            IBM i Access for Windows ODBC security
              Common ODBC strategies that are not secure
              ODBC program security strategies
              Related information for ODBC security
            Troubleshoot ODBC
              ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
                Client-side ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
                Server-side ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
                Collecting an ODBC Trace (SQL.LOG)
                Gather a detailed trace
                  Gather a detail trace for a Microsoft Transaction Server (MTS)
              IBM i Access ODBC error messages
              Troubleshoot the IBM i connection
                Checking the server status
                Verifying that subsystems are active
                Verifying that prestart jobs are running
                Additional TCP/IP considerations
              Common ODBC errors
                SQL errors
                  SQL0104 - Token &1 was not valid. Valid tokens: &2
                  SQL0113 - Name &1 not allowed.
                  SQL0114 - Relational database &1 not the same as current &2 server
                  SQL0204 - MYSYSCONF not found
                  SQL0208 - ORDER BY column not in result table
                  SQL0900 - Application process not in a connected state
                  SQL0901 - SQL System Error
                  SQL5001 - Column qualifier or table &2 undefined.
                  SQL5016 - Object name &1 not valid for naming convention
                  SQL7008 - &1 in &2 not valid for operation. The reason code is 3
                Stored procedure errors
                  SQL0444 - External program &A in &B not found (DB2 for i SQL)
                  No data returned on OUTPUT and INPUT_OUTPUT parameters
                  SQL0501 - Cursor CRSR000x not open
                ODBC incorrect output and unpredictable errors
              Gather information for IBM Support
          Host server administration
            Identify IBM i host servers and associated programs.
              Host servers by function
              File server
              File server programs
              Database server
                Database server programs
                SQL packages
                  SQL package names
                  Cleanup SQL packages
                Statement naming conventions
                Rules and restrictions when using DRDA
              Data queue server
              Network print server
              Central server
              Remote command and distributed program call server
              Signon server
              Server Port Mapper
              Extended Dynamic Remote SQL server (QXDAEDRSQL)
              DRDA/DDM server
            Use IBM i host servers
              Establish client/server communications
                Host Servers port numbers
                  Port numbers for host servers and server mapper
                Start host servers
                  Server daemons
                  Example: STRHOSTSVR
                End host servers
                  Example: ENDHOSTSVR
              IBM i Subsystems
                Subsystems used for server Jobs
                Use of autostart jobs
                Use of prestart jobs
              IBM i system values
              Identify and display IBM i server jobs
                Use System i Navigator to identify server jobs
                Use the IBM i character-based interface to display server job
                  IBM i job names
                  Display using WRKACTJOB
                  Display using the history log
                  Display server job for a user
            Use server exit programs
              Register exit programs
              Write exit programs
              Exit program parameters
                File server
                Database server
                Data queue server
                Network print server
                Central server
                Remote command and distributed program call server
                Signon server
              Examples: Exit programs
                Examples: Creating exit programs with RPG
                Examples: Create exit programs with CL commands
                Examples: Create QIBM_QZDA_INIT exit programs with CL commands
                Examples: Create QIBM_QZDA_INIT exit programs with ILE C
          IBM i NetServer administration
          Restrict users with policies and application administration
            Overview of IBM i Access for Windows policies
            Types and scopes of policies
            Set up your system to use policies
              Configure a system for using IBM i Access for Windows policies
              Configure client PCs for policies
              Create policy files
                Microsoft System Policy Editor
                Create IBM i Access for Windows policy templates
                Create and update policy files
            IBM i Access for Windows policy list
              Policies by function
                Policies by function: .NET Data provider
                  .NET Data Provider policy: Prevent .NET Data Provider usage
                Policies by function: ActiveX automation objects
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent data transfer upload automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent data transfer download automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent Remote Command automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent Remote program automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent data queue automation object
                Policies by function: Communication
                  Communication policy: Default user mode
                  Communications policy: TCP/IP Address Lookup Mode
                  Communication policy: Port lookup mode
                  Communication policy: Require Secure Sockets
                  Communication policy: Prevent changes to active environment
                  Communication policy: Prevent environment list changes
                  Communication policy: Prevent connections to systems not previously defined
                  Communication policy: Prevent use of non-mandated environments
                  Communication policy: Timeout value
                Policies by function: Data Transfer
                  Policies by function: Data Transfer uploads
                    Data Transfer policy: Prevent all Data Transfer
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent appending and replacing host files
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent Data Transfer GUI upload
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent usage of RFROMPCB
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent autostart uploads
                  Data Transfer policy: Data Transfer IBM i file creation
                    Data Transfer policy: Prevent host file creation
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent Wizard IBM i file creation
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent non-Wizard IBM i file creation
                  Data Transfer policy: Data Transfer downloads
                    Data Transfer policy: Prevent all Data Transfers from a system
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent Data Transfer GUI download
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent usage of RTOPCB
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent autostart downloads
                Policies by function: Directory update
                  Directory update policy: Prevent using directory update
                Policies by function: Incoming Remote Command
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Run as system
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Command mode
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Cache security
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Allow generic security
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Generic Security Runs command as logged on user
                Installation policy: Prevent check service pack level
                Policies by function: License management
                  License policy: Time to delay before releasing IBM i Access for Windows license
                Policies by function: National Language Support
                  National Language Support policy: ANSI code page
                  National Language Support policy: OEM code page
                  National Language Support policy: EBCDIC code page
                  Language policy: BiDi Transform
                Policies by function: ODBC
                  ODBC policy: Prevent use of named data sources
                  ODBC policy: Prevent use of program generated data sources
                Policies by function: OLE DB
                  OLE DB Provider policy: Prevent OLE DB Provider usage
                Policies by function: System i Navigator
                  System i Navigator policy: Prevent usage of System i Navigator
                Policies by function: Passwords
                  Password policy: Warn user before IBM i password expires
                  Password policy: Prevent IBM i Access for Windows password changes
                Policies by function: PC5250 emulation
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent configuration of display sessions
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent configuration of printer sessions
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent usage of PC5250 Emulator
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Maximum number of PC5250 sessions
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent changing of .WS profiles
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent menu configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent toolbar configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent multi-session configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent keyboard configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent mouse configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent Java applet execution
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent access to macros
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent profile imports in Emulator Session Manager
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent profile deletion in Emulator Session Manager
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent directory changes in Emulator Session Manager
                Policies by function: PC Commands
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwblogon.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbcfg.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbback.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbrest.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbenv.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of cwbundbs.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Wrksplf.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkmsg.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkprt.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkusrj.exe
                Policies by function: Service
                  Service policy: When to check service level
                  Service policy: Delay time
                  Service policy: Frequency
                  Service policy: Copy image to PC
                  Service policy: Run silently
                  Service policy: Service path
                  Service policy: Autostart background service job
                Policies by function: User interface
                  User interface policy: Prevent creation of desktop icons
              Policies by template
                Caecfg.adm
                Caerestr.adm: IBM i Access for Windows Runtime Restrictions
                Config.adm: IBM i Access for Windows mandated connections
                Installation policy: Prevent check service pack level
                SYSNAME.adm: Per-system policies
          Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) administration
        Programming
          What's new for IBM i 7.1
          PDF file for IBM i Access for Windows: Programming
          IBM i Access for Windows C/C++ APIs
            IBM i Access for Windows C/C++ APIs overview
              API groups, header files, import libraries, and DLLs
              Programmer's Toolkit
                Install the Programmer's Toolkit
                Launch the Programmer's Toolkit
              IBM i name formats for connection APIs
              OEM, ANSI, and Unicode considerations
                Use a single IBM i Access for Windows API type
                Use mixed IBM i Access for Windows API types
                Write a generic IBM i Access for Windows application
              Obsolete IBM i Access for Windows APIs
                Obsolete Communications APIs
                Obsolete Data Queues APIs
                Obsolete Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
                Obsolete Security APIs
                Obsolete Serviceability APIs
                Obsolete System Object Access (SOA) API
                Obsolete National Language Support (NLS) APIs
              Return codes and error messages
                IBM i Access for Windows return codes that correspond to operating system errors
                IBM i Access for Windows return codes
                  Global IBM i Access for Windows return codes
                  IBM i Access for Windows-specific return codes
                    Security return codes
                    Communications return codes
                    Configuration return codes
                    Automation Object return codes
                    WINSOCK return codes
                    SSL return codes
                IBM i Access for Windows component-specific return codes
                  Administration APIs return code
                  Communications APIs return codes
                  Database APIs return codes
                  Data Queues APIs return codes
                  Directory Update APIs return codes
                  National Language Support APIs return codes
                  System Object APIs return codes
                  Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs return codes
                  Security APIs return codes
                  Serviceability APIs return codes
                  System Object Access APIs return codes
            IBM i Access for Windows Administration APIs
              Administration APIs list
                cwbAD_GetClientVersion
                cwbAD_GetProductFixLevel
                cwbAD_IsComponentInstalled
                cwbAD_IsOpNavPluginInstalled
              Example: Administration APIs
            IBM i Access for Windows Communications and Security APIs
              System object attributes
                System object attributes list
              Communications and security: Create and delete APIs
                cwbCO_CreateSystem
                cwbCO_CreateSystemLike
                cwbCO_DeleteSystem
              Communications and security: Connect and disconnect APIs
                cwbCO_Connect
                cwbCO_Disconnect
                cwbCO_GetConnectTimeout
                cwbCO_GetPersistenceMode
                cwbCO_IsConnected
                cwbCO_SetConnectTimeout
                cwbCO_SetPersistenceMode
                cwbCO_Verify
              Communication and security: Security validation and data APIs
                cwbCO_ChangePassword
                cwbCO_GetDefaultUserMode
                cwbCO_GetFailedSignons
                cwbCO_GetPasswordExpireDate
                cwbCO_GetPrevSignonDate
                cwbCO_GetPromptMode
                cwbCO_GetSignonDate
                cwbCO_GetUserIDEx
                cwbCO_GetValidateMode
                cwbCO_GetWindowHandle
                cwbCO_HasSignedOn
                cwbCO_SetDefaultUserMode
                cwbCO_SetPassword
                cwbCO_SetPromptMode
                cwbCO_SetUserIDEx
                cwbCO_SetWindowHandle
                cwbCO_SetValidateMode
                cwbCO_Signon
                cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              Communications and security: Get and set attribute APIs
                cwbCO_CanModifyDefaultUserMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddress
                cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddressLookupMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyPersistenceMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyPortLookupMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyUseSecureSockets
                cwbCO_GetDescription
                cwbCO_GetHostCCSID
                cwbCO_GetHostVersionEx
                cwbCO_GetIPAddress
                cwbCO_GetIPAddressLookupMode
                cwbCO_GetPortLookupMode
                cwbCO_GetSystemName
                cwbCO_IsSecureSockets
                cwbCO_SetIPAddress
                cwbCO_SetIPAddressLookupMode
                cwbCO_SetPortLookupMode
                cwbCO_UseSecureSockets
              Defines for cwbCO_Service
              Differences between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              Similarities between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              Communications: Create and delete APIs
                cwbCO_CreateSysListHandle
                cwbCO_CreateSysListHandleEnv
                cwbCO_DeleteSysListHandle
                cwbCO_GetNextSysName
                cwbCO_GetSysListSize
              Communications: System information APIs
                cwbCO_GetActiveConversations
                cwbCO_GetConnectedSysName
                cwbCO_GetDefaultSysName
                cwbCO_IsSystemConfigured
                cwbCO_IsSystemConfiguredEnv
                cwbCO_IsSystemConnected
              Communications: Configured environments information
                cwbCO_GetActiveEnvironment
                cwbCO_GetEnvironmentName
                cwbCO_GetNumberOfEnvironments
              Communications: Environment and connection information
                cwbCO_CanConnectNewSystem
                cwbCO_CanModifyEnvironmentList
                cwbCO_CanModifySystemList
                cwbCO_CanModifySystemListEnv
                cwbCO_CanSetActiveEnvironment
              Example: Using IBM i Access for Windows communications APIs
            IBM i Data Queues APIs
              Data queues
              Ordering data queue messages
              Work with data queues
              Typical use of data queues
              Data Queues: Create, delete, and open APIs
                cwbDQ_CreateEx
                cwbDQ_DeleteEx
                cwbDQ_OpenEx
              Data Queues: Accessing data queues APIs
                cwbDQ_AsyncRead
                cwbDQ_Cancel
                cwbDQ_CheckData
                cwbDQ_Clear
                cwbDQ_Close
                cwbDQ_GetLibName
                cwbDQ_GetQueueAttr
                cwbDQ_GetQueueName
                cwbDQ_GetSysName
                cwbDQ_Peek
                cwbDQ_Read
                cwbDQ_Write
              Data Queues: Attributes APIs
                cwbDQ_CreateAttr
                cwbDQ_DeleteAttr
                cwbDQ_GetAuthority
                cwbDQ_GetDesc
                cwbDQ_GetForceToStorage
                cwbDQ_GetKeySize
                cwbDQ_GetMaxRecLen
                cwbDQ_GetOrder
                cwbDQ_GetSenderID
                cwbDQ_SetAuthority
                cwbDQ_SetDesc
                cwbDQ_SetForceToStorage
                cwbDQ_SetKeySize
                cwbDQ_SetMaxRecLen
                cwbDQ_SetOrder
                cwbDQ_SetSenderID
              Data Queues: Read and write APIs
                cwbDQ_CreateData
                cwbDQ_DeleteData
                cwbDQ_GetConvert
                cwbDQ_GetData
                cwbDQ_GetDataAddr
                cwbDQ_GetDataLen
                cwbDQ_GetKey
                cwbDQ_GetKeyLen
                cwbDQ_GetRetDataLen
                cwbDQ_GetRetKey
                cwbDQ_GetRetKeyLen
                cwbDQ_GetSearchOrder
                cwbDQ_GetSenderInfo
                cwbDQ_SetConvert
                cwbDQ_SetData
                cwbDQ_SetDataAddr
                cwbDQ_SetKey
                cwbDQ_SetSearchOrder
              Example: Using Data Queues APIs
            IBM i Access for Windows data transformation and National Language Support (NLS) APIs
              IBM i Access for Windows data transformation APIs
                IBM i Access for Windows data transformation API list
                  cwbDT_ASCII11ToBin4
                  cwbDT_ASCII6ToBin2
                  cwbDT_ASCIIPackedToPacked
                  cwbDT_ASCIIToHex
                  cwbDT_ASCIIToPacked
                  cwbDT_ASCIIToZoned
                  cwbDT_ASCIIZonedToZoned
                  cwbDT_Bin2ToASCII6
                  cwbDT_Bin2ToBin2
                  cwbDT_Bin4ToASCII11
                  cwbDT_Bin4ToBin4
                  cwbDT_EBCDICToEBCDIC
                  cwbDT_HexToASCII
                  cwbDT_PackedToASCII
                  cwbDT_PackedToASCIIPacked
                  cwbDT_PackedToPacked
                  cwbDT_ZonedToASCII
                  cwbDT_ZonedToASCIIZoned
                  cwbDT_ZonedToZoned
                Example: Using data transformation APIs
              IBM i Access for Windows National Language Support (NLS) APIs
                Coded character sets
                IBM i Access for Windows general NLS APIs list
                  cwbNL_FindFirstLang
                  cwbNL_FindNextLang
                  cwbNL_GetLang
                  cwbNL_GetLangName
                  cwbNL_GetLangPath
                  cwbNL_SaveLang
                IBM i Access for Windows conversion NLS APIs list
                  cwbNL_CCSIDToCodePage
                  cwbNL_CodePageToCCSID
                  cwbNL_Convert
                  cwbNL_ConvertCodePages
                  cwbNL_ConvertCodePagesEx
                  cwbNL_CreateConverter
                  cwbNL_CreateConverterEx
                  cwbNL_DeleteConverter
                  cwbNL_GetCodePage
                  cwbNL_GetANSICodePage
                  cwbNL_GetHostCCSID
                IBM i Access for Windows dialog-box NLS API list
                  cwbNL_CalcControlGrowthXY
                  cwbNL_CalcDialogGrowthXY
                  cwbNL_GrowControlXY
                  cwbNL_GrowDialogXY
                  cwbNL_LoadDialogStrings
                  cwbNL_LoadMenu
                  cwbNL_LoadMenuStrings
                  cwbNL_SizeDialog
                Example: IBM i Access for Windows NLS APIs
            IBM i Access for Windows Directory Update APIs
              Typical use of IBM i Access for Windows Directory Update APIs
              Requirements for Directory Update entries
              Options for Directory Update entries
              Directory Update package files syntax and format
              Directory Update sample program
              Directory Update: Create and delete APIs
                cwbUP_CreateUpdateEntry
                cwbUP_DeleteEntry
              Directory Update: Access APIs
                cwbUP_FindEntry
                cwbUP_FreeLock
                cwbUP_GetEntryHandle
              Directory Update: Free Resources APIs
                cwbUP_FreeEntryHandle
              Directory Update: Change APIs
                cwbUP_AddPackageFile
                cwbUP_RemovePackageFile
                cwbUP_SetCallbackDLL
                cwbUP_SetDescription
                cwbUP_SetEntryAttributes
                cwbUP_SetSourcePath
                cwbUP_SetTargetPath
              Directory Update: Information APIs
                cwbUP_GetCallbackDLL
                cwbUP_GetDescription
                cwbUP_GetEntryAttributes
                cwbUP_GetLockHolderName
                cwbUP_GetSourcePath
                cwbUP_GetTargetPath
            IBM i Access for Windows PC5250 emulation APIs
            System Objects APIs for IBM i Access for Windows
              System objects attributes
                Advanced Function Printing
                Align Page
                Allow Direct Print
                Authority
                Authority to Check
                Automatically End Writer
                Back Margin Offset Across
                Back Margin Offset Down
                Backside Overlay Library Name
                Backside Overlay Name
                Back Overlay offset across
                Back Overlay Offset Down
                Characters per Inch
                Code Page
                Coded Font Name
                Coded Font Library Name
                Copies
                Copies left to Produce
                Current page
                Data Format
                Data Queue Library Name
                Data Queue Name
                Date File Opened
                User Specified DBCS Data
                DBCS Extension Characters
                DBCS Character Rotation
                DBCS Characters per Inch
                DBCS SO/SI Spacing
                Defer Write
                Degree of Page Rotation
                Delete File After Sending
                Destination Option
                Destination Type
                Device Class
                Device Model
                Device Type
                Display any File
                Drawer for Separators
                Ending Page
                File Separators
                Fold Records
                Font Identifier
                Form Feed
                Form Type
                Form Type Message Option
                Front Margin Offset Across
                Front Margin Offset Down
                Front Overlay Library Name
                Front Overlay Name
                Front Overlay Offset Across
                Front Overlay Offset Down
                Graphic Character Set
                Hardware Justification
                Hold Spool File
                Initialize the writer
                Internet Address
                Job Name
                Job Number
                Job Separators
                Job User
                Last Page Printed
                Length of Page
                Library Name
                Lines Per Inch
                Manufacturer Type and Model
                Maximum Spooled Output Records
                Measurement Method
                Message Help
                Message ID
                Message Queue Library Name
                Message Queue
                Message Reply
                Message Text
                Message Type
                Message Severity
                Number of Bytes to Read/Write
                Number of Files
                Number of Writers Started to Queue
                Object Extended Attribute
                Open time commands
                Operator Controlled
                Order of Files On Queue
                Output Priority
                Output Queue Library Name
                Output Queue Name
                Output Queue Status
                Overflow Line Number
                Pages Per Side
                Pel Density
                Point Size
                Print Fidelity
                Print on Both Sides
                Print Quality
                Print Sequence
                Print Text
                Printer
                Printer Device Type
                Printer File Library Name
                Printer File Name
                Printer Queue
                Record Length
                Remote System
                Replace Unprintable Characters
                Replacement Character
                Resource library name
                Resource name
                Resource object type
                Restart Printing
                Save Spooled File
                Seek Offset
                Seek Origin
                Send Priority
                Separator page
                Source Drawer
                Spool SCS
                Spool the Data
                Spooled File Name
                Spooled File Number
                Spooled File Status
                Spooled Output Schedule
                Starting Page
                Text Description
                Time File Opened
                Total Pages
                Transform SCS to ASCII
                Unit of Measure
                User Comment
                User Data
                User defined data
                User defined object library
                User defined object name
                User defined object type
                User defined option(s)
                User driver program
                User driver program library
                User driver program name
                User ID
                User ID Address
                User transform program library
                User transform program name
                VM/MVS Class
                When to Automatically End Writer
                When to End Writer
                When to Hold File
                Width of Page
                Workstation Customizing Object Name
                Workstation Customizing Object Library
                Writer Job Name
                Writer Job Number
                Writer Job Status
                Writer Job User Name
                Writer Starting Page
                Network Print Server Object Attributes
                  NPS Attribute Default Value
                  NPS Attribute High Limit
                  NPS Attribute ID
                  NPS Attribute Low Limit
                  NPS Attribute Possible Value
                  NPS Attribute Text Description
                  NPS Attribute Type
                  NPS CCSID
                  NPS Object
                  NPS Object Action
                  NPS Level
              List APIs for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_CloseList
                cwbOBJ_CreateListHandle
                cwbOBJ_DeleteListHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetListSize
                cwbOBJ_OpenList
                cwbOBJ_ResetListAttrsToRetrieve
                cwbOBJ_ResetListFilter
                cwbOBJ_SetListAttrsToRetrieve
                cwbOBJ_SetListFilter
                cwbOBJ_SetListFilterWithSplF
              IBM i Access for Windows Object APIs
                cwbOBJ_CopyObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_DeleteObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetObjAttr
                cwbOBJ_GetObjAttrs
                cwbOBJ_GetObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetObjHandleFromID
                cwbOBJ_GetObjID
                cwbOBJ_RefreshObj
                cwbOBJ_SetObjAttrs
              IBM i Access for Windows Parameter object APIs
                cwbOBJ_CopyParmObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_CreateParmObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_DeleteParmObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetParameter
                cwbOBJ_SetParameter
              IBM i Access for Windows Writer job APIs
                cwbOBJ_EndWriter
                cwbOBJ_StartWriter
              IBM i Access for Windows output queues APIs
                cwbOBJ_HoldOutputQueue
                cwbOBJ_PurgeOutputQueue
                cwbOBJ_ReleaseOutputQueue
              IBM i Access for Windows AFP resource APIs
                cwbOBJ_CloseResource
                cwbOBJ_CreateResourceHandle
                cwbOBJ_DisplayResource
                cwbOBJ_OpenResource
                cwbOBJ_OpenResourceForSplF
                cwbOBJ_ReadResource
                cwbOBJ_SeekResource
              IBM i Access for Windows APIs for new spooled files
                cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplF
                cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplFAndGetHandle
                cwbOBJ_CreateNewSplF
                cwbOBJ_GetSplFHandleFromNewSplF
                cwbOBJ_WriteNewSplF
              APIs for reading spooled files for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_CloseSplF
                cwbOBJ_OpenSplF
                cwbOBJ_ReadSplF
                cwbOBJ_SeekSplF
              APIs for manipulating spooled files for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_CallExitPgmForSplF
                cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandle
                cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandleEx
                cwbOBJ_DeleteSplF
                cwbOBJ_DisplaySplF
                cwbOBJ_HoldSplF
                cwbOBJ_IsViewerAvailable
                cwbOBJ_MoveSplF
                cwbOBJ_ReleaseSplF
                cwbOBJ_SendNetSplF
                cwbOBJ_SendTCPSplF
              APIs for handling spooled file messages for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_AnswerSplFMsg
                cwbOBJ_GetSplFMsgAttr
              APIs for analyzing spooled file data for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_AnalyzeSplFData
              Server program APIs for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_DropConnections
                cwbOBJ_GetNPServerAttr
                cwbOBJ_SetConnectionsToKeep
              Example: Using system objects APIs for IBM i Access for Windows
            IBM i Access for Windows Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
              Typical use of IBM i Access for Windows Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
              Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access remote command APIs list for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbRC_GetClientCCSID
                cwbRC_GetHostCCSID
                cwbRC_StartSysEx
                cwbRC_StopSys
              Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Run APIs list for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbRC_RunCmd
              Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access programs APIs list for IBM i Access for Windows
                cwbRC_AddParm
                cwbRC_CallPgm
                cwbRC_CreatePgm
                cwbRC_DeletePgm
                cwbRC_GetLibName
                cwbRC_GetParm
                cwbRC_GetParmCount
                cwbRC_GetPgmName
                cwbRC_SetLibName
                cwbRC_SetParm
                cwbRC_SetPgmName
              Example: Using Remote IBM i Access for Windows Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
            IBM i Access for Windows Serviceability APIs
              History log and trace files
              Error handles
              Typical use of Serviceability APIs
              Serviceability APIs list: Writing to history log
                cwbSV_CreateMessageTextHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteMessageTextHandle
                cwbSV_LogMessageText
                cwbSV_SetMessageClass
                cwbSV_SetMessageComponent
                cwbSV_SetMessageProduct
              Serviceability APIs list: Writing trace data
                cwbSV_CreateTraceDataHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteTraceDataHandle
                cwbSV_LogTraceData
                cwbSV_SetTraceComponent
                cwbSV_SetTraceProduct
              Serviceability API list: Writing trace points
                cwbSV_CreateTraceAPIHandle
                cwbSV_CreateTraceSPIHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteTraceAPIHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteTraceSPIHandle
                cwbSV_LogAPIEntry
                cwbSV_LogAPIExit
                cwbSV_LogSPIEntry
                cwbSV_LogSPIExit
                cwbSV_SetAPIComponent
                cwbSV_SetAPIProduct
                cwbSV_SetSPIComponent
                cwbSV_SetSPIProduct
              Serviceability API list: Reading service files
                cwbSV_ClearServiceFile
                cwbSV_CloseServiceFile
                cwbSV_CreateServiceRecHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteServiceRecHandle
                cwbSV_GetComponent
                cwbSV_GetDateStamp
                cwbSV_GetMaxRecordSize
                cwbSV_GetMessageText
                cwbSV_GetProduct
                cwbSV_GetRecordCount
                cwbSV_GetServiceFileName
                cwbSV_GetServiceType
                cwbSV_GetTimeStamp
                cwbSV_GetTraceData
                cwbSV_GetTraceAPIData
                cwbSV_GetTraceAPIID
                cwbSV_GetTraceAPIType
                cwbSV_GetTraceSPIData
                cwbSV_GetTraceSPIID
                cwbSV_GetTraceSPIType
                cwbSV_OpenServiceFile
                cwbSV_ReadNewestRecord
                cwbSV_ReadNextRecord
                cwbSV_ReadOldestRecord
                cwbSV_ReadPrevRecord
              Serviceability API list: Retrieving message text
                cwbSV_CreateErrHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteErrHandle
                cwbSV_GetErrClass
                cwbSV_GetErrClassIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrCount
                cwbSV_GetErrFileName
                cwbSV_GetErrFileNameIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrLibName
                cwbSV_GetErrLibNameIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrSubstText
                cwbSV_GetErrSubstTextIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrText
                cwbSV_GetErrTextIndexed
              Example: Using IBM i Access for Windows Serviceability APIs
            IBM i Access for Windows System Object Access (SOA) APIs
              SOA objects
              System object views
              Typical use of System Object Access APIs for IBM i Access for Windows
                Display a customized list of system objects
                  Sample program: Display a customized list of system objects
                Display the Properties view for a system object
                  Sample program: Display the Properties view of an object
                Access and update data for system objects
                  Sample program: Access and update data for system objects
              IBM i Access for Windows System Object Access programming considerations
                About System Object Access errors
                System Object Access application profiles
                Manage IBM i communications sessions for application programs
              System Object Access APIs for IBM i Access for Windows List
                CWBSO_CloseList
                CWBSO_CopyObjHandle
                CWBSO_CreateErrorHandle
                CWBSO_CreateListHandle
                CWBSO_CreateListHandleEx
                CWBSO_CreateObjHandle
                CWBSO_CreateParmObjHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteErrorHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteListHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteObjHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteParmObjHandle
                CWBSO_DisallowListActions
                CWBSO_DisallowListFilter
                CWBSO_DisplayErrMsg
                CWBSO_DisplayList
                CWBSO_DisplayObjAttr
                CWBSO_GetErrMsgText
                CWBSO_GetListSize
                CWBSO_GetObjAttr
                CWBSO_GetObjHandle
                CWBSO_OpenList
                CWBSO_ReadListProfile
                CWBSO_RefreshObj
                CWBSO_ResetParmObj
                CWBSO_SetListFilter
                CWBSO_SetListProfile
                CWBSO_SetListSortFields
                CWBSO_SetListTitle
                CWBSO_SetObjAttr
                CWBSO_SetParameter
                CWBSO_WaitForObj
                CWBSO_WriteListProfile
                SOA attribute special values
                  Job attributes
                  Message attributes
                  Printer attributes
                  Printer output attributes
                  TCP/IP interfaces attributes
                  Ethernet lines attributes
                  Token-ring lines attributes
                  Hardware resources attributes
                  Software products attributes
                  TCP/IP routes attributes
                  Users and groups attributes
                  Libraries in QSYS attributes
          IBM i Access for Windows: Database programming
            IBM i Access for Windows .NET provider
            IBM i Access for Windows OLE DB provider
            IBM i Access ODBC
              Files required to build an ODBC application
                Choose an interface to access the ODBC driver
                ODBC C/C++ application header files
                ODBC APIs: General concepts
                Parameter markers
                SQLFetch and SQLGetData
                Code directly to ODBC APIs
                  Call stored procedures
                  Multiple row INSERT and multiple row FETCH examples
                  Example: Multiple row inserts using Visual Basic
                Retrieve results
                Access a database server with an ODBC application
                Establish ODBC connections
                Execute ODBC functions
                Execute prepared statements
                  SQLPrepare
                  SQLBindParameter
                  SQLExecute
                  SQLParamData and SQLPutData
                  Convert strings and arrays of byte
                  Performance architecture of the IBM i Access for Windows ODBC driver
                ODBC API return codes
                End ODBC functions
              Implementation issues of ODBC APIs
                ODBC 3.x API notes
                  SQL Statement Considerations
                Connection string keywords
                  Connection string keywords - General properties
                  Connection string keywords - Server properties
                  Connection string keywords - Data types
                  Connection string keywords - Package properties
                  Connection string keywords - Performance properties
                  Connection string keywords - Language properties
                  Connection string keywords - Catalog properties
                  Connection string keywords - Conversion properties
                  Connection string keywords - Diagnostic properties
                  Connection string keywords - other properties
                Version and release changes in the ODBC driver behavior
                ODBC API restrictions and unsupported functions
                Signon dialog behavior
                ODBC data types and how they correspond to DB2 for i database types
                Working with the XML data type
                Large objects (LOBs) considerations
                  Example: Use the BLOB data type
                Connection and statement attributes
                Connection pooling
                SQLPrepare and SQLNativeSQL escape sequences and scalar functions
                Distributed transaction support
                Cursor behavior notes
                Extended dynamic disabled error
                ODBC 64-bit Windows and Linux Considerations
                Restrictions of the 64–bit IBM i Access for Windows ODBC Driver
                SQLTables Description
                Handle long-running queries
                Isolation level considerations
              IBM i Access for Windows ODBC performance
                Performance-tuning IBM i Access for Windows ODBC
                  Introduction to server performance
                  Introduction to client/server performance
                  Performance architecture of the IBM i Access for Windows ODBC driver
                    Select a stringent level of commitment control
                    Fine-tune record-blocking
                    Use Extended Dynamic SQL
                Performance considerations of common end-user tools
                  Examples: Common tool behaviors that degrade ODBC performance
                    Example: Query tool A
                    Example: Query tool B
                    Example: Query tool C
                SQL performance
                  SQL performance general considerations
                  Database design
                    Normalization
                    Table size
                    Use indexes
                    Match attributes of join fields
                  Optimizer
                    Cost estimation
                    Optimizer decision-making rules
                ODBC support for multiple row statements
                Catalog functions
                Exit programs
                  Examples: User exit programs
                    Example: ILE C/400 user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
                    Example: CL user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
                    Example: ILE C/400 Program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1
                    Example: ILE C/400 program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1
                  Exit program parameter formats
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL2 format ZDAQ0200
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT format ZDAI0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0200
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1 format ZDAQ0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0200
                SQL and External procedures
                  Procedure result sets
                  Examples: Stored procedures
                    Example: Run CL commands that use SQL stored procedures and ODBC
                    Example: Stored procedure calls from Visual Basic with return values
                    Example: Call an IBM i stored procedure by using Visual Basic
                    Example: Call CL command using SQL CALL statement
                    Tips: Run and call IBM i procedures
              ODBC program examples
                Example: Visual C++ - Access and return data by calling a procedure
                Example: Visual Basic - Access and return data by a call to a procedure
                Examples: ILE RPG - Host code for ODBC procedures
            IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC Driver
            IBM i Access database APIs
          Java programming
            IBM Toolbox for Java
          ActiveX programming
        Operations Console
          What's new for IBM i 7.1
          PDF file for Operations Console
          Planning considerations for Operations Console
            Planning considerations for your configuration
              Console planning considerations
                Planning considerations for your backup console
              Verification of Operations Console requirements
                Operations Console hardware requirements
                Operations Console software requirements
              Planning considerations for your Operations Console installation or upgrade
              Preparation for your network environment
              Security of your Operations Console configuration
              Preparation for your Operations Console and System i Navigator configuration
              Scenario: Understanding your configuration
                Scenario: Consoles for multiple systems or partitions
            Planning considerations for your control panel
              Remote control panel
          PC preparations for Operations Console
            Completing the setup prerequisite checklist
              Setting up a local console on a network
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console on a network
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows Vista: Local console on a network
            Completing required prerequisite tasks
              Installing IBM i Access for Windows
                Applying IBM i Access for Windows service packs
              Configuring Operations Console on the PC
                Configuring a local console on a network (LAN)
                  Connecting a local console on a network to a system
          Managing Operations Console
            Takeover or recovery of an Operations Console connection
              Takeover details
              Recovery details
              Enabling console takeover
              Scenario: Takeover and recovery
                Scenario: LAN connected devices only with takeover enabled
            Managing your console configuration
              Connecting a local console to a system
                Connecting to another system
              Changing a console configuration
                Changing a local console on a network (LAN)
              Deleting a console configuration
              Using the Properties page
              Customizing the Operations Console window
            Management of multiple consoles
              Multiple local PC consoles on a network
            Changing from one console type to another
              Switching from one console type to another when the current console is not operational
              Changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN)
                Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN) in a nonpartitioned system
                Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN) in a logical partition
                Configuring the PC to use the new console type after changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN)
              Changing from an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN) to a twinaxial console
                Changing the console from an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN) to a twinaxial console in a nonpartitioned system
                Changing the console from an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN) to a twinaxial console in a logical partition
                Performing optional steps on the PC when changing from an Operations Console local console on a network (LAN) to a twinaxial console
            Managing your local console on a network
              Changing keyboard definitions
              Changing the mode of the emulator between 3179 and 3477
              Starting the system using a manual IPL
              Using the console service functions (65+21)
              Using the OPSCONSOLE macro
              Unlocking service tools device IDs in SST
              Operations Console simplification
              Considerations for changing the service tools device ID passwords
              Changing the service tools device ID password on the PC and system
              Changing the access password
              Resynchronizing the PC and service tools device ID password
                Resetting the service tools device ID password on the system
                  Resetting the service tools device ID password by using a console session with another device
                  Resetting the service tools device ID password by using unused service tools device ID
                  Resetting the QCONSOLE service device ID password by using the control panel or the remote control panel
                Resetting the service tools device ID password on the PC
              Creating service tools device IDs on the system
              Changing the value of the autocreate device ID option
              Changing the RCP privilege on autocreate device IDs
              Changing the value of the display console status screen option
              Changing the value of the Console F18 takeover option
              Configuring a service host name (interface name)
              Deallocating or moving the LAN adapter card from use by Operations Console
              Changing network values for Operations Console (LAN)
                Completing the PC changes
          Troubleshooting Operations Console connection
            Troubleshooting status message
              Status messages when configuration is running normally
              Status messages when you have connection problems
            Troubleshooting connection problems
              Local console connection problems
                Network connection errors
                Error message: The connection to the system is not a secure connection
                Local console status remains Connecting
                Unexpected disconnections
            Troubleshooting authentication problems
              Authentication errors
            Troubleshooting emulator problems
            Troubleshooting system reference code data
              System reference code A6nn500x
              System reference code A6005001, A6005004, and A6005007
              System reference code A6005008
              System reference code A6005082
              System reference code A9002000
              IPL step C6004031 takes longer than expected
            Troubleshooting remote control panel problems
              Remote control panel fails to start
              Unable to use the mode function
              Authentication problems
            Troubleshooting configuration wizard problems
              Old network data interfering with reconfiguration of network connectivity
            Troubleshooting other Operations Console problems
              Operations Console remains in QCTL
              System requests do not work
              Unable to sign on because of a lost or expired password or disabled user ID
              The user cannot perform the option selected
          Related information for Operations Console
      System i Access for Linux
        Printable PDFs
        IBM System i Access for Linux license information
        Prerequisites for using the System i Access for Linux product
        Install System i Access for Linux
        Update the System i Access for Linux product
        Uninstall the System i Access for Linux product
        System i Access for Linux security
        System i Access for Linux 5250 emulation
          Prerequisites for using 5250 emulation
          Configure 5250 emulation
            Command line emulator options
            X resources for the System i Access for Linux emulator
              Color mapping
              Image/fax (3849 emulation)
              Keyboard remapping
              Miscellaneous preferences
              Popup/pull down keypads
              Record/playback
              Screen print
              Session ID
            Languages for your emulator
            Emulator Ideographic (DBCS) configuration
              IBM 5250 DBCS settings, values, and fonts
              X Input Method (XIM) and Input Method Editors (IME) and encodings
              Use alternate X Input Method (XIME) with System i Access for Linux
              Example: Change X Input Method (XIME) for the Japanese language version
              Troubleshooting the X Input Method (XIME)
            Emulator resources
          Troubleshoot 5250 emulation
            5250 problem isolation
            Font problems
          System i Access for Linux 5250 emulation FAQs
        System i Access for Linux Open Database Connectivity
          Prerequisites for using ODBC
          ODBC language considerations
          ODBC 64-bit Windows and Linux Considerations
          Restrictions when using ODBC with the System i Access for Linux product
          Configure an ODBC data source
            Use GUI to configure an ODBC data source
            Manually configure an ODBC data source
            Connection string keywords and values
              Diagnostic properties
              Format properties
              General properties
              Other properties
              Package properties
              Performance properties
              Server properties
              Sort properties
              Translation properties
              Unsupported connection string keywords and values
          ODBC examples
          Troubleshoot an System i Access for Linux ODBC
            ODBC problem isolation
            Error messages
          ODBC FAQs
        System i Access for Linux utilities
          CWBCOPWR - Change advanced communications settings
          CWBMEDIC - Service information collection tool
          CWBNLTBL - Download conversion tables
          CWBPING - Test the connection to the server
          CWBRUNSQL - Run batch SQL commands and procedures using an ODBC DSN
          CWBTRC - Trace System i Access for Linux
          RMTCMD - Run a System i batch/CL command
          RMTODBC - Run a System i batch/CL command using the ODBC driver
    System i Navigator
      Getting to know System i Navigator
        PDF file for Getting to know System i Navigator
        System i Navigator functions by release
        Requirements for installing System i Navigator
        Installing System i Navigator
        Adding system connections to System i Navigator
        Working with System i Navigator
        Related information for System i Navigator
      System i Navigator tasks on the Web
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for System i Navigator tasks on the Web
        Setting up System i Navigator tasks on the Web
          Prerequisites for setting up System i Navigator tasks on the Web
          Configuring security for System i Navigator tasks on the Web
            Configuring Web browser connections to System i Navigator tasks on the Web
            Configuring data-retrieval connections to the local system and managed secondary systems
          Configuring Application Administration
        Working with System i Navigator tasks on the Web
        System i Navigator tasks on the Web reference information
          System i Navigator URL parameters and available Web tasks
          Working with System i Navigator lists on the Web
      IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
        Working with IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
        Related information for IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
      Application Administration
        PDF file for Application Administration
        Application Administration concepts
          Application registration
            Application registration on Local Settings
            Application registration on Central Settings
          System i Navigator plug-ins and Application Administration
          Access settings for a function
            How access to a function is determined
          Administration system
            How clients initially discover their administration system
          Advanced settings in Central Settings
            How advanced settings are obtained for a user
            Mandated and suggested values
          Management Central and Application Administration
          When changes take effect
          Application Administration as a security tool
        Installing Application Administration
        Planning your Application Administration strategy
          Planning for Application Administration
          Planning for the administration system and Central Settings
        Setting up Application Administration
          Setting up Application Administration for Local Settings
          Setting up the administration system for Central Settings
        Managing Application Administration
          Registering applications for Application Administration (Local Settings)
          Registering applications on the administration system (Central Settings)
          Working with a function's access setting
          Working with user or group access settings
          Working with Central Settings
        Scenarios: Application Administration
          Scenario: Setting up Application Administration
          Scenario: Setting up an administration system for Central Settings
      Management Central
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF files for Management Central
        Getting started with Management Central
          Before you begin
            Configuring TCP prerequisite checklist
            Management Central connection considerations
          Installing Management Central
            Checking for the most current MC code
            Installing and accessing Management Central
            Verifying the connection function
          Setting up the central system
            Setting up your central system for the first time
            Management Central settings and options
            Adding endpoint systems to your Management Central network
            How to completely remove endpoints
            Creating system groups in your Management Central network
            Changing the central system setup
          Management Central plug-ins
          Troubleshooting Management Central connections
        Working with Management Central monitors
          Management collection objects
          Job monitors and Collection Services
            The QYRMJOBSEL job
            QZRCSRVS jobs and their affect on performance
          Special considerations
          Creating a new monitor
            Selecting the metrics
            Specifying the threshold values
            Specifying the collection interval
            Specifying threshold run commands
            Specifying event logging and actions
            Applying thresholds and actions for a monitor
          Viewing monitor results
          Resetting triggered threshold for a monitor
        Using other features of Management Central
          Working with inventory
            Viewing an inventory
            How to use inventories
            Running actions on an inventory
            Searching a Management Central users and groups inventory
          Working with systems with partitions
          Running commands with Management Central
          Packaging and sending objects with Management Central
          Packaging and distribution considerations
          Managing users and groups with Management Central
          Sharing with other users in Management Central
          Synchronizing date and time values
          Synchronizing functions
          Scheduling tasks or jobs with Management Central scheduler
          Advanced Job Scheduler
            What's new for IBM i 7.1
            PDF file for Advanced Job Scheduler
            Advanced Job Scheduler on the Web
              Web URL direct access
              Advanced Job Scheduler properties
                General Properties
                Schedules
                Data libraries
                Setting up systems and groups
                Users
                Calendars
              Scheduled jobs
                Scheduled job list
                Creating a scheduled job
                Scheduled Job Properties
              Job groups
                Job group job list
                Creating a job group
              Notification
              Scheduled job activity
                Scheduled job activity list
                Scheduled job activity properties
              Activity log
                Activity log list
                Activity log properties
              Features not supported
            Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
            Scheduling jobs with Advanced Job Scheduler
              Installing the Advanced Job Scheduler
              Setting up the Advanced Job Scheduler
                Assigning the general properties
                Specifying permission levels
                Setting up a scheduling calendar
                Setting up a holiday calendar
                Setting up a fiscal calendar
                Specifying a mail server to use for notification
                Setting up multiple scheduling environments
                Assigning data libraries to users
                Setting up systems and groups
                  Adding a new system or system group
                    Communication type
              Managing the Advanced Job Scheduler
                Creating and scheduling a job
                Creating and scheduling a job group
                Predefined schedules
                  Setting up a predefined schedule
                  Adding a schedule to a scheduled job
                  Adding a schedule to a holiday calendar
                Creating a temporary scheduled job
                Scheduling job dependencies
                The Work Flow Manager
                  Creating a new work flow
                  Starting a work flow
                  Working with work flows
                Monitoring job activity for the Advanced Job Scheduler
                  Scheduled job activity
                  Specifying the activity retention
                  Viewing the scheduled job activity details
                  Viewing the scheduled job activity for a specific job
                  Viewing the activity log details
                  Viewing the activity log for a specific job
                Monitoring for messages with Advanced Job Scheduler
                Creating and working with local data area
                Creating and working with application controls and job controls
                Working with notification
                Working with library lists
                Working with command variables
              Working with Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
                Hardware and software requirements
                Selecting a device
                Configuring your wireless environment
                  Configuring your Web application server
                  Selecting a language
                Connecting to your IBM i operating system
                Customizing your connection
                Managing Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
              Troubleshooting the Advanced Job Scheduler
        Related information for Management Central
      Intelligent agents
    Operations Console
  Database
    PDF files for Database
    Database overview
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Database overview
      DB2 for IBM i
      Terminology: SQL versus traditional file access
      Getting started with System i Navigator
        Starting System i Navigator
        Creating a schema
        Editing the list of schemas displayed
        Creating and using a table
          Defining additional columns on a table
          Creating the supplier table
          Copying column definitions
          Viewing the contents of a table
          Changing information in a table
          Deleting information from a table
          Copying and moving a table
            Copying a table
            Moving a table
        Creating and using a view
          Creating a view over a single table
        Deleting database objects
      System i Navigator database tasks
        Database objects creation tasks
        Database objects operation tasks
        Database performance optimization tasks
        Mapping your database
        Querying your database by running SQL scripts
          Stopping SQL scripts
          Viewing the job log
          Generating SQL for existing objects
          Building SQL statements with SQL Assist
          Starting IBM i Debugger
        Managing check pending constraints
        Importing and exporting data
      Getting started with SQL
        Creating a schema
        Creating and using a table
          Using the LABEL ON statement
          Inserting information into a table
          Getting information from a single table
          Getting information from multiple tables
          Changing information in a table
          Deleting information from a table
        Creating and using a view
          Creating a view on a single table
          Creating a view that combines data from multiple tables
    Database information finder
    Administration
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Database administration
      Database administration
        Accessing data through client interfaces
          Accessing data with Java
          Accessing data with Domino
          Accessing data with ODBC
          Accessing data with i5/OS PASE
          Accessing data with IBM i Access for Windows OLE DB Provider
          Accessing data with IBM i Access for Windows .Net Provider
          Accessing data with Net.Data
          Accessing data through a Linux partition
          Accessing data using Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA)
        Altering and managing database objects
        Creating database objects
        Ensuring data integrity
        Importing and exporting data between systems
        Working with multiple databases
        Working with triggers and constraints
        Writing DB2 programs
      Database backup and recovery
      Distributed database administration
      Queries and reports
        BINARY, VARBINARY, HEX, and LENGTH functions for Query
      Security
        Authority Options for SQL Analysis and Tuning
    Commitment control
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Commitment control
      Commitment control concepts
        How commitment control works
        How commit and rollback operations work
          Commit operation
          Rollback operation
        Commitment definition
          Scope for a commitment definition
          Commitment definition names
          Example: Jobs and commitment definitions
        How commitment control works with objects
          Types of committable resources
          Local and remote committable resources
          Access intent of a committable resource
          The commit protocol of a committable resource
          Journaled files and commitment control
          Sequence of journal entries under commitment control
          Commit cycle identifier
          Record locking
        Commitment control and independent disk pools
          Independent disk pool considerations for commitment definitions
          Considerations for XA transactions
        Considerations and restrictions for commitment control
        Commitment control for batch applications
        Two-phase commitment control
          Roles in commit processing
          States of the transaction for two-phase commitment control
          Commitment definitions for two-phase commitment control
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Allow vote read-only
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not wait for outcome
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Indicate OK to leave out
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not select a last agent
            Vote reliable effect on flow of commit processing
        XA transaction support for commitment control
        SQL server mode and thread-scoped transactions for commitment control
      Starting commitment control
        Commit notify object
        Commit lock level
      Ending commitment control
      System-initiated end of commitment control
        Commitment control during activation group end
        Implicit commit and rollback operations
        Commitment control during normal routing step end
        Commitment control during abnormal system or job end
        Updates to the notify object
        Commitment control recovery during initial program load after abnormal end
      Managing transactions and commitment control
        Displaying commitment control information
          Displaying locked objects for a transaction
          Displaying jobs associated with a transaction
          Displaying resource status of a transaction
          Displaying transaction properties
        Optimizing performance for commitment control
          Minimizing locks
          Managing transaction size
          Soft commit
      Scenarios and examples: Commitment control
        Scenario: Commitment control
        Practice problem for commitment control
          Logic flow for practice problem
          Steps associated with the logic flow for the practice program
        Example: Using a transaction logging file to start an application
        Example: Using a notify object to start an application
          Example: Unique notify object for each program
          Example: Single notify object for all programs
        Example: Using a standard processing program to start an application
          Example: Code for a standard processing program
            Processing flow
          Example: Code for a standard commit processing program
          Example: Using a standard processing program to decide whether to restart the application
      Troubleshooting transactions and commitment control
        Commitment control errors
          Error conditions
          Nonerror conditions
          Error messages to monitor during commitment control
          Monitoring for errors after a CALL command
          Failure of normal commit or rollback processing
        Detecting deadlocks
        Recovering transactions after communications failure
        When to force commit and rollback operations and when to cancel resynchronization
        Ending a long-running rollback
        Finding large or old transactions
      Related information
    Performance and query optimization
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      Print PDF
      Query engine overview
        SQE and CQE engines
        Query dispatcher
        Statistics manager
        Global Statistics Cache
        Plan cache
      Data access methods
        Permanent objects & access methods
          Table
            Table scan
            Table probe
          Radix index
            Radix index scan
            Radix index probe
          Encoded vector index
            EVI probe
            EVI index-only access
            EVI symbol table scan
            EVI symbol table probe
        Temporary objects & access methods
          Temporary hash table
            Hash table scan
            Hash table probe
          Temporary sorted list
            Sorted list scan
            Sorted list probe
          Temporary distinct sorted list
            Sorted list scan
          Temporary list
            List scan
          Temporary values list
            Values list scan
          Temporary row number list
            Row number list scan
            Row number list probe
          Temporary bitmap
            Bitmap scan
            Bitmap probe
          Temporary index
            Temporary index scan
            Temporary index probe
          Temporary buffer
            Buffer scan
          Queue
            Enqueue
            Dequeue
          Array unnest temporary table
            Array unnest temporary table scan
        Objects processed in parallel
        Spreading data automatically
      Processing queries: Overview
        Query optimizer
        Query optimization tips
        Access plan validation
        Single table optimization
        Join optimization
          Nested loop join
          Join optimization
          Join order optimization
          Full outer join
          Join cost & index selection
          Transitive closure predicates
          LPG
          CQE Join performance tips
          Multiple join types
          Join performance problems
          Join performance tips
        Distinct optimization
        Grouping optimization
          Hash grouping
          Index grouping
          Eliminate grouping columns
          Add grouping columns
          Index skip key processing
          Read trigger considerations
          Grouping set optimization
        Ordering optimization
        View implementation
          View composite
          View materialization
        MQT optimization
          MQT supported function
          Using MQTs
          MQT examples
          MQT matching
          Determining MQT usage
          MQT recommendations
        Recursive query optimization
          Example
          Multiple initialization & iterative fullselects
          Predicate pushing
          SEARCH considerations
          CYCLE considerations
          SMP & recursive queries
        Adaptive Query Processing
          How AQP works
          AQP example
          AQP join order
          Database Monitor additions
      Tools
        Health Center
          Navigator view
          SQL procedures
            Health_Database_Overview
            Health_Activity
            Health_Design_Limits
            Health_Size_Limits
            Health_Environmental_Limits
            Reset_Environmental_Limits
        Database Monitor
          Start
          End
          Performance rows
          Examples
            Application with table scans
            Queries with table scans
            Table scan detail
            Additional examples
        Navigator monitors
          Start
          Analyze data
          Compare data
          View statements
          Import
        Index advisor
          Display information
            System table
          Column descriptions
          Database monitor view
          Condense advice
        Visual Explain
          Start
          Information available
          Adaptive Query Processing in VE
        SQL Plan Cache
          Show Statements
          Column descriptions
          Properties
          Creating snapshots
          Event monitor
          SQL stored procedures
        Verify performance
        View debug messages
        Print SQL Information
        Tool comparison
        Change query attributes
          QAQQINI
            CHGQRYA
            Create
            Override support
            File format
            Update
            Authority requirements
            System-supplied triggers
            Query options
            SQL_XML_DATA_CCSID option
          Predictive Query Governor
            How to use
            Cancel a query
            Control the reply
            Test performance
            Time limit examples
            Test temporary storage use
            Storage limit examples
          Parallel processing
            System-wide
            Job level
        Statistics manager
          Automatic collection
          Automatic refresh
          View requests
          Indexes and column statistics
          Background collection
          Replicate column statistics
          View column statistics
          Manual collection and refresh
          APIs
        Display MQT columns
        Check pending constraints
      Creating an index strategy
        Binary radix indexes
          Derived key index
          Sparse indexes
            Optimization
            Matching algorithm
            Sparse index examples
          Specify PAGESIZE
          Index maintenance
        Encoded vector indexes
          How the EVI works
          When to create
          Maintenance
          Recommendations
        Compare radix & EVIs
        Indexes & the optimizer
          Index not used
          Display indexes for a table
          Determine unnecessary indexes
          Reset usage counts
          View index builds
          Manage index rebuilds
        Indexing strategy
          Reactive approach
          Proactive approach
        Coding for effective indexes
          Avoid numeric conversions
          Avoid arithmetic expressions
          Avoid character string padding
          LIKE considerations
          Derived indexes
          Sparse indexes
        Indexes with sort sequence
          Selection, joins, or grouping
          Ordering
        Index examples
          Equal selection, no sort sequence
          Equal selection, unique-weight sort sequence
          Equal selection, shared-weight sort sequence
          Greater than selection, unique-weight sort sequence
          Join selection, unique-weight sort sequence
          Join selection, shared-weight sort sequence
          Order, no sort sequence
          Order, unique-weight sort sequence
          Order, shared-weight sort sequence
          Order, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), unique-weight sort sequence
          Group, no sort sequence
          Group, unique-weight sort sequence
          Group, shared-weight sort sequence
          Order & group on same columns, unique-weight sort sequence
          Order & group on same columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), unique-weight sort sequence
          Order & group on same columns, shared-weight sort sequence
          Order & group on same columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), shared-weight sort sequence
          Order & group on different columns, unique-weight sort sequence
          Order & group on different columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), unique-weight sort sequence
          Order & group on different columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), shared-weight sort sequence
          Sparse index examples
      Application design tips
        Live data
        Reduce open operations
        Retain cursor positions
          Non-ILE program calls
          ILE program calls
          General rules
      Programming techniques
        Use the OPTIMIZE clause
        Use FETCH FOR n ROWS
          Improve SQL blocking performance
        Use INSERT n ROWS
        Control database manager blocking
        Optimize columns selected
        PREPARE considerations
        REFRESH(*FORWARD) considerations
        Improve concurrency
      Performance considerations
        Long object names
        Precompile options
        ALWCPYDTA
        VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC
        Field procedures
          Examples
      SYSTOOLS
        Using SYSTOOLS
      Database monitor formats
        SQL table
        SQL view
          1000 - SQL Information
          3000 - Table Scan
          3001 - Index Used
          3002 - Index Created
          3003 - Query Sort
          3004 - Temp Table
          3005 - Table Locked
          3006 - Access Plan Rebuilt
          3007 - Optimizer Timed Out
          3008 - Subquery Processing
          3010 - Host Variable, ODP Implementation
          3011 - Array Host Variables
          3012 - Global Variables
          3014 - Generic QQ Information
          3015 - Statistics Information
          3018 - STRDBMON/ENDDBMON
          3019 - Rows retrieved
          3020 - Index advised (SQE)
          3021 - Bitmap Created
          3022 - Bitmap Merge
          3023 - Temp Hash Table Created
          3025 - Distinct Processing
          3026 - Set operation
          3027 - Subquery Merge
          3028 - Grouping
          3030 - Materialized query tables
          3031 - Recursive common table expressions
      Messages reference
        Performance information
        Open data paths
        PRTSQLINF
    Programming
      Database programming
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for Database programming
        Database file concepts
          DB2 for i
          Interfaces to DB2 for i
            Traditional system interface
            SQL
            System i Navigator
            IBM Query for i
          Database files
          How database files are described
            Externally and program-described data
            Dictionary-described data
            Record format description
            Access path description
            Naming conventions for a database file
          Database data protection and monitoring
          Database file sizes
            Example: Database file sizes
        Setting up database files
          Creating and describing database files
            Creating a library
            Setting up source files
              Why source files are used
              Creating a source file
                Creating a source file using the Create Source Physical File (CRTSRCPF) command
                Creating a source file with DDS
                Creating a source file without DDS
                IBM-supplied source files
                Source file attributes
            Describing database files
              Describing database files using DDS
                Example: Describing a physical file using DDS
                Example: Describing a logical file using DDS
                Additional DDS field definition functions
                Using existing field descriptions and field reference files to describe a database file
                Using a data dictionary for field reference in a database file
                Sharing existing record format descriptions in a database file
                  Record format relationships between physical and logical files
                  Record format sharing limitation with physical and logical files
              Specifying database file and member attributes
                Specifying the file name and member name (FILE and MBR) parameters
                Specifying the physical file data members (DTAMBRS) parameter
                Specifying the source file and source member (SRCFILE and SRCMBR) parameters
                Specifying the file type (FILETYPE) parameter
                Specifying the maximum number of members (MAXMBRS) parameter
                Specifying the preferred storage unit (UNIT) parameter
                Specifying the force write ratio (FRCRATIO) parameter
                Specifying the force keyed access path (FRCACCPTH) parameter
                Specifying the record format level check (LVLCHK) parameter
                Specifying the access path maintenance (MAINT) parameter
                  MAINT parameter comparison
                  MAINT parameter tips
                Specifying the access path recovery (RECOVER) parameter
                Specifying the share open data path (SHARE) parameter
                Specifying the maximum file and record wait time (WAITFILE and WAITRCD) parameters
                Specifying the authority (AUT) parameter
                Specifying the system (SYSTEM) parameter
                Specifying the text description (TEXT) parameter
                Specifying the coded character set identifier (CCSID) parameter
                Specifying the sort sequence (SRTSEQ) parameter
                Specifying the language identifier (LANGID) parameter
            Setting up physical files
              Creating a physical file
              Specifying physical file and member attributes
                Expiration date
                Size of a physical file member
                Storage allocation
                Method of allocating storage
                Record length
                Deleted records
                Physical file capabilities
                Source type
              Implicit physical file journaling
          Setting up logical files
            Creating a logical file
              Creating a logical file with more than one record format
                Controlling how records are retrieved in a logical file with multiple formats
                Controlling how records are added to a logical file with multiple formats
              Defining logical file members
            Describing logical file record formats
              Describing field use for logical files
                Describing field use for logical files: Both
                Describing field use for logical files: Input only
                Describing field use for logical files: Neither
              Deriving new fields from existing fields
                Concatenated fields
                Substring fields
                Renamed fields
                Translated fields
              Describing floating-point fields in logical files
            Describing access paths for logical files
              Selecting and omitting records for logical files
                Access path select/omit
                Dynamic select/omit
                Selecting and omitting logical file records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              Sharing existing access paths between logical files
                Example: Implicitly shared access paths
            Setting up a join logical file
              Example 1: Joining two physical files
                Reading a join logical file
                Case 1: Matching records in primary and secondary files
                Case 2A: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword not specified)
                Case 2B: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword specified)
                Case 3: Secondary file has more than one match for a record in the primary file
                Case 4: An extra record in the secondary file
                Case 5: Random access
              Example 2: Using more than one field to join files
              Example 3: Reading duplicate records in the secondary file
              Example 4: Using join fields whose attributes are different
              Example 5: Describing fields that never appear in the record format
              Example 6: Specifying key fields in a join logical file
              Example 7: Joining three or more physical files
              Example 8: Joining a physical file to itself
              Example 9: Using defaults for missing records from secondary files
              Example 10: A complex join logical file
              Join logical file considerations
                Performance considerations
                Data integrity considerations
                Summary of rules
                  Requirements
                  Join fields
                  Fields in join logical files
          Describing access paths for database files
            Using arrival sequence access paths for database files
            Using keyed sequence access paths for database files
              Arranging key fields in an alternative collating sequence
              Arranging key fields with the SRTSEQ parameter
              Arranging key fields in ascending or descending sequence
              Using more than one key field
              Preventing duplicate key values
              Arranging duplicate keys
            Using existing access path specifications
            Using binary floating-point fields in database file access paths
          Securing database files
            Granting file and data authority
              Authorizing a user or group using System i Navigator
              Types of object authority
              Types of data authority
            Specifying public authority
              Defining public authority using System i Navigator
              Setting a default public authority using System i Navigator
            Using database file capabilities to control I/O operations
            Limiting access to specific fields in a database file
            Using logical files to secure data
        Processing database files
          Database file processing: Runtime considerations
            File and member name
            File processing options
              Specifying the type of processing
              Specifying the initial file position
              Reusing deleted records
              Ignoring the keyed sequence access path
              Delaying end-of-file processing
              Specifying the record length
              Ignoring record formats
              Determining whether duplicate keys exist
            Data recovery and integrity
              Protecting your files with journaling and commitment control
              Writing data and access paths to auxiliary storage
              Checking changes to the record format description
              Checking the expiration date of a physical file member
              Preventing the job from changing data in a file
            Locking shared data
              Locking records
              Locking files
              Locking members
              Locking record format data
              Database lock considerations
              Displaying locked rows using System i Navigator
              Displaying locked records using the Display Record Locks (DSPRCDLCK) command
            Sharing database files in the same job or activation group
              Open considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
              Input/output considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
              Close considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
                Example 1: A single set of files with similar processing options
                Example 2: Multiple sets of files with similar processing options
                Example 3: A single set of files with different processing options
            Sequential-only processing of database files
              Open considerations for sequential-only processing
              Input/output considerations for sequential-only processing
              Close considerations for sequential-only processing
            Summary of runtime considerations for processing database files
            Storage pool paging option effect on database performance
          Opening a database file
            Opening a database file member
            Using Open Database File (OPNDBF) command
            Using Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              Creating queries
                Creating an open query file using an existing record format
                Creating an open query file using a different record format
              Dynamically selecting records
                Example 1: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 2: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 3: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 4: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 5: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 6: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 7: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 8: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 9: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 10: Dynamically selecting records
                Example 11: Dynamically selecting records
              Arranging records
                Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                  Example 1: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                  Example 2: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                  Example 3: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                  Example 4: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                Specifying key fields from different physical files
                Unique-key processing
                  Example 1: Unique-key processing
                  Example 2: Unique-key processing
                Random processing
                Considerations for arranging records
              Formatting records
                Defining fields mapped from existing fields
                  Example 1: Defining fields mapped from existing fields
                  Example 2: Defining fields mapped from existing fields
                  Example 3: Defining fields mapped from existing fields
                Considerations for specifying record formats
              Grouping records
                Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
                  Example: Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
                Final total-only processing
                  Example 1: Final total-only processing
                  Example 2: Final total-only processing
                  Example 3: Final total-only processing
                Grouping field references
              Joining records
                Dynamically joining database files
                  Example 1: Dynamically joining database files
                  Example 2: Dynamically joining database files
                  Example 3: Dynamically joining database files
                Handling missing records in secondary join files
              Optimizing performance
                Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 1: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 2: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Runtime messages for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations
                Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations for sort sequence tables
                  Grouping, joining, and selection: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
                  Ordering: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
                Performance comparisons with other database functions
              Handling errors
                Typical errors when using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Handling divide-by-zero errors
              Usage notes for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Command elements
                  Field names
                  Expressions
                  Built-in functions
                  Restricted built-in functions
                Data type considerations
                  Comparing date, time, and timestamp using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Performing date, time, and timestamp arithmetic using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                    Durations
                    Rules for date, time, and timestamp arithmetic
                    Subtracting dates
                    Incrementing and decrementing dates
                    Subtracting times
                    Incrementing and decrementing times
                    Subtracting timestamps
                    Incrementing and decrementing timestamps
                  BLOB, CLOB, DBCLOB, and XML considerations
                  DATALINK considerations
                DDM file considerations
                Input and output considerations
                  Using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command for more than just input
                  Field usage attribute
                Open data path considerations
                  Files shared in a job
                  Checking if the record format description changed
                  Copying from an open query file
                    Example 1: Copying from an open query file
                    Example 2: Copying from an open query file
                    Example 3: Copying from an open query file
                    Example 4: Copying from an open query file
                Override considerations
                Program considerations
                  Considerations for writing a high-level language program
                  CL program coding with the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
          Basic database file operations in programs
            Setting a position in the file
            Reading database records
              Reading database records using an arrival sequence access path
                Reading next operation
                Reading previous operation
                Reading first operation
                Reading last operation
                Reading same operation
                Reading by relative record number operation
              Reading database records using a keyed sequence access path
                Reading next operation
                Reading previous operation
                Reading first operation
                Reading last operation
                Reading same operation
                Reading by key operation
                Reading by relative record number operation
                Reading when logical file shares an access path with more keys operation
              Waiting for more records when end of file is reached
              Releasing locked records
            Updating database records
            Adding database records
              Identifying which record format to add in a file with multiple formats
              Using the force-end-of-data operation
            Deleting database records
          Closing a database file
          Monitoring database file errors in a program
            System handling of error messages
            Effect of error messages on file positioning
            Determining which messages you want to monitor
        Managing database files
          Basic operations for managing database files
            Copying a file
            Moving a file
          Managing database members
            Member operations common to all database files
              Adding members
              Changing member attributes
              Renaming members
              Removing members
            Physical file member operations
              Initializing data in a physical file member
              Clearing data from a physical file member
              Reorganizing a physical file member
                Reorganizing a table using System i Navigator
                Reorganizing a physical file member using the Reorganize Physical File Member (RGZPFM) command
                  Example: Reorganizing a physical file member
                Usage notes: Reorganizing a physical file member
                Reorganization options
                Suspending or canceling a reorganize operation
              Displaying records in a physical file member
          Using database attribute and cross-reference information
            Displaying information about database files
              Displaying attributes of a file using System i Navigator
              Displaying attributes of a file using the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
              Displaying the description of the fields in a file
              Displaying the relationships between files on the system
              Displaying the files used by programs
              Displaying the system cross-reference files
            Writing the output from a command directly to a database file
              Example: A command output file
              Output files for the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
              Output files for the Display Journal (DSPJRN) command
              Output files for the Display Problems (DSPPRB) command
          Changing database file descriptions and attributes
            Effects of changing fields in a file description
            Changing a physical file description and attributes
              Example 1: Changing a physical file description and attributes
              Example 2: Changing a physical file description and attributes
            Changing a logical file description and attributes
          Recovering and restoring your database
            Recovering data in a database file
              Managing journals
                Journals
                Working with journals
                  Creating a journal using System i Navigator
                  Creating a journal receiver using System i Navigator
                  Values for new journals and journal receivers
                  Adding a remote journal using System i Navigator
                  Removing a remote journal using System i Navigator
                  Activating a remote journal using System i Navigator
                  Deactivating a remote journal using System i Navigator
                  Displaying journal information for a table using System i Navigator
                  Swapping journal receivers using System i Navigator
                  Starting or ending journaling for libraries
                  Starting or ending journaling for tables (files) using System i Navigator
              Ensuring data integrity with commitment control
                Transactions
                Benefits of using commitment control
                Usage notes: Commitment control
            Reducing time in access path recovery
              Saving access paths
              Restoring access paths
              Journaling access paths
              System-managed access-path protection
              Rebuilding access paths
                Controlling when access paths are rebuilt
                Designing files to reduce access path rebuilding time
                Other methods to avoid rebuilding access paths
            Database recovery process after an abnormal system end
              Database file recovery during the IPL
              Database file recovery after the IPL
              Effects of the storage pool paging option on database recovery
              Database file recovery options table
            Database save and restore
            Database considerations for save and restore
          Using source files
            Working with source files
              Using the source entry utility
              Using device source files
              Copying source file data
                Copying to and from source files using the Copy Source File (CPYSRCF) command
                Copying to and from source files using the Copy File (CPYF) command
                Source sequence numbers used in copies
              Loading and unloading data from systems other than System i
              Using source files in a program
            Creating an object using a source file
              Creating an object from source statements in a batch job
              Determining which source file member was used to create an object
            Managing a source file
              Changing source file attributes
              Reorganizing source file member data
              Determining when a source statement was changed
              Using source files for documentation
          Controlling the integrity of your database with constraints
            Setting up constraints for your database
            Removing unique, primary key, or check constraints
            Working with a group of constraints
              Details: Working with a group of constraints
              Working with constraints that are in check pending status
                Displaying records that put a constraint in check pending status
                Processing constraints that are in check pending status
            Unique constraints
            Primary key constraints
            Check constraints
          Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
            Adding referential constraints
              Before you add referential constraints
              Defining the parent file in a referential constraint
              Defining the dependent file in a referential constraint
              Specifying referential constraint rules
                Details: Specifying referential constraint delete rules
                Details: Specifying referential constraint update rules
                Details: Specifying referential constraint rules—journaling requirements
              Details: Adding referential constraints
              Details: Avoiding constraint cycles
            Verifying referential constraints
            Enabling or disabling referential constraints
            Removing referential constraints
              Details: Removing a constraint with the CST parameter
              Details: Removing a constraint with the TYPE parameter
            Details: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
            Example: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
            Referential integrity terms
            Referential integrity enforcement
              Foreign key enforcement
              Parent key enforcement
                Enforcement of delete rules
                Enforcement of update rules
            Constraint states
            Check pending status in referential constraints
              Dependent file restrictions in check pending
              Parent file restrictions in check pending
            Referential integrity and CL commands
          Triggering automatic events in your database
            Uses for triggers
            Benefits of using triggers in your business
            Creating trigger programs
              Adding triggers using System i Navigator
              How trigger programs work
              Other important information about working with trigger programs
                Recommendations for trigger programs
                Precautions to take when coding trigger programs
                  Functions to use with care in trigger programs
                  Commands, statements, and operations that you cannot use in trigger programs
                Monitoring the use of trigger programs
                Trigger and application programs that are under commitment control
                Trigger and application programs that are not under commitment control
                Trigger program error messages
              Example: Trigger program
              Trigger buffer sections
                Trigger buffer field descriptions
            Adding triggers
            Displaying triggers
            Removing triggers
            Enabling or disabling physical file triggers
            Triggers and their relationship to CL commands
            Triggers and their relationship to referential integrity
          Database distribution
        Double-byte character set considerations
          DBCS field data types
          DBCS field mapping considerations
          DBCS field concatenation
          DBCS field substring operations
          Comparing DBCS fields in a logical file
          Using DBCS fields in the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
            Using the wildcard function with DBCS fields
            Comparing DBCS fields through the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
            Using concatenation with DBCS fields
            Using sort sequence with DBCS fields
        Related information
      Distributed database programming
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for Distributed database programming
        DRDA and DDM overview
          DRDA overview
            Distributed relational database processing
              Remote unit of work
              Distributed unit of work
              Distributed request
                Three-Part Names
                Aliases
              Other distributed relational database terms and concepts
            Distributed Relational Database Architecture support
            DRDA and CDRA support
            Application requester driver programs
            Distributed relational database on i5/OS
            Example: Spiffy Corporation distributed relational database
              Spiffy organization and system profile
              Business processes of the Spiffy Corporation Automobile Service
              Distributed relational database administration for the Spiffy Corporation
          DDM overview
            System compatibility
            Overview of DDM functions
            Basic DDM concepts
            Parts of DDM
              Parts of DDM: Source DDM
              Parts of DDM: Target DDM
              Parts of DDM: DDM file
                DDM file creation using SNA
                DDM file creation using TCP/IP
                DDM file creation using RDB directory entry information
                  Effect of job description on ASP group selection
                Example: Using the basic concepts of DDM in an APPC network
                Example: Using the basic concepts of DDM in an APPN network
            Additional DDM concepts
              i5/OS as the client system for DDM
                Integrated Language Environment and DDM
                Client system actions dependent on type of server system
              i5/OS as the server system for DDM
              DDM-related jobs and DDM conversations
            Examples: Accessing multiple remote files with DDM
              Example: Accessing files on multiple systems with DDM
              Example: Processing multiple requests for remote files with DDM
        Planning and design
          Planning and design for DRDA
            Identifying your needs and expectations for a distributed relational database
              Data needs for distributed relational databases
              Distributed relational database capabilities
              Goals and directions for a distributed relational database
            Designing the application, network, and data for a distributed relational database
              Tips: Designing distributed relational database applications
              Network considerations for a distributed relational database
              Data considerations for a distributed relational database
            Developing a management strategy for a distributed relational database
              General operations for a distributed relational database
              Security considerations for a distributed relational database
              Accounting for a distributed relational database
              Problem analysis for a distributed relational database
              Backup and recovery for a distributed relational database
          Planning and design for DDM
            Communications requirements for DDM in an APPC network
            Configuring a communications network in a TCP/IP network
            Security requirements for DDM
            File requirements for DDM
            Program modification requirements for DDM
              DDM architecture-related restrictions
              i5/OS client and server restrictions and considerations for DDM
              Non-i5/OS target restrictions and considerations for DDM
        Initial setup
          i5/OS work management
            Setting up your work management environment
            APPC subsystems
            TCP/IP subsystems
          User databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
          Using the relational database directory
            Working with the relational database directory
              Adding an entry for SNA usage
              Adding an entry for TCP/IP usage
              Specifying a relational database alias name
              Adding an entry for an application requester driver
              Using the WRKRDBDIRE command
              The *LOCAL directory entry
              Directory entries for user databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
            Example: Setting up a relational database directory
          Setting up security
          Setting up the TCP/IP server
          Setting up SQL packages for interactive SQL
          Setting up DDM files
          Loading data into tables in a distributed relational database
            Loading new data into the tables of a distributed relational database
              Loading data into a table using SQL
              Manipulating data in tables and files using the i5/OS query management function
              Entering data, update tables, and make inquiries using data file utility
            Moving data from one system to another
              Creating a user-written application program
              Querying a database using interactive SQL
              Querying remote systems using DB2 for i query management function
              Copying files to and from tape
              Moving data between systems using copy file commands
              Transferring data over network using network file commands
              Moving a table using object save and restore commands
            Moving a database to i5/OS from a system other than i5/OS
              Moving data from another IBM system
              Moving data from a non-IBM system
        Security
          Elements of distributed relational database security
            Elements of security in an APPC network
              APPN configuration lists
              Conversation level security
              DRDA server security in an APPC network
            Elements of security in a TCP/IP network
              Client security in a TCP/IP network
              Server security in a TCP/IP network
              Connection security protocols
              Secure Sockets Layer
                Required programs
                IBM i requirements
              Internet Protocol Security Architecture
              Considerations for certain passwords being sent as clear text
              Ports and port restrictions
          Server access control exit programs
            Server access control exit program parameter list
            Example: Server access control exit program
          Object-related security
          DRDA: Authority to distributed relational database objects
          DRDA: Programs that run under adopted authority for a distributed relational database
          Protection strategies in a distributed relational database
        Application development
          Application development for DRDA
            Programming considerations for a distributed relational database application
              Naming of distributed relational database objects
                System (*SYS) naming convention
                SQL (*SQL) naming convention
                Default collection name
              Connecting to a distributed relational database
                Remote unit of work
                  Activation group states
                    Connectable and connected state
                    Unconnectable and connected state
                    Connectable and unconnected state
                Distributed unit of work
                  Activation group states
                    Initial state of an activation group
                  Connection states
                  Activation group connection states
                  When a connection is ended
                  Run with both RUW and DUW connection management
                Implicit connection management for the default activation group
                Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
                Explicit connection management
              SQL specific to distributed relational database and SQL CALL
                Distributed relational database statements
                SQL CALL statement (stored procedures)
                  DB2 for i CALL considerations
                DB2 for i coexistence
              Ending DRDA units of work
              Stored procedures, user-defined functions, and commitment control
              Coded character set identifier
                i5/OS support
              Other DRDA data conversion
            Preparing distributed relational database programs
              Precompiling programs with SQL statements
                Listing
                Temporary source file member
                SQL package creation
                Precompiler commands
              Compiling an application program
              Binding an application
              Testing and debugging
                Program references
            Working with SQL packages
              Using the Create SQL Package (CRTSQLPKG) command
              Managing an SQL package
                Displaying information about an SQL package
                Deleting an SQL package using the Delete SQL Package (DLTSQLPKG) command
                Modifying package authorizations
                Using the SQL DROP PACKAGE statement
          Application development for DDM
            DDM files and SQL
            Using language, utility, and application support for DDM
              Programming language considerations for DDM
                DDM considerations for all languages
                  HLL program input and output operations with i5/OS DDM
                Commitment control support for DDM
                  Using DDM files with commitment control
                ILE RPG considerations for DDM
                ILE COBOL considerations for DDM
                  Direct file support with ILE COBOL
                PL/I considerations for DDM
                CL command considerations for DDM
                ILE C considerations for DDM
              Utility considerations for DDM
                System/38-compatible database tools
                  System/38-compatible data file utility (DFU/38)
                  System/38-compatible query utility (Query/38)
                  Non-i5/OS or non-System/38 Query/38 example
                  Query/38 output considerations for DDM
                  Query/38 command considerations for DDM
                  Query/38 optimization for DDM
                  Existing Query/38 application considerations for DDM
                Data file utility for i5/OS
                i5/OS database query
                Sort utility
              System i Access Family considerations for DDM
                IBM i Access Family transfer function considerations
                IBM i Access Family copy command considerations
              Hierarchical file system API support for DDM
            Using CL and DDS with DDM
              DDM-specific CL commands
                Change DDM File (CHGDDMF) command
                Create DDM File (CRTDDMF) command
                Display DDM Files (DSPDDMF) command
                Reclaim DDM Conversations (RCLDDMCNV) command
                Submit Remote Command (SBMRMTCMD) command
                  i5/OS and System/38 server systems on the SBMRMTCMD command
                  Restrictions for the SBMRMTCMD command
                  Examples: SBMRMTCMD command
                  Additional considerations: SBMRMTCMD command
                Work with DDM Files (WRKDDMF) command
              DDM-related CL command considerations
                File management handling of DDM files
                Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) command
                  Member names and i5/OS target servers on the ALCOBJ command
                  Lock multiple DDM files with the ALCOBJ command
                  ALCOBJ command completion time with DDM
                Change Job (CHGJOB) command
                Change Logical File (CHGLF) command
                Change Physical File (CHGPF) command
                Change Source Physical File (CHGSRCPF) command
                Clear Physical File Member (CLRPFM) command
                Copy commands with DDM
                Create Data Area (CRTDTAARA) command
                Create Data Queue (CRTDTAQ) command
                Create Logical File (CRTLF) command
                Create Physical File (CRTPF) command
                Create Source Physical File (CRTSRCPF) command
                Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) command
                  Member names and i5/OS target servers on the DLCOBJ command
                  Unlock multiple DDM files on the DLCOBJ command
                Delete File (DLTF) command
                Display File Description (DSPFD) command
                Display File Field Description (DSPFFD) command
                Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Override with Database File (OVRDBF) command
                Reclaim Resources (RCLRSC) command
                Rename Object (RNMOBJ) command
                Work with Job (WRKJOB) command
                Work with Object Lock (WRKOBJLCK) command
              DDM-related CL parameter considerations
                DDMACC parameter considerations
                DDMCNV parameter considerations
                OUTFILE parameter considerations for DDM
              DDM-related CL command lists
                Object-oriented commands with DDM
                Target i5/OS-required file management commands
                Member-related commands with DDM
                Commands not supporting DDM
                Source file commands
                DDM-related CL command summary charts
              Data description specifications considerations for DDM
                i5/OS target considerations for DDM
                Non-i5/OS target considerations for DDM
                DDM-related DDS keywords and information
              DDM user profile authority
            DDM commands and parameters
              Subsets of DDM architecture supported by i5/OS DDM
                Supported DDM file models
                  Alternate Index File (ALTINDF)
                  Direct file (DIRFIL)
                  Directory file (DIRECTORY)
                  Keyed file (KEYFIL)
                  Sequential file (SEQFIL)
                  Stream file (STRFIL)
                Supported DDM access methods
              DDM commands and objects
                CHGCD (Change Current Directory) Level 2.0
                CHGEOF (Change End of File) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
                CHGFAT (Change File Attribute) Level 2.0
                CLOSE (Close File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                CLRFIL (Clear File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                CLSDRC (Close Directory) Level 2.0
                CPYFIL (Copy File) Level 2.0
                CRTAIF (Create Alternate Index File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                CRTDIRF (Create Direct File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                CRTDRC (Create Directory) Level 2.0
                CRTKEYF (Create Keyed File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                CRTSEQF (Create Sequential File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                CRTSTRF (Create Stream File) Level 2.0
                DCLFIL (Declare File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                DELDCL (Delete Declared Name) Level 1.0
                DELDRC (Delete Directory) Level 2.0
                DELFIL (Delete File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                DELREC (Delete Record) Level 1.0
                EXCSAT (Exchange Server Attributes) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                FILAL and FILATTRL (File Attribute List) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
                FRCBFF (Force Buffer) Level 2.0
                GETDRCEN (Get Directory Entries) Level 2.0
                GETREC (Get Record at Cursor) Level 1.0
                GETSTR (Get Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
                INSRECEF (Insert at EOF) Level 1.0
                INSRECKY (Insert Record by Key Value) Level 1.0
                INSRECNB (Insert Record at Number) Level 1.0
                LCKFIL (Lock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                LCKSTR (Lock Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
                LODRECF (Load Record File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                LODSTRF (Load Stream File) Level 2.0
                LSTFAT (List File Attributes) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
                MODREC (Modify Record with Update Intent) Level 1.0
                OPEN (Open File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                OPNDRC (Open Directory) Level 2.0
                PUTSTR (Put Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
                QRYCD (Query Current Directory) Level 2.0
                QRYSPC (Query Space) Level 2.0
                RNMDRC (Rename Directory) Level 2.0
                RNMFIL (Rename File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                SBMSYSCMD (Submit server Command) Level 4.0
                SETBOF (Set Cursor to Beginning of File) Level 1.0
                SETEOF (Set Cursor to End of File) Level 1.0
                SETFRS (Set Cursor to First Record) Level 1.0
                SETKEY (Set Cursor by Key) Level 1.0
                SETKEYFR (Set Cursor to First Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
                SETKEYLM (Set Key Limits) Level 1.0
                SETKEYLS (Set Cursor to Last Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
                SETKEYNX (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
                SETKEYPR (Set Cursor to Previous Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
                SETLST (Set Cursor to Last Record) Level 1.0
                SETMNS (Set Cursor Minus) Level 1.0
                SETNBR (Set Cursor to Record Number) Level 1.0
                SETNXT (Set Cursor to Next Number) Level 1.0
                SETNXTKE (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence with a Key Equal to Value Specified) Level 1.0
                SETPLS (Set Cursor Plus) Level 1.0
                SETPRV (Set Cursor to Previous Record) Level 1.0
                SETUPDKY (Set Update Intent by Key Value) Level 1.0
                SETUPDNB (Set Update Intent by Record Number) Level 1.0
                ULDRECF (Unload Record File) Level 1.0
                ULDSTRF (Unload Stream File) Level 2.0
                UNLFIL (Unlock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
                UNLIMPLK (Unlock Implicit Record Lock) Level 1.0
                UNLSTR (Unlock Substreams) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
              User profile authority
            i5/OS-to-CICS considerations with DDM
              i5/OS languages, utilities, and licensed programs
                Create DDM File (CRTDDMF) considerations
                i5/OS CL considerations
                  Allocate Object (ALCOBJ)
                  Clear Physical File Member (CLRPFM)
                  Copy File (CPYF)
                  CPYTOTAP, CPYFRMTAP and CPYSPLF commands
                  Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ)
                  DSPFD and DSPFFD commands
                  Display Physical File Member (DSPPFM)
                  Open Database File (OPNDBF)
                  Override with Database File (OVRDBF)
                  Receive Network File (RCVNETF)
              Language considerations for i5/OS and CICS
                PL/I considerations
                  PL/I open file requests
                  PL/I input/output requests
                ILE COBOL considerations
                  ILE COBOL SELECT clause
                  ILE COBOL statements
                ILE C considerations
                ILE RPG considerations
                  File description specifications
                  ILE RPG input/output operations
            Using DDM on i5/OS versus other IBM systems
              i5/OS and System/36 DDM differences
              i5/OS and System/38 DDM differences
        Administration
          Monitoring relational database activity
            Working with jobs in a distributed relational database
            Working with user jobs in a distributed relational database
            Working with active jobs in a distributed relational database
            Working with commitment definitions in a distributed relational database
            Tracking request information with the job log of a distributed relational database
            Locating distributed relational database jobs
          Operating remote systems
          Displaying objects used by programs
            Example: Displaying program reference
          Dropping a collection from a distributed relational database
          Job accounting in a distributed relational database
          Managing the TCP/IP server
            TCP/IP server terminology
            Establishing a connection over TCP/IP
            The listener program
            Start TCP/IP Server (STRTCPSVR) CL command
              Listener restrictions
              Examples: Starting TCP/IP Server
            End TCP/IP Server (ENDTCPSVR) CL command
              End TCP/IP server restrictions
              Example: Ending TCP/IP server
            Starting the listener in System i Navigator
            The server jobs
              Subsystem descriptions and prestart job entries with DDM
              Prestart jobs
                Monitoring prestart jobs
                Managing prestart jobs
                Removing prestart job entries
                Routing entries
            Configuring the server job subsystem
            Identifying server jobs
              i5/OS job names
              Displaying server jobs
                Displaying active jobs using the WRKACTJOB command
                Displaying active user jobs using the WRKUSRJOB command
              Displaying the history log
          Auditing the relational database directory
          Operating considerations for DDM
            Accessing files with DDM
              Types of files supported by i5/OS DDM
              Existence of DDM file and remote file
              Rules for specifying server system file names for DDM
                Target i5/OS file names for DDM
                Target non-i5/OS file names for DDM
                Using location-specific file names for commonly named files for DDM
              Examples: Accessing i5/OS DDM remote files (i5/OS-to-i5/OS)
              Example: Accessing System/36 DDM remote files (i5/OS-to-i5/OS)
            Accessing members with DDM
              Example: Accessing DDM remote members (i5/OS only)
              Example: DDM file that opens a specific member
            Working with access methods for DDM
              Access intents
              Key field updates
              Deleted records
              Blocked record processing
              Variable-length records
            Other DDM-related functions involving remote files
              Performing file management functions on remote systems
              Locking files and members for DDM
                Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) and Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) commands
                Work with Job (WRKJOB) and Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) commands
              Controlling DDM conversations
                Display DDMCNV values (WRKJOB command)
                Change DDMCNV values (CHGJOB) command
                Reclaim DDM resources (RCLRSC and RCLDDMCNV commands)
              Displaying DDM remote file information
              Displaying DDM remote file records
              Coded character set identifier with DDM
              Use of object distribution
              Use of object distribution with DDM
            Canceling distributed data management work
              End Job (ENDJOB) command
              End Request (ENDRQS) command
            System/36 client and server considerations for DDM
              DDM-related differences between i5/OS and System/36 files
              System/36 client to i5/OS server considerations for DDM
              i5/OS client to System/36 server considerations for DDM
              Override considerations to System/36 for DDM
            Personal computer client to i5/OS server considerations for DDM
        Data availability and protection
          Recovery support for a distributed relational database
            Data recovery after disk failures for distributed relational databases
              Auxiliary storage pools
              Checksum protection in a distributed relational database
              Mirrored protection for a distributed relational database
            Journal management for distributed relational databases
              Index recovery
              Designing tables to reduce index rebuilding time
              System-managed access-path protection
            Transaction recovery through commitment control
            Save and restore processing for a distributed relational database
              Saving and restoring indexes in the distributed relational database environment
              Saving and restoring security information in the distributed relational database environment
              Saving and restoring SQL packages in the distributed relational database environment
              Saving and restoring relational database directories
          Network redundancy considerations for a distributed relational database
          Data redundancy in your distributed relational database network
        Performance
          Improving distributed relational database performance through the network
          Improving distributed relational database performance through the system
          Performance considerations for DRDA
            Factors that affect blocking for DRDA
            Factors that affect the size of DRDA query blocks
          Performance considerations for DDM
            Batch file processing with DDM
            Interactive file processing with DDM
            DDM conversation length considerations
        Examples: Application programming
          DRDA examples
            Example: Program definitions
            DRDA example: RPG program
            DRDA example: COBOL program
            DRDA example: C program using embedded SQL
            DRDA example: Java program
            Example: Program output
          DDM examples
            Communications setup for DDM examples and tasks
            DDM example 1: Simple inquiry application
            DDM example 2: ORDERENT application
              DDM example 2: Central system ORDERENT files
              DDM example 2: Description of ORDERENT program
              DDM example 2: Remote system ORDERENT files
              DDM example 2: Transferring a program to a server system
                DDM example 2: Pass-through method
                DDM example 2: SBMRMTCMD command method
              DDM example 2: Copying a file
            DDM example 3: Accessing multiple i5/OS files
            DDM example 4: Accessing a file on System/36
        User FAQs
          Connecting to a distributed relational database
          i5/OS system value QCCSID
          CCSID conversion considerations for DB2 for z/OS and DB2 Server for VM database managers
          Why am I getting an SQL5048N message when I attempt to connect from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows?
          Do i5/OS files have to be journaled?
          When will query data be blocked for better performance?
          How do you interpret an SQLCODE and the associated tokens reported in an SQL0969N error message?
          How can the host variable type in WHERE clauses affect performance?
          Can I use a library list for resolving unqualified table and view names?
          How can unlike clients override package options such as NLSS sort sequences, system naming and separate date/time formats?
          Why are no rows returned when I perform a query?
          What level of DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows is required to interact with DB2 for i5/OS?
          How can I get scrollable cursor support enabled from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows to the System i platform?
          Other tips for interoperating in unlike environments
        Troubleshooting
          i5/OS problem handling overview
          System and communications problems
          DRDA application problems
            Resolving incorrect output problems
            Resolving loop, wait, or performance problems
            Listings
              Precompiler listing
              CRTSQLPKG listing
            SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
              Distributed relational database SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
          Finding first-failure data capture data
          Getting data to report a failure
            Printing a job log
            Finding job logs from TCP/IP server prestart jobs
            Printing the product activity log
            Job tracing
              Trace job
              Start trace
            Communications trace
              Standard communications trace
                Finding your line, controller, and device descriptions
            TCP/IP communications trace
              TCP/IP communication trace formatting
          Starting a service job to diagnose application server problems
            Service jobs for APPC servers
            Creating your own transaction program name and setting QCNTSRVC
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for i application requester
              Creating your own transaction program name for debugging a DB2 for i application server job
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for VM client
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for z/OS client
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows client
            Service jobs for TCP/IP servers
            QRWOPTIONS data area
              Example: CL command to create the data area
          Working with distributed relational database users
            Copy screen
            Messages
              Message types
              Distributed relational database messages
            Handling program start request failures for APPC
            Handling connection request failures for TCP/IP
              Server is not started or the port ID is not valid
              DRDA connection authorization failure
              System not available
              Connection failures specific to interactive SQL
              Not enough prestart jobs at server
        Related information
          System i information
          Distributed relational database library
          Other IBM distributed relational database platform libraries
          Architecture books
          IBM Redbooks
      Embedded SQL programming
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for Embedded SQL programming
        Common concepts and rules for using embedded SQL
          Writing applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in SQL statements
            Assignment rules for host variables in SQL statements
            Indicator variables in applications that use SQL
              Indicator variables used with host structures
              Indicator variables used to assign special values
          Handling SQL error return codes using the SQLCA
          Using the SQL diagnostics area
            Updating applications to use the SQL diagnostics area
            IBM i programming model
            Additional notes on using the SQL diagnostics area
            Example: SQL routine exception
            Example: Logging items from the SQL diagnostics area
          Handling exception conditions with the WHENEVER statement
        Coding SQL statements in C and C++ applications
          Defining the SQL communication area in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Comments in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Including code in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Margins in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Names in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            NULLs and NULs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Preprocessor sequence for C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Trigraphs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Numeric host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Character host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Graphic host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Binary host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              LOB host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              XML host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              ROWID host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Result set locator host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure declarations in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure indicator array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using arrays of host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure array indicator structure in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using pointer data types in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using typedef in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using ILE C compiler external file descriptions in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and C or C++ data types
            Notes on C and C++ variable declaration and usage
          Using indicator variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        Coding SQL statements in COBOL applications
          Defining the SQL communication area in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Comments in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Including code in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Margins in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Sequence numbers in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Names in COBOL applications that use SQL
            COBOL compile-time options in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in COBOL applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Multiple source COBOL programs and the SQL COBOL precompiler
          Using host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Numeric host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Floating-point host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Character host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Graphic host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Binary host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              LOB host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              XML host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Datetime host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              ROWID host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Result set locator host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host structure indicator array in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Using host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host structure array in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host array indicator structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Using external file descriptions for host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and COBOL data types
            Notes on COBOL variable declaration and usage
          Using indicator variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
        Coding SQL statements in PL/I applications
          Defining the SQL communication area in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Example: Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Comments in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Including code in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Margins in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Names in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in PL/I applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Numeric-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Character-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Binary host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              LOB host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              ROWID host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Host structure indicator arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using host structure arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Host structure array in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Host structure array indicator in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and PL/I data types
          Using indicator variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Differences in PL/I because of structure parameter passing techniques
        Coding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications
          Defining the SQL communication area in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Example: Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Comments in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Including code in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Sequence numbers in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Names in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            External file description considerations for host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and RPG/400 data types
            Assignment rules in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Example: Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Differences in RPG/400 because of structure parameter passing techniques
          Correctly ending a called RPG/400 program that uses SQL
        Coding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications
          Defining the SQL communication area in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Comments in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Including code in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Using directives in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Sequence numbers in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Names in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring binary host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
                LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
                LOB locators in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
                LOB file reference variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring XML host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring ROWID variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring result set locator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            External file description considerations for host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and ILE RPG data types
            Notes on ILE RPG variable declaration and usage
          Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Example: Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Example: SQLDA for a multiple row-area fetch in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Example: Dynamic SQL in an ILE RPG application that uses SQL
        Coding SQL statements in REXX applications
          Using the SQL communication area in REXX applications
          Using SQL descriptor areas in REXX applications
          Embedding SQL statements in REXX applications
            Comments in REXX applications that use SQL
            Continuation of SQL statements in REXX applications that use SQL
            Including code in REXX applications that use SQL
            Margins in REXX applications that use SQL
            Names in REXX applications that use SQL
            Nulls in REXX applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in REXX applications that use SQL
            Handling errors and warnings in REXX applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
            Determining data types of input host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
            The format of output host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
            Avoiding REXX conversion in REXX applications that use SQL
          Using indicator variables in REXX applications that use SQL
        Preparing and running a program with SQL statements
          Basic processes of the SQL precompiler
            Input to the SQL precompiler
            Source file CCSIDs in the SQL precompiler
            Output from the SQL precompiler
              Listing
              Temporary source file members created by the SQL precompiler
              Sample SQL precompiler output
          Non-ILE SQL precompiler commands
            Compiling a non-ILE application program that uses SQL
          ILE SQL precompiler commands
            Compiling an ILE application program that uses SQL
          Setting compiler options using the precompiler commands
          Interpreting compile errors in applications that use SQL
          Binding an application that uses SQL
            Program references in applications that use SQL
          Displaying SQL precompiler options
          Running a program with embedded SQL
            Running a program with embedded SQL: DDM considerations
            Running a program with embedded SQL: Override considerations
            Running a program with embedded SQL: SQL return codes
        Example programs: Using DB2 for i statements
          Example: SQL statements in ILE C and C++ programs
          Example: SQL statements in COBOL and ILE COBOL programs
          Example: SQL statements in PL/I programs
          Example: SQL statements in RPG/400 programs
          Example: SQL statements in ILE RPG programs
          Example: SQL statements in REXX programs
          Report produced by example programs that use SQL
        CL command descriptions for host language precompilers
          Create SQL COBOL Program command
          Create SQL ILE COBOL Object command
          Create SQL ILE C Object command
          Create SQL ILE C++ Object command
          Create SQL PL/I Program command
          Create SQL RPG Program command
          Create SQL ILE RPG Object command
        Related information
      SQL programming
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for SQL programming
        Introduction to DB2 for i Structured Query Language
          SQL concepts
            SQL relational database and system terminology
            SQL and system naming conventions
            Types of SQL statements
            SQL communication area
            SQL diagnostics area
          SQL objects
            Schemas
            Journals and journal receivers
            Catalogs
            Tables, rows, and columns
            Aliases
            Views
            Indexes
            Constraints
            Triggers
            Stored procedures
            Sequences
            Global variables
            User-defined functions
            User-defined types
            XSR objects
            SQL packages
          Application program objects
            User source file
            Output source file member
            Program
            SQL package
            Module
            Service program
        Data definition language
          Creating a schema
          Creating a table
            Adding and removing constraints
            Referential integrity and tables
              Adding and removing referential constraints
              Example: Adding referential constraints
            Example: Removing constraints
            Check pending
          Creating a table using LIKE
          Creating a table using AS
          Creating and altering a materialized query table
          Declaring a global temporary table
          Creating a row change timestamp column
          Creating and altering an identity column
          Using ROWID
          Creating and using sequences
            Comparison of identity columns and sequences
          Defining field procedures
            Field definition for field procedures
            Specifying the field procedure
            When field procedures are invoked
            Parameter list for execution of field procedures
              The field procedure parameter value list (FPPVL)
              Parameter value descriptors for field procedures
              Field-definition (function code 8)
              Field-encoding (function code 0)
              Field-decoding (function code 4)
              Example field procedure program
            General guidelines for writing field procedures
              Index considerations
              Thread considerations
            Guidelines for writing field procedures that mask data
              Example field procedure program that masks data
          Creating descriptive labels using the LABEL ON statement
          Describing an SQL object using COMMENT ON
          Changing a table definition
            Adding a column
            Changing a column
            Allowable conversions of data types
            Deleting a column
            Order of operations for the ALTER TABLE statement
          Creating and using ALIAS names
          Creating and using views
            WITH CHECK OPTION on a view
              WITH CASCADED CHECK OPTION
              WITH LOCAL CHECK OPTION
              Example: Cascaded check option
          Creating indexes
          Creating and using global variables
          Replacing existing objects
          Catalogs in database design
            Getting catalog information about a table
            Getting catalog information about a column
          Dropping a database object
        Data manipulation language
          Retrieving data using the SELECT statement
            Basic SELECT statement
            Specifying a search condition using the WHERE clause
              Expressions in the WHERE clause
              Comparison operators
              NOT keyword
            GROUP BY clause
            HAVING clause
            ORDER BY clause
            Static SELECT statements
            Handling null values
            Special registers in SQL statements
            Casting data types
            Date, time, and timestamp data types
              Specifying current date and time values
              Date/time arithmetic
            Row change expressions
            Handling duplicate rows
            Defining complex search conditions
              Special considerations for LIKE
              Multiple search conditions within a WHERE clause
            Using OLAP specifications
            Joining data from more than one table
              Inner join
                Inner join using the JOIN syntax
                Inner join using the WHERE clause
                Joining data with the USING clause
              Left outer join
              Right outer join
              Exception join
              Cross join
              Full outer join
              Multiple join types in one statement
            Using table expressions
            Using recursive queries
            Using the UNION keyword to combine subselects
              Specifying the UNION ALL keyword
            Using the EXCEPT keyword
            Using the INTERSECT keyword
            Data retrieval errors
          Inserting rows using the INSERT statement
            Inserting rows using the VALUES clause
            Inserting rows using a select-statement
            Inserting multiple rows using the blocked INSERT statement
            Inserting data into tables with referential constraints
            Inserting values into an identity column
            Selecting inserted values
            Inserting data from a remote database
          Changing data in a table using the UPDATE statement
            Updating a table using a scalar-subselect
            Updating a table with rows from another table
            Updating tables with referential constraints
              Examples: UPDATE rules
            Updating an identity column
            Updating data as it is retrieved from a table
          Removing rows from a table using the DELETE statement
            Removing rows from tables with referential constraints
              Example: DELETE rules
          Merging data
          Using subqueries
            Subqueries in SELECT statements
              Subqueries and search conditions
              Usage notes on subqueries
              Including subqueries in the WHERE or HAVING clause
            Correlated subqueries
              Correlated names and references
              Example: Correlated subquery in a WHERE clause
              Example: Correlated subquery in a HAVING clause
              Example: Correlated subquery in a select-list
              Example: Correlated subquery in an UPDATE statement
              Example: Correlated subquery in a DELETE statement
        Sort sequences and normalization in SQL
          Sort sequence used with ORDER BY and row selection
            Sort sequence and ORDER BY
            Sort sequence and row selection
          Sort sequence and views
          Sort sequence and the CREATE INDEX statement
          Sort sequence and constraints
          ICU sort sequence
          Normalization
        Data protection
          Security for SQL objects
            Authorization ID
            Views
            Auditing
          Data integrity
            Concurrency
            Journaling
            Commitment control
            Savepoints
            Atomic operations
            Constraints
              Adding and using check constraints
            Save and restore functions
            Damage tolerance
            Index recovery
            Catalog integrity
            User auxiliary storage pool
            Independent auxiliary storage pool
        Routines
          Stored procedures
            Defining an external procedure
            Defining an SQL procedure
            Calling a stored procedure
              Using the CALL statement where procedure definition exists
              Using the embedded CALL statement where no procedure definition exists
              Using the embedded CALL statement with an SQLDA
              Using the dynamic CALL statement where no CREATE PROCEDURE exists
              Examples: CALL statements
                Example 1: ILE C and PL/I procedures called from an ILE C program
                Example 2: A REXX procedure called from an ILE C program
            Returning result sets from stored procedures
              Example 1: Calling a stored procedure that returns a single result set
              Example 2: Calling a stored procedure that returns a result set from a nested procedure
            Writing a program or SQL procedure to receive the result sets from a stored procedure
            Parameter passing conventions for stored procedures and user-defined functions
            Indicator variables and stored procedures
            Returning a completion status to the calling program
            Passing parameters from DB2 to external proceduress
              Parameter style SQL
              Parameter style GENERAL
              Parameter style GENERAL WITH NULLS
              Parameter style DB2GENERAL
              Parameter style Java
          Using user-defined functions
            UDF concepts
            Writing UDFs as SQL functions
              Example: SQL scalar UDFs
              Example: SQL table UDFs
            Writing UDFs as external functions
              Registering UDFs
                Example: Exponentiation
                Example: String search
                Example: BLOB string search
                Example: String search over a user-defined type (UDT)
                Example: AVG over a user-defined type (UDT)
                Example: Counting
                Example: Table function returning document IDs
              Passing arguments from DB2 to external functions
                Parameter style SQL
                Parameter style DB2SQL
                Parameter style GENERAL
                Parameter style GENERAL WITH NULLS
                Parameter style DB2GENERAL
                Parameter style Java
              Table function considerations
              Error processing for UDFs
              Threads considerations
              Parallel processing
              Fenced or unfenced considerations
              Save and restore considerations
            Examples: UDF code
              Example: Square of a number UDF
              Example: Counter
              Example: Weather table function
            Using UDFs in SQL statements
              Using parameter markers or the NULL values as function arguments
              Using qualified function references
              Using unqualified function references
              Summary of function references
          Triggers
            SQL triggers
              BEFORE SQL triggers
              AFTER SQL triggers
              INSTEAD OF SQL triggers
              Handlers in SQL triggers
              SQL trigger transition tables
            External triggers
          Array support in SQL procedures
          Debugging an SQL routine
          Obfuscating an SQL routine
          Improving performance of procedures and functions
            Improving implementation of procedures and functions
            Redesigning routines for performance
        Processing special data types
          Large objects
            Large object data types
            Large object locators
            Example: Using a locator to work with a CLOB value
              Example: LOBLOC in C
              Example: LOBLOC in COBOL
            Indicator variables and LOB locators
            LOB file reference variables
            Example: Extracting CLOB data to a file
              Example: LOBFILE in C
              Example: LOBFILE in COBOL
            Example: Inserting data into a CLOB column
            Displaying the layout of LOB columns
            Journal entry layout of LOB columns
          User-defined distinct types
            Defining a UDT
              Example: Money
              Example: Resumé
            Defining tables with UDTs
              Example: Sales
              Example: Application forms
            Manipulating UDTs
            Examples: Using UDTs
              Example: Comparisons between UDTs and constants
              Example: Casting between UDTs
              Example: Comparisons involving UDTs
              Example: Sourced UDFs involving UDTs
              Example: Assignments involving UDTs
              Example: Assignments in dynamic SQL
              Example: Assignments involving different UDTs
              Example: Using UDTs in UNION
          Examples: Using UDTs, UDFs, and LOBs
            Example: Defining the UDT and UDFs
            Example: Using the LOB function to populate the database
            Example: Using UDFs to query instances of UDTs
            Example: Using LOB locators to manipulate UDT instances
          Using DataLinks
            Linking control levels in DataLinks
              NO LINK CONTROL
              FILE LINK CONTROL with FS permissions
              FILE LINK CONTROL with DB permissions
            Working with DataLinks
        SQL statements and SQL/XML functions
          XML input and output overview
          Comparison of XML and relational models
          Tutorial for XML
            Exercise 1: Creating a table that can store XML data
            Exercise 2: Inserting XML documents into XML typed columns
            Exercise 3: Updating XML documents stored in an XML column
            Exercise 4: Validating XML documents against XML schemas
            Exercise 5: Transforming with XSLT stylesheets
          Inserting XML data
            Addition of XML columns to existing tables
            Insertion into XML columns
            XML parsing
          SQL/XML publishing functions
            Example: Construct an XML document with values from a single table
            Example: Construct an XML document with values from multiple tables
            Example: Construct an XML document with values from table rows that contain null elements
            Transforming with XSLT stylesheets
            Example: Using XSLT as a formatting engine
            Example: Using XSLT for data exchange
            Example: Using XSLT to remove namespaces
            Important considerations for transforming XML documents
            Special character handling
            XML serialization
            Differences in an XML document after storage and retrieval
            Data types for archiving XML documents
          Using XMLTABLE to reference XML content as a relational table
            Using XMLTABLE to handle missing elements
            Using XMLTABLE to subset result data
            Using XMLTABLE to handle multiple values
            Using XMLTABLE with namespaces
            Numbering result rows for XMLTABLE
          Updating XML data
            Deletion of XML data from tables
          XML schema repository
          Application programming language support
            XML column inserts and updates in CLI applications
            XML data retrieval in CLI applications
            Declaring XML host variables in embedded SQL applications
              Example: Referencing XML host variables in embedded SQL applications
              Recommendations for developing embedded SQL applications with XML
              Identifying XML values in an SQLDA
            Java
              XML data in JDBC applications
                XML column updates in JDBC applications
                XML data retrieval in JDBC applications
                Invocation of routines with XML parameters in Java applications
              XML data in SQLJ applications
                XML column updates in SQLJ applications
                XML data retrieval in SQLJ applications
            Routines
              XML support in SQL procedures
                Effect of commits and rollbacks on XML parameter and variable values in SQL procedures
              XML data type support in external routines
                Example: XML support in Java (JDBC) procedure
                Example: XML support in C procedure
          XML data encoding
            Encoding considerations when storing or passing XML data
              Input of XML data
              Retrieval of XML data
              Routine parameters
              JDBC and SQLJ applications
            Effects of XML encoding and serialization on data conversion
              Input internally encoded
              Input externally encoded
              Retrieval with implicit serialization
              Retrieval with explicit serialization
            Encoding names to CCSIDs
            CCSIDs to encoding names
          Annotated XML schema decomposition
            Decomposing XML documents
            Registering and enabling XML schemas
            Sources for annotated XML schema decomposition
            Decomposition annotations
              Scope
              Annotations as attributes
              Annotations as structured child elements
              Global annotations
              Summary
              db2-xdb:defaultSQLSchema
              db2-xdb:rowSet
              db2-xdb:table
              db2-xdb:column
              db2-xdb:locationPath
              db2-xdb:expression
              db2-xdb:condition
              db2-xdb:contentHandling
              db2-xdb:normalization
              db2-xdb:order
              db2-xdb:truncate
              db2-xdb:rowSetMapping
              db2-xdb:rowSetOperationOrder
              Keywords
            CDATA sections
            NULL values and empty strings
            Checklist
          Examples of mappings
            Derived complex types
            Example: Mapping to an XML column
            Example: Single value to a table and row
            Example: Single value to a table and multiple rows
            Example: Single value to multiple tables
            Example: Multiple values to a single table
            Example: Multiple values from different contexts
            XML schema to SQL types compatibility
            Limits and restrictions
            Schema for XML decomposition annotations
        Using SQL in different environments
          Using a cursor
            Types of cursors
            Examples: Using a cursor
              Step 1: Defining the cursor
              Step 2: Opening the cursor
              Step 3: Specifying what to do when the end of data is reached
              Step 4: Retrieving a row using a cursor
              Step 5a: Updating the current row
              Step 5b: Deleting the current row
              Step 6: Closing the cursor
            Using the multiple-row FETCH statement
              Multiple-row FETCH using a host structure array
              Multiple-row FETCH using a row storage area
            Unit of work and open cursors
          Dynamic SQL applications
            Designing and running a dynamic SQL application
            CCSID of dynamic SQL statements
            Processing non-SELECT statements
              Using the PREPARE and EXECUTE statements
            Processing SELECT statements and using a descriptor
              Fixed-list SELECT statements
              Varying-list SELECT statements
              SQL descriptor areas
              SQLDA format
              Example: A SELECT statement for allocating storage for SQLDA
              Example: A SELECT statement using an allocated SQL descriptor
              Parameter markers
          Using interactive SQL
            Starting interactive SQL
            Using the statement entry function
            Prompting
              Syntax checking
              Statement processing mode
              Subqueries
              CREATE TABLE prompting
              Entering DBCS data
            Using the list selection function
              Example: Using the list selection function
            Session services description
            Exiting interactive SQL
            Using an existing SQL session
            Recovering an SQL session
            Accessing remote databases with interactive SQL
          Using the SQL statement processor
            Execution of statements after errors occur
            Commitment control in the SQL statement processor
            Source listing for the SQL statement processor
        Using the RUNSQL CL command
        Distributed relational database function and SQL
          DB2 for i distributed relational database support
          DB2 for i distributed relational database example program
          SQL package support
            Valid SQL statements in an SQL package
            Considerations for creating an SQL package
              CRTSQLPKG authorization
              Creating a package on a database other than DB2 for i
              Target release (TGTRLS) parameter
              SQL statement size
              Statements that do not require a package
              Package object type
              ILE programs and service programs
              Package creation connection
              Unit of work
              Creating packages locally
              Labels
              Consistency token
              SQL and recursion
          CCSID considerations for SQL
          Connection management and activation groups
            Source code for PGM1
            Source code for PGM2
            Source code for PGM3
            Multiple connections to the same relational database
            Implicit connection management for the default activation group
            Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
          Distributed support
            Determining the connection type
            Connect and commitment control restrictions
            Determining the connection status
            Distributed unit of work connection considerations
            Ending connections
          Distributed unit of work
            Managing distributed unit of work connections
            Checking the connection status
            Cursors and prepared statements
          DRDA stored procedure considerations
        WebSphere MQ with DB2
          WebSphere MQ messages
            WebSphere MQ message handling
              DB2 MQ services
              DB2 MQ policies
          DB2 MQ functions
            DB2 MQ dependencies
          DB2 MQ tables
          DB2 MQ CCSID conversion
          Websphere MQ transactions
          Basic messaging with WebSphere MQ
          Sending messages with WebSphere MQ
          Retrieving messages with WebSphere MQ
          Application to application connectivity with WebSphere MQ
        Reference
          DB2 for i sample tables
            Department table (DEPARTMENT)
              DEPARTMENT
            Employee table (EMPLOYEE)
              EMPLOYEE
            Employee photo table (EMP_PHOTO)
              EMP_PHOTO
            Employee resumé table (EMP_RESUME)
              EMP_RESUME
            Employee to project activity table (EMPPROJACT)
              EMPPROJACT
            Project table (PROJECT)
              PROJECT
            Project activity table (PROJACT)
              PROJACT
            Activity table (ACT)
              ACT
            Class schedule table (CL_SCHED)
              CL_SCHED
            In-tray table (IN_TRAY)
              IN_TRAY
            Organization table (ORG)
              ORG
            Staff table (STAFF)
              STAFF
            Sales table (SALES)
              SALES
            Sample XML tables
            Product table (PRODUCT)
              PRODUCT
            Purchase order table (PURCHASEORDER)
              PURCHASEORDER
            Customer table (CUSTOMER)
              CUSTOMER
            Catalog table (CATALOG)
              CATALOG
            Suppliers table (SUPPLIERS)
              SUPPLIERS
            Inventory table (INVENTORY)
              INVENTORY
            Product Supplier table (PRODUCTSUPPLIER)
              PRODUCTSUPPLIER
          DB2 for i CL command descriptions
      SQL XML programming
        How to read the syntax diagrams
        PDF file for SQL XML programming
        SQL statements and SQL/XML functions
          XML input and output overview
          Comparison of XML and relational models
          Tutorial for XML
            Exercise 1: Creating a table that can store XML data
            Exercise 2: Inserting XML documents into XML typed columns
            Exercise 3: Updating XML documents stored in an XML column
            Exercise 4: Validating XML documents against XML schemas
            Exercise 5: Transforming with XSLT stylesheets
          Inserting XML data
            Addition of XML columns to existing tables
            Insertion into XML columns
            XML parsing
          SQL/XML publishing functions
            Example: Construct an XML document with values from a single table
            Example: Construct an XML document with values from multiple tables
            Example: Construct an XML document with values from table rows that contain null elements
            Transforming with XSLT stylesheets
            Example: Using XSLT as a formatting engine
            Example: Using XSLT for data exchange
            Example: Using XSLT to remove namespaces
            Important considerations for transforming XML documents
            Special character handling
            XML serialization
            Differences in an XML document after storage and retrieval
            Data types for archiving XML documents
          Using XMLTABLE to reference XML content as a relational table
            Using XMLTABLE to handle missing elements
            Using XMLTABLE to subset result data
            Using XMLTABLE to handle multiple values
            Using XMLTABLE with namespaces
            Numbering result rows for XMLTABLE
          Updating XML data
            Deletion of XML data from tables
          XML schema repository
          Application programming language support
            XML column inserts and updates in CLI applications
            XML data retrieval in CLI applications
            Declaring XML host variables in embedded SQL applications
              Example: Referencing XML host variables in embedded SQL applications
              Recommendations for developing embedded SQL applications with XML
              Identifying XML values in an SQLDA
            Java
              XML data in JDBC applications
                XML column updates in JDBC applications
                XML data retrieval in JDBC applications
                Invocation of routines with XML parameters in Java applications
              XML data in SQLJ applications
                XML column updates in SQLJ applications
                XML data retrieval in SQLJ applications
            Routines
              XML support in SQL procedures
                Effect of commits and rollbacks on XML parameter and variable values in SQL procedures
              XML data type support in external routines
                Example: XML support in Java (JDBC) procedure
                Example: XML support in C procedure
          XML data encoding
            Encoding considerations when storing or passing XML data
              Input of XML data
              Retrieval of XML data
              Routine parameters
              JDBC and SQLJ applications
            Effects of XML encoding and serialization on data conversion
              Input internally encoded
              Input externally encoded
              Retrieval with implicit serialization
              Retrieval with explicit serialization
            Encoding names to CCSIDs
            CCSIDs to encoding names
        Annotated XML schema decomposition
          Decomposing XML documents
          Registering and enabling XML schemas
          Sources for annotated XML schema decomposition
          Decomposition annotations
            Scope
            Annotations as attributes
            Annotations as structured child elements
            Global annotations
            Summary
            db2-xdb:defaultSQLSchema
            db2-xdb:rowSet
            db2-xdb:table
            db2-xdb:column
            db2-xdb:locationPath
            db2-xdb:expression
            db2-xdb:condition
            db2-xdb:contentHandling
            db2-xdb:normalization
            db2-xdb:order
            db2-xdb:truncate
            db2-xdb:rowSetMapping
            db2-xdb:rowSetOperationOrder
            Keywords
          CDATA sections
          NULL values and empty strings
          Checklist
          Examples of mappings
            Derived complex types
            Example: Mapping to an XML column
            Example: Single value to a table and row
            Example: Single value to a table and multiple rows
            Example: Single value to multiple tables
            Example: Multiple values to a single table
            Example: Multiple values from different contexts
            XML schema to SQL types compatibility
            Limits and restrictions
            Schema for XML decomposition annotations
        XML data model
          Sequences and items
          Atomic values
          Nodes
            Document nodes
            Element nodes
            Attribute nodes
            Text nodes
            Processing instruction nodes
            Comment nodes
          Data model generation
          XML values in SQL
        Overview of XPath
          Case sensitivity in DB2 XPath
          Whitespace in DB2 XPath
          Comments in DB2 XPath
          Character set
          Default collation
          XML namespaces and qualified names in DB2 XPath
          XPath type system
            Overview of the type system
            Constructor functions for built-in data types
            Generic data types
              xs:anyType
              xs:anySimpleType
              xs:anyAtomicType
            Data types for untyped data
              xs:untyped
              xs:untypedAtomic
            xs:string
            Numeric data types
              xs:decimal
              xs:double
              xs:integer
              Range limits for numeric types
            xs:boolean
            Date and time data types
              xs:date
              xs:time
              xs:dateTime
              xs:duration
              xs:dayTimeDuration
              xs:yearMonthDuration
            Casts between XML schema data types
          XPath prologs and expressions
            Prologs
              Namespace declarations
              Default namespace declarations
            Expression evaluation and processing
              Atomization
              Type promotion
              Subtype substitution
            Primary expressions
              Literals
                Predefined entity references
                Character references
              Variable references in DB2 XPath
              Parenthesized expression
              Context item expressions
              Function calls
            Path expressions
              Axis steps
                Axes
                Node tests
                Predicates
              Abbreviated syntax for path expressions
            Filter expressions
            Arithmetic expressions
            Comparison expressions
              General comparisons
            Logical expressions
            Regular expressions
          Descriptions of XPath functions
            fn:abs function
            fn:adjust-date-to-timezone function
            fn:adjust-dateTime-to-timezone function
            fn:adjust-time-to-timezone function
            fn:boolean function
            fn:compare function
            fn:concat function
            fn:contains function
            fn:count function
            fn:current-date function
            fn:current-dateTime function
            db2-fn:current-local-date function
            db2-fn:current-local-dateTime function
            db2-fn:current-local-time function
            fn:current-time function
            fn:data function
            fn:dateTime function
            fn:day-from-date function
            fn:day-from-dateTime function
            fn:days-from-duration function
            fn:distinct-values function
            fn:exists function
            fn:hours-from-dateTime function
            fn:hours-from-duration function
            fn:hours-from-time function
            fn:implicit-timezone function
            fn:last function
            fn:local-name function
            db2-fn:local-timezone function
            fn:lower-case function
            fn:matches function
            fn:max function
            fn:min function
            fn:minutes-from-dateTime function
            fn:minutes-from-duration function
            fn:minutes-from-time function
            fn:month-from-date function
            fn:month-from-dateTime function
            fn:months-from-duration function
            fn:name function
            fn:normalize-space function
            fn:not function
            fn:position function
            fn:replace function
            fn:round function
            fn:seconds-from-dateTime function
            fn:seconds-from-duration function
            fn:seconds-from-time function
            fn:starts-with function
            fn:string function
            fn:string-length function
            fn:substring function
            fn:sum function
            fn:timezone-from-date function
            fn:timezone-from-dateTime function
            fn:timezone-from-time function
            fn:tokenize function
            fn:translate function
            fn:upper-case function
            fn:year-from-date function
            fn:year-from-dateTime function
            fn:years-from-duration function
    Reference
      Database information finder
      DB2 Multisystem
        PDF file for DB2 Multisystem
        DB2 Multisystem overview
          Benefits of using DB2 Multisystem
          DB2 Multisystem: Basic terms and concepts
        Node groups with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
          How node groups work with DB2 Multisystem
          Tasks to complete before using the node group commands with DB2 Multisystem
          Create Node Group command
          Display Node Group command
          Change Node Group Attributes command
          Delete Node Group command
        Distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
          Create Physical File command and SQL CREATE TABLE statement
            Restrictions when creating or working with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
          System activities after the distributed file is created
            How CL commands work with distributed files
              CL commands: Allowable to run against a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
              CL commands: Affecting only local pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
              CL commands: Affecting all the pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
                Journaling considerations with DB2 Multisystem
                Copy File command with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
          Partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
            Planning for partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
            Choosing partitioning keys with DB2 Multisystem
          Customizing data distribution with DB2 Multisystem
        Partitioned tables
          Creation of partitioned tables
          Modification of existing tables
            From a nonpartitioned table to a partitioned table
            Modification of existing partitioned tables
              Restrictions when altering a column's data type
            From a partitioned table to a nonpartitioned table
          Indexes with partitioned tables
          Query performance and optimization
            Queries using SQL Query Engine
              Check constraint optimization
              SQL Query Engine: Index usage
            Queries using Classic Query Engine
              Materialization
              CQE query optimization considerations
              Classic Query Engine: Index usage
          Save and restore considerations
          Journaling a partitioned table
          Traditional system interface considerations
          Restrictions for a partitioned table
        Scalar functions available with DB2 Multisystem
          PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
            Examples of PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
          HASH with DB2 Multisystem
            Example of HASH with DB2 Multisystem
          NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
            Examples of NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
          NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
            Example of NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
          Special registers with DB2 Multisystem
            Relative record numbering function with DB2 Multisystem
        Performance and scalability with DB2 Multisystem
          Why you should use DB2 Multisystem
            Performance enhancement tip with DB2 Multisystem
          How DB2 Multisystem helps you expand your database system
            Redistribution issues for adding systems to a network
        Query design for performance with DB2 Multisystem
          Optimization with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
          Implementation and optimization of a single file query with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of record ordering with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of the UNION and DISTINCT clauses with DB2 Multisystem
          Processing of the DSTDTA and ALWCPYDTA parameters with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of join operations with DB2 Multisystem
            Collocated join with DB2 Multisystem
            Directed join with DB2 Multisystem
            Repartitioned join with DB2 Multisystem
            Broadcast join with DB2 Multisystem
            Join optimization with DB2 Multisystem
              Partitioning keys over join fields with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of grouping with DB2 Multisystem
            One-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
            Two-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
            Grouping and joins with DB2 Multisystem
          Subquery support with DB2 Multisystem
          Access plans with DB2 Multisystem
          Reusable open data paths with DB2 Multisystem
          Temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
            Temporary result writer job: Advantages with DB2 Multisystem
            Temporary result writer job: Disadvantages with DB2 Multisystem
            Control of the temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
          Optimizer messages with DB2 Multisystem
          Changes to the Change Query Attributes command with DB2 Multisystem
            Asynchronous job usage parameter with DB2 Multisystem
            Apply remote parameter with DB2 Multisystem
          Summary of performance considerations
        Related information
      DB2 Web Query
        Highlights
      SQL call level interface
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for SQL call level interface
        Getting started with DB2 for i CLI
          Differences between DB2 for i CLI and embedded SQL
          Advantages of using DB2 for i CLI instead of embedded SQL
          Deciding between DB2 for i CLI, dynamic SQL, and static SQL
        Writing a DB2 for i CLI application
          Initialization and termination tasks in a DB2 for i CLI application
            Example: Initialization and connection in a DB2 for i CLI application
          Transaction processing task in a DB2 for i CLI application
            Allocating statement handles in a DB2 for i CLI application
            Preparing and processing tasks in a DB2 for i CLI application
            Processing results in a DB2 for i CLI application
              Processing SELECT statements in a DB2 for i CLI application
              Processing UPDATE, DELETE, MERGE, and INSERT statements in a DB2 for i CLI application
              Processing other SQL statements in a DB2 for i CLI application
            Freeing statement handles in a DB2 for i CLI application
            Committing or rolling back in a DB2 for i CLI application
              When to call SQLTransact() in a DB2 for i CLI application
              Effects of calling SQLTransact() in a DB2 for i CLI application
          Diagnostics in a DB2 for i CLI application
            Return codes from a DB2 for i CLI application
            DB2 for i CLI SQLSTATE values
          Data types and data conversion in DB2 for i CLI functions
            Other C data types in DB2 for i CLI functions
            Data conversion in DB2 for i CLI functions
          Working with the XML data type
          Working with string arguments in DB2 for i CLI functions
            Length of string arguments in DB2 for i CLI functions
            String truncation in DB2 for i CLI functions
            Interpretation of strings in DB2 for i CLI functions
        DB2 for i CLI functions
          Categories of DB2 for i CLI functions
          SQLAllocConnect - Allocate connection handle
          SQLAllocEnv - Allocate environment handle
          SQLAllocHandle - Allocate handle
          SQLAllocStmt - Allocate a statement handle
          SQLBindCol - Bind a column to an application variable
          SQLBindFileToCol - Bind LOB file reference to LOB column
          SQLBindFileToParam - Bind LOB file reference to LOB parameter
          SQLBindParam - Bind a buffer to a parameter marker
          SQLBindParameter - Bind a parameter marker to a buffer
          SQLCancel - Cancel statement
          SQLCloseCursor - Close cursor statement
          SQLColAttribute - Return a column attribute
          SQLColAttributes - Obtain column attributes
          SQLColumnPrivileges - Get privileges associated with the columns of a table
          SQLColumns - Get column information for a table
          SQLConnect - Connect to a data source
          SQLCopyDesc - Copy description statement
          SQLDataSources - Get list of data sources
          SQLDescribeCol - Describe column attributes
          SQLDescribeParam - Return description of a parameter marker
          SQLDisconnect - Disconnect from a data source
          SQLDriverConnect - Connect to a data source
          SQLEndTran - Commit or roll back a transaction
          SQLError - Retrieve error information
          SQLExecDirect - Execute a statement directly
          SQLExecute - Execute a statement
          SQLExtendedFetch - Fetch array of rows
          SQLFetch - Fetch next row
          SQLFetchScroll - Fetch from a scrollable cursor
          SQLForeignKeys - Get the list of foreign key columns
          SQLFreeConnect - Free connection handle
          SQLFreeEnv - Free environment handle
          SQLFreeHandle - Free a handle
          SQLFreeStmt - Free (or reset) a statement handle
          SQLGetCol - Retrieve one column of a row of the result set
          SQLGetConnectAttr - Get the value of a connection attribute
          SQLGetConnectOption - Return current setting of a connect option
          SQLGetCursorName - Get cursor name
          SQLGetData - Get data from a column
          SQLGetDescField - Get descriptor field
          SQLGetDescRec - Get descriptor record
          SQLGetDiagField - Return diagnostic information (extensible)
          SQLGetDiagRec - Return diagnostic information (concise)
          SQLGetEnvAttr - Return current setting of an environment attribute
          SQLGetFunctions - Get functions
          SQLGetInfo - Get general information
          SQLGetLength - Retrieve length of a string value
          SQLGetPosition - Return starting position of string
          SQLGetStmtAttr - Get the value of a statement attribute
          SQLGetStmtOption - Return current setting of a statement option
          SQLGetSubString - Retrieve portion of a string value
          SQLGetTypeInfo - Get data type information
          SQLLanguages - Get SQL dialect or conformance information
          SQLMoreResults - Determine whether there are more result sets
          SQLNativeSql - Get native SQL text
          SQLNextResult - Process the next result set
          SQLNumParams - Get number of parameters in an SQL statement
          SQLNumResultCols - Get number of result columns
          SQLParamData - Get next parameter for which a data value is needed
          SQLParamOptions - Specify an input array for a parameter
          SQLPrepare - Prepare a statement
          SQLPrimaryKeys - Get primary key columns of a table
          SQLProcedureColumns - Get input/output parameter information for a procedure
          SQLProcedures - Get list of procedure names
          SQLPutData - Pass data value for a parameter
          SQLReleaseEnv - Release all environment resources
          SQLRowCount - Get row count
          SQLSetConnectAttr - Set a connection attribute
          SQLSetConnectOption - Set connection option
          SQLSetCursorName - Set cursor name
          SQLSetDescField - Set a descriptor field
          SQLSetDescRec - Set a descriptor record
          SQLSetEnvAttr - Set environment attribute
          SQLSetParam - Set parameter
          SQLSetStmtAttr - Set a statement attribute
          SQLSetStmtOption - Set statement option
          SQLSpecialColumns - Get special (row identifier) columns
          SQLStatistics - Get index and statistics information for a base table
          SQLTablePrivileges - Get privileges associated with a table
          SQLTables - Get table information
          SQLTransact - Commit or roll back a transaction
        DB2 for i CLI include file
        Running DB2 for i CLI in server mode
          Starting DB2 for i CLI in SQL server mode
          Restrictions for running DB2 for i CLI in server mode
        Unicode in DB2 for iCLI
        Examples: DB2 for i CLI applications
          Example: Embedded SQL and the equivalent DB2 for i CLI function calls
          Example: Using the CLI XA transaction connection attributes
          Example: Interactive SQL and the equivalent DB2 for i CLI function calls
      SQL replication
      SQL messages and codes
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for SQL messages and codes
        SQLCODE and SQLSTATE concepts
        Listing of SQLSTATE class codes
        Listing of SQLSTATE values
        SQL message concepts
        Listing of SQL messages
        SQL message finder
      SQL reference
        About SQL reference
          Standards compliance
          Assumptions relating to examples of SQL statements
          How to read the syntax diagrams
          Conventions used in this book
          SQL accessibility
        PDF file for SQL reference
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        Concepts
          Relational database
          Structured Query Language
          Schemas
          Tables
            Keys
            Constraints
              Unique constraints
              Referential constraints
              Check constraints
            Indexes
            Triggers
          Views
          User-defined types
          Aliases
          Packages and access plans
          Routines
          Sequences
          Authorization, privileges and object ownership
          Catalog
          Application processes, concurrency, and recovery
            Locking, commit, and rollback
            Unit of work
            Rolling back work
            Threads
          Isolation level
            Repeatable read
            Read stability
            Cursor stability
            Uncommitted read
            No commit
            Comparison of isolation levels
          Storage Structures
          Character conversion
            Character sets and code pages
            Coded character sets and CCSIDs
            Default CCSID
          Collating sequence
          Distributed relational database
            Application servers
            CONNECT (Type 1) and CONNECT (Type 2)
            Remote unit of work
            Application-directed distributed unit of work
            Data representation considerations
        Language elements
          Characters
          Tokens
          Identifiers
            SQL identifiers
            System identifiers
            Host identifiers
          Naming conventions
            SQL path
            Qualification of unqualified object names
              Unqualified alias, constraint, external program, index, nodegroup, package, sequence, table, trigger, view, and XSR object names
              Unqualified type, variable, function, procedure, and specific names
            SQL names and system names: special considerations
          Aliases
          Authorization IDs and authorization names
          Data types
            Nulls
            Numbers
              Subnormal numbers and underflow
            Character strings
            Character encoding schemes
            Graphic strings
            Graphic encoding schemes
            Binary strings
            Large objects
              Limitations on use of strings
            Datetime values
              Date
              Time
              Timestamp
              Datetime variables
              String representations of datetime values
                Date strings
                Time strings
                Timestamp strings
            XML Values
            DataLink values
            Row ID values
            User-defined types
          Promotion of data types
          Casting between data types
          Assignments and comparisons
            Numeric assignments
            String assignments
              Binary string assignments
              Character and graphic string assignments
            Datetime assignments
            XML assignments
            DataLink assignments
            Row ID assignments
            Distinct type assignments
            Array type assignments
            Assignments to LOB locators
            Numeric comparisons
            String comparisons
            Datetime comparisons
            XML comparisons
            DataLink comparisons
            Row ID comparisons
            Distinct type comparisons
          Rules for result data types
          Conversion rules for operations that combine strings
          Constants
            Integer constants
            Decimal constants
            Floating-point constants
            Decimal floating-point constants
            Character-string constants
            Graphic-string constants
            Binary-string constants
            Datetime constants
            Decimal point
            Delimiters
          Special registers
            CURRENT CLIENT_ACCTNG
            CURRENT CLIENT_APPLNAME
            CURRENT CLIENT_PROGRAMID
            CURRENT CLIENT_USERID
            CURRENT CLIENT_WRKSTNNAME
            CURRENT DATE
            CURRENT DEBUG MODE
            CURRENT DECFLOAT ROUNDING MODE
            CURRENT DEGREE
            CURRENT IMPLICIT XMLPARSE OPTION
            CURRENT PATH
            CURRENT SCHEMA
            CURRENT SERVER
            CURRENT TIME
            CURRENT TIMESTAMP
            CURRENT TIMEZONE
            SESSION_USER
            SYSTEM_USER
            USER
          Column names
            Qualified column names
            Correlation names
            Column name qualifiers to avoid ambiguity
              Table designators
              Avoiding undefined or ambiguous references
            Column name qualifiers in correlated references
            Unqualified column names in correlated references
          Variables
            Global variables
            References to host variables
            Variables in dynamic SQL
            References to LOB or XML variables
              References to LOB or XML locator variables
              References to LOB or XML file reference variables
            References to XML variables
            Host structures
            Host structure arrays
          Functions
            Types of functions
            Function invocation
            Function resolution
            Determining the best fit
            Best fit considerations
          Expressions
            Without operators
            With arithmetic operators
              Two integer operands
              Integer and decimal operands
              Two decimal operands
              Decimal arithmetic in SQL
              Floating-point operands
              Decimal floating-point operands
              General arithmetic operation rules for DECFLOAT
              Distinct type operands
            With the concatenation operator
            Scalar fullselect
            Datetime operands and durations
            Datetime arithmetic in SQL
              Date arithmetic
              Time arithmetic
              Timestamp arithmetic
            Precedence of operations
            ARRAY constructor
            ARRAY element specification
            CASE expression
            CAST specification
            OLAP specifications
            ROW CHANGE expression
            Sequence reference
            XMLCAST specification
          Predicates
            Basic predicate
            Quantified predicate
            BETWEEN predicate
            DISTINCT predicate
            EXISTS predicate
            IN predicate
            LIKE predicate
            NULL predicate
          Search conditions
        Built-in functions
          Aggregate functions
            ARRAY_AGG
            AVG
            COUNT
            COUNT_BIG
            GROUPING
            MAX
            MIN
            STDDEV_POP or STDDEV
            STDDEV_SAMP
            SUM
            VAR_POP or VARIANCE or VAR
            VARIANCE_SAMP or VAR_SAMP
            XMLAGG
            XMLGROUP
          Scalar functions
            ABS
            ACOS
            ADD_MONTHS
            ANTILOG
            ASCII
            ASIN
            ATAN
            ATANH
            ATAN2
            BIGINT
            BINARY
            BITAND, BITANDNOT, BITOR, BITXOR, and BITNOT
            BIT_LENGTH
            BLOB
            CARDINALITY
            CEILING
            CHAR
            CHARACTER_LENGTH
            CHR
            CLOB
            COALESCE
            COMPARE_DECFLOAT
            CONCAT
            CONTAINS
            COS
            COSH
            COT
            CURDATE
            CURTIME
            DATABASE
            DATAPARTITIONNAME
            DATAPARTITIONNUM
            DATE
            DAY
            DAYNAME
            DAYOFMONTH
            DAYOFWEEK
            DAYOFWEEK_ISO
            DAYOFYEAR
            DAYS
            DBCLOB
            DBPARTITIONNAME
            DBPARTITIONNUM
            DECFLOAT
            DECFLOAT_SORTKEY
            DECIMAL or DEC
            DECRYPT_BIT, DECRYPT_BINARY, DECRYPT_CHAR and DECRYPT_DB
            DEGREES
            DIFFERENCE
            DIGITS
            DLCOMMENT
            DLLINKTYPE
            DLURLCOMPLETE
            DLURLPATH
            DLURLPATHONLY
            DLURLSCHEME
            DLURLSERVER
            DLVALUE
            DOUBLE_PRECISION or DOUBLE
            ENCRYPT_AES
            ENCRYPT_RC2
            ENCRYPT_TDES
            EXP
            EXTRACT
            FLOAT
            FLOOR
            GENERATE_UNIQUE
            GET_BLOB_FROM_FILE
            GET_CLOB_FROM_FILE
            GET_DBCLOB_FROM_FILE
            GET_XML_FILE
            GETHINT
            GRAPHIC
            HASH
            HASHED_VALUE
            HEX
            HOUR
            IDENTITY_VAL_LOCAL
            IFNULL
            INSERT
            INTEGER or INT
            JULIAN_DAY
            LAND
            LAST_DAY
            LCASE
            LEFT
            LENGTH
            LN
            LNOT
            LOCATE
            LOG10
            LOR
            LOWER
            LTRIM
            MAX
            MAX_CARDINALITY
            MICROSECOND
            MIDNIGHT_SECONDS
            MIN
            MINUTE
            MOD
            MONTH
            MONTHNAME
            MONTHS_BETWEEN
            MQREAD
            MQREADCLOB
            MQRECEIVE
            MQRECEIVECLOB
            MQSEND
            MULTIPLY_ALT
            NEXT_DAY
            NORMALIZE_DECFLOAT
            NOW
            NULLIF
            OCTET_LENGTH
            PI
            POSITION
            POSSTR
            POWER
            QUANTIZE
            QUARTER
            RADIANS
            RAISE_ERROR
            RAND
            REAL
            REPEAT
            REPLACE
            RID
            RIGHT
            ROUND
            ROUND_TIMESTAMP
            ROWID
            RRN
            RTRIM
            SCORE
            SECOND
            SIGN
            SIN
            SINH
            SMALLINT
            SOUNDEX
            SPACE
            SQRT
            STRIP
            SUBSTR
            SUBSTRING
            TAN
            TANH
            TIME
            TIMESTAMP
            TIMESTAMP_FORMAT
            TIMESTAMP_ISO
            TIMESTAMPDIFF
            TOTALORDER
            TRANSLATE
            TRIM
            TRIM_ARRAY
            TRUNCATE or TRUNC
            TRUNC_TIMESTAMP
            UCASE
            UPPER
            VALUE
            VARBINARY
            VARCHAR
            VARCHAR_FORMAT
            VARGRAPHIC
            WEEK
            WEEK_ISO
            WRAP
            XMLATTRIBUTES
            XMLCOMMENT
            XMLCONCAT
            XMLDOCUMENT
            XMLELEMENT
            XMLFOREST
            XMLNAMESPACES
            XMLPARSE
            XMLPI
            XMLROW
            XMLSERIALIZE
            XMLTEXT
            XMLVALIDATE
            XOR
            XSLTRANSFORM
            YEAR
            ZONED
          Table functions
            MQREADALL
            MQREADALLCLOB
            MQRECEIVEALL
            MQRECEIVEALLCLOB
            XMLTABLE
        Procedures
          CREATE_WRAPPED
          XDBDECOMPXML
          XSR_ADDSCHEMADOC
          XSR_COMPLETE
          XSR_REGISTER
          XSR_REMOVE
        Queries
          Authorization
          subselect
            select-clause
              Select list notation
              Applying the select list
              Null attributes of result columns
              Names of result columns
              Data types of result columns
            from-clause
              table-reference
              joined-table
            Hierarchical queries
              hierarchical-query-clause
              pseudo columns
              CONNECT_BY_ROOT
              PRIOR
              SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH
            where-clause
            group-by-clause
            having-clause
            order-by-clause
            fetch-first-clause
            Examples of a subselect
          fullselect
            Examples of a fullselect
          select-statement
            common-table-expression
              Recursion example: bill of materials
            update-clause
            read-only-clause
            optimize-clause
            isolation-clause
            concurrent-access-resolution-clause
            Examples of a select-statement
        Statements
          How SQL statements are invoked
            Embedding a statement in an application program
            Dynamic preparation and execution
            Static invocation of a select-statement
            Dynamic invocation of a select-statement
            Interactive invocation
          SQL diagnostic information
          Detecting and processing error and warning conditions in host language applications
          SQL comments
          ALLOCATE CURSOR
          ALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
          ALTER FUNCTION (External Scalar)
          ALTER FUNCTION (External Table)
          ALTER FUNCTION (SQL Scalar)
          ALTER FUNCTION (SQL Table)
          ALTER PROCEDURE (External)
          ALTER PROCEDURE (SQL)
          ALTER SEQUENCE
          ALTER TABLE
          ASSOCIATE LOCATORS
          BEGIN DECLARE SECTION
          CALL
          CLOSE
          COMMENT
          COMMIT
          CONNECT (Type 1)
          CONNECT (Type 2)
          CREATE ALIAS
          CREATE FUNCTION
          CREATE FUNCTION (External Scalar)
          CREATE FUNCTION (External Table)
          CREATE FUNCTION (Sourced)
          CREATE FUNCTION (SQL Scalar)
          CREATE FUNCTION (SQL Table)
          CREATE INDEX
          CREATE PROCEDURE
          CREATE PROCEDURE (External)
          CREATE PROCEDURE (SQL)
          CREATE SCHEMA
          CREATE SEQUENCE
          CREATE TABLE
          CREATE TRIGGER
          CREATE TYPE (Array)
          CREATE TYPE (Distinct)
          CREATE VARIABLE
          CREATE VIEW
          DEALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
          DECLARE CURSOR
          DECLARE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE
          DECLARE PROCEDURE
          DECLARE STATEMENT
          DECLARE VARIABLE
          DELETE
          DESCRIBE
          DESCRIBE CURSOR
          DESCRIBE INPUT
          DESCRIBE PROCEDURE
          DESCRIBE TABLE
          DISCONNECT
          DROP
          END DECLARE SECTION
          EXECUTE
          EXECUTE IMMEDIATE
          FETCH
          FREE LOCATOR
          GET DESCRIPTOR
          GET DIAGNOSTICS
          GRANT (Function or Procedure Privileges)
          GRANT (Global Variable Privileges)
          GRANT (Package Privileges)
          GRANT (Sequence Privileges)
          GRANT (Table or View Privileges)
          GRANT (Type Privileges)
          GRANT (XML Schema Privileges)
          HOLD LOCATOR
          INCLUDE
          INSERT
          LABEL
          LOCK TABLE
          MERGE
          OPEN
          PREPARE
          REFRESH TABLE
          RELEASE (Connection)
          RELEASE SAVEPOINT
          RENAME
          REVOKE (Function or Procedure Privileges)
          REVOKE (Global Variable Privileges)
          REVOKE (Package Privileges)
          REVOKE (Sequence Privileges)
          REVOKE (Table or View Privileges)
          REVOKE (Type Privileges)
          REVOKE (XML Schema Privileges)
          ROLLBACK
          SAVEPOINT
          SELECT
          SELECT INTO
          SET CONNECTION
          SET CURRENT DEBUG MODE
          SET CURRENT DECFLOAT ROUNDING MODE
          SET CURRENT DEGREE
          SET CURRENT IMPLICIT XMLPARSE OPTION
          SET DESCRIPTOR
          SET ENCRYPTION PASSWORD
          SET OPTION
          SET PATH
          SET RESULT SETS
          SET SCHEMA
          SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION
          SET TRANSACTION
          SET transition-variable
          SET variable
          SIGNAL
          UPDATE
          VALUES
          VALUES INTO
          WHENEVER
        SQL control statements
          References to SQL parameters and SQL variables
          References to SQL condition names
          References to SQL cursor names
          References to SQL labels
          Summary of ′name′ scoping in nested compound statements
          SQL-procedure-statement
          assignment-statement
          CALL statement
          CASE statement
          compound-statement
          FOR statement
          GET DIAGNOSTICS statement
          GOTO statement
          IF statement
          ITERATE statement
          LEAVE statement
          LOOP statement
          REPEAT statement
          RESIGNAL statement
          RETURN statement
          SIGNAL statement
          WHILE statement
        SQL limits
        Characteristics of SQL statements
          Actions allowed on SQL statements
          SQL statement data access classification for routines
          Considerations for using distributed relational database
            CONNECT (Type 1) and CONNECT (Type 2) differences
        SQLCA (SQL communication area)
          Field descriptions
          INCLUDE SQLCA declarations
        SQLDA (SQL descriptor area)
          Field descriptions in an SQLDA header
          Field descriptions in an occurrence of SQLVAR
          SQLTYPE and SQLLEN
          CCSID values in SQLDATA or SQLNAME
          Unrecognized and unsupported SQLTYPES
          INCLUDE SQLDA declarations
        CCSID values
        DB2 for i catalog views
          IBM i catalog tables and views
            SYSCATALOGS
            SYSCHKCST
            SYSCOLUMNS
            SYSCOLUMNS2
            SYSCOLUMNSTAT
            SYSCST
            SYSCSTCOL
            SYSCSTDEP
            SYSFIELDS
            SYSFUNCS
            SYSINDEXES
            SYSINDEXSTAT
            SYSJARCONTENTS
            SYSJAROBJECTS
            SYSKEYCST
            SYSKEYS
            SYSMQTSTAT
            SYSPACKAGE
            SYSPACKAGESTAT
            SYSPARMS
            SYSPARTITIONDISK
            SYSPARTITIONINDEXDISK
            SYSPARTITIONINDEXES
            SYSPARTITIONINDEXSTAT
            SYSPARTITIONMQTS
            SYSPARTITIONSTAT
            SYSPROCS
            SYSPROGRAMSTAT
            SYSREFCST
            SYSROUTINEDEP
            SYSROUTINES
            SYSSCHEMAS
            SYSSEQUENCES
            SYSTABLEDEP
            SYSTABLEINDEXSTAT
            SYSTABLES
            SYSTABLESTAT
            SYSTRIGCOL
            SYSTRIGDEP
            SYSTRIGGERS
            SYSTRIGUPD
            SYSTYPES
            SYSVARIABLEDEP
            SYSVARIABLES
            SYSVIEWDEP
            SYSVIEWS
            XSRANNOTATIONINFO
            XSROBJECTCOMPONENTS
            XSROBJECTHIERARCHIES
            XSROBJECTS
          ODBC and JDBC catalog views
            SQLCOLPRIVILEGES
            SQLCOLUMNS
            SQLFOREIGNKEYS
            SQLFUNCTIONCOLS
            SQLFUNCTIONS
            SQLPRIMARYKEYS
            SQLPROCEDURECOLS
            SQLPROCEDURES
            SQLSCHEMAS
            SQLSPECIALCOLUMNS
            SQLSTATISTICS
            SQLTABLEPRIVILEGES
            SQLTABLES
            SQLTYPEINFO
            SQLUDTS
          ANS and ISO catalog views
            AUTHORIZATIONS
            CHARACTER_SETS
            CHECK_CONSTRAINTS
            COLUMNS
            INFORMATION_SCHEMA_CATALOG_NAME
            PARAMETERS
            REFERENTIAL_CONSTRAINTS
            ROUTINES
            ROUTINE_PRIVILEGES
            SCHEMATA
            SQL_FEATURES
            SQL_LANGUAGES
            SQL_SIZING
            TABLE_CONSTRAINTS
            TABLES
            UDT_PRIVILEGES
            USAGE_PRIVILEGES
            USER_DEFINED_TYPES
            VARIABLE_PRIVILEGES
            VIEWS
        Text search argument syntax
          Examples: Simple text search
          Advanced text search operators
          Example: Using the CONTAINS function and SCORE function
          XML text search
            XML text search grammar
            Examples: XPath text search
          Text search language options
        Terminology differences
        Reserved schema names and reserved words
          Reserved schema names
          Reserved words
        Related information
    Troubleshooting
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Database troubleshooting
      Before you call service
      System i database FAQ
      Monitoring database file errors
    Related information for database
  e-business and Web serving
    Application servers
    Business solutions
      IBM Welcome Page V1.1
        PDF file for IBM Welcome Page V1.1
        Overview of IBM Welcome Page V1.1
          Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
          Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
          Interaction with IBM Tivoli Directory Server for i5/OS (LDAP)
          Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
          Interaction with a Lotus Sametime server
          Interaction with an Enterprise Identity Mapping server
        Install IBM Business Solutions
          Verify the prerequisites
          Install the applications
          Configure and deploy the applications
            Configure and deploy into a new application server
            Configure and deploy into an existing application server
            Manually configure and deploy into WebSphere Application Server, Network Deployment
          Verify installation and setup
        Administer IBM Welcome Page V1.1
          Manage server properties
          Manage user entry properties
          Manage group entry properties
          Manage administrator properties
          Manage client certificates
          Manage CA certificates
          Manage EIM server properties
          Manage EIM domain properties
          Manage Sametime server properties
          Manage STLinks properties
        Use IBM Welcome Page V1.1
        Troubleshoot IBM Welcome Page V1.1
      IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
        PDF file for IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
        Overview of IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
          Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
          Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
          Interaction with IBM Tivoli Directory Server for i5/OS (LDAP)
          Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
          Interaction with a Lotus Sametime server
          Interaction with an Enterprise Identity Mapping server
          Using the same directory for IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 and Lotus Sametime
        Installing IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
        Administering IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
          Adding an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
          Adding multiple entries from an i5/OS system registry
          Adding multiple entries using an .ldif file
          Changing an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
          Deleting an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
          Changing the password of an entry
          Changing directory access
          Changing enrollment properties of the application
          Allowing users to update and delete entries
          Changing maximum search size of entries
          Changing maximum search time
          Changing maximum photo size
          Setting up EIM registration and identity mapping
          Setting up Sametime chat links (STLinks) support
          Setting up Sametime presence list support
        Using IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
          Searching for an entry
            Using the wildcard character (*)
            More on searching by name
            Advanced search
            Viewing the results
          Adding an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
            New entry information
            Listing information
          Changing an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
          Deleting an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
          Changing your password using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
          Adding an entry to your Sametime presence list
          Starting a Sametime chat with an entry
          Managing your EIM registries
          Working with additional functions
        Troubleshooting IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
        Notices and limitations
      IBM Survey Creator V1.0
        PDF file for IBM Survey Creator V1.0
        Overview of IBM Survey Creator V1.0
          Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
          Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
          Interaction with IBM Tivoli Directory Server for i5/OS (LDAP)
          Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
          Interaction with a DB2 for i
          Survey authentication process
          Survey authorization process
        Install IBM Survey Creator V1.0
        IBM Survey Creator administrator pages
          Add survey owners
          Remove survey owners
        IBM Survey Creator V1.0 owner pages
          Create a survey
          Types of survey questions
            Add a question
            Update a question
            Remove a question
          Preview a survey
          Update a survey
          Survey results
          Remove a survey
          Define which users can or cannot take a survey
          Survey URL usage for survey takers
        Take a survey using IBM Survey Creator V1.0
        Troubleshoot IBM Survey Creator V1.0
    B2B and B2C
    Business process integration
    Collaboration
    Connecting to the Internet
    Development tools
    e-business enablers
      Content Manager and Content Manager OnDemand
      DB2 XML Extender Administration and Programming
      OmniFind Text Search Server
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file
        Introduction
          Overview
          System requirements
        Key concepts
          Create and update index
          Triggers
          Document formats
          Data types
          Score and Synonyms
          Linguistic processing
            Languages
            Chinese, Japanese, and Korean
          Server alias name
        Install and configure
          Install
          Start text search
          Create an index
          Update an index
          Search an index
          Document truncation
        Stored procedures
          SYSTS_START
          SYSTS_STOP
          SYSTS_CREATE
          SYSTS_ALTER
          SYSTS_DROP
          SYSTS_UPDATE
        Search an index
          CONTAINS
          SCORE
          Search syntax
            Simple examples
            Advanced search operators
            CONTAINS and SCORE example
          XML search
            Namespaces
            Using namespaces
            Example
            Query grammar
        Administer OmniFind
          Start OmniFind
          Stop OmniFind
          Save and restore
            Index structure
            Index with data
          Problem determination
          View and save logs
          Administration tools
            Configuration tool
            SYSTS_REMOVE
            SYSTS_REPRIMEINDEX
            SYSTS_VALIDITYCHECK
            Synonym dictionaries
              Add a synonym dictionary
              Remove a synonym dictionary
            Find orphaned and missing indexes
            Advanced administration
          ServerInstance tool
          Health Checker
          Independent ASP
          High Availability
          Performance analysis
          Transaction considerations
          Use Systems Director
            Work with servers
            Work with indexes
              View index builds
          Use System i Navigator
            Work with servers
            Work with indexes
              View index builds
        Administration tables
          SYSTEXTDEFAULTS
          SYSTEXTINDEXES
          SYSTEXTCOLUMNS
          SYSTEXTSERVERS
          SYSTEXTCONFIGURATION
          SYSTEXTSERVERHISTORY
          SYSTS_CREATE
        Extensions to Index and Search Non-DB2 Data
          Overview
          Create Collection
          Add Object Set for Spool File Data
          Add Object Set for a Stream File
          Removing an Object Set
          Updating the Collection
          Repopulate the Collection
          Search Collection
          Query Object Sets
          Retrieve Status of Indexes Objects
          Objects Not Indexed
          Retrieve Status of Collection
          Dropping a Text Search Collection
          IASP Considerations
          Backup and Restore Considerations
        Messages and codes
          OmniFind messages
          SQLCODE -0196
          SQLCODE -5003
          SQLCODE -20423
          SQLCODE -20424
          SQLCODE -20425
          SQLCODE -20426
          SQLCODE -20427
          CPF32fa
          CPF32fb
          CPI321E
      WebSphere Host Integration Solution
      WebSphere MQ
    Pervasive computing
    Programming
    Security
    IBM HTTP Server for i
  Files and file systems
    Database file management
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Database file management
      Overview of database file management
        File types
      Working with database files
        File resources allocation
          File resource allocation: Overview
          File resources that must be allocated
          How the system allocates resources
        Copying files
          Copying files: Overview
            Copying files: Commands
            Copying files: Supported functions
            Copying files: Basic functions
              File types and copying
              Record sequence and copying
              Resending copy file completion message
              Monitoring for copy errors
              Monitoring for zero records in the from-file
              Creating a duplicate to-file member
              Copy From Query File command support for CCSIDs
              Copy Source File command support for CCSIDs
              Copy commands support for null values
          Copying physical or logical files
          Creating the to-file (CRTFILE parameter)
            Specifying CRTFILE(*YES) on either the Copy File or Copy From Query File command
            Authorities, user profiles, and file capabilities of the to-file
          Adding, replacing, and updating records (MBROPT parameter)
            Specifying *REPLACE when copying files
            Specifying *ADD when copying files
            Specifying *UPDADD when copying files
            Copying records into files that use trigger programs
          Selecting the records to copy
            Selecting records using a specified record format name (RCDFMT parameter)
            Selecting records by relative record numbers (FROMRCD and TORCD parameters)
            Selecting records by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY parameters)
              Key string comparisons made by the copy operation
              Example: build-key function
              Example: using FROMKEY and TOKEY
              Variable-length fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              Date, time, and timestamp fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              Null-capable fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              Different CCSIDs used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              DBCS-graphic fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
            Selecting a specified number of records (NBRRCDS parameter)
            Selecting records based on character content (INCCHAR parameter)
              Variable-length fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
              Null-capable fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
              Different CCSIDs used by the INCCHAR parameter
              DBCS-graphic fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
            Selecting records based on field value (INCREL parameter)
              Variable-length fields used by the INCREL parameter
              Date, time, and timestamp fields used by the INCREL parameter
              Null-capable fields used by the INCREL parameter
              Different CCSIDs used by the INCREL parameter
              DBCS-graphic fields used by the INCREL parameter
            Copying deleted records (COMPRESS parameter)
              Requirements of COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the Copy File command
              Restrictions of the COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the Copy File command
              Details of the COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the Copy File command
          Printing records (PRINT, OUTFMT, and TOFILE(*PRINT) parameters)
            Creating an unformatted print listing
          Selecting members to copy
            Copying file members: Overview
            Allowed copy operations and parameters
            Copying all members within a file
            Copying only certain members within a file
            Specifying the member name for the copy operation
            Special considerations for the Override Database File and Override Tape File commands
            How the copy function adds members to the to-file
          Copying between different database record formats (FMTOPT parameter)
            Specifying data for different field types and attributes
              Mapping variable-length fields to fixed-length fields
              Map fixed-length fields to variable-length fields
              Date, time, and timestamp fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
              Null-capable fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
              CCSIDs using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
              DBCS-graphic fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
            Converting universal coded character set (UCS-2) graphic fields
              UCS-2 graphic fields restrictions
            Converting universal coded character set transformation format (UTF-8 character and UTF-16 graphic)
            Converting System/370 floating-point and null fields
              Errors in converting System/370 floating-point and null fields
            Conversion rules for copying files
          Adding or changing source file sequence number and date fields (SRCOPT and SRCSEQ parameters)
            Copying device source files to database source files
            Copying database source files to device source files
            Copying database source files to database source files
          Copying complex objects
            Copying files that contain user-defined functions
            Copying files that contain user-defined types
            Copying files that contain datalinks
            Copying files that contain large objects
            Copying files that contain identity columns or ROWID attributes
          Copying between different systems
            Using the Copy From Import File command to copy between different systems
              Notes on the CPYFRMIMPF command
              Restrictions on the CPYFRMIMPF command
              Importing data to the System i platform when the from-file is a database file or DDM file
              Importing data to the System i platform when the import file is a stream file
              Parallel data loader support to use with the Copy From Import File command
              Handling data from the import file
              Notes on the delimited import file (CPYFRMIMPF command)
              Fixed formatted import file
              Improving the performance of the CPYFRMIMPF command
            Using the Copy To Import File command to copy between different systems
              Notes on the Copy to Import File command
              Restrictions for the Copy to Import File command
              Notes on the delimited import file (CPYTOIMPF command)
              Copying data to the import file in a fixed format (CPYTOIMPF command)
        Opened files
          Scope of opened files
          Opening files using temporary file descriptions
          Detection of file description changes
          Displaying information about open files
          Monitoring file status with the open and I/O feedback area
        Shared files
          Open considerations for files shared in a job
          I/O considerations for files shared in a job
          Close considerations for files shared in a job
        Overrides
          Overview: Overrides
            Benefits of using overrides
            Summary of the override commands
            Effect of overrides on some commands
            Usage of overrides in multithreaded jobs
          Application of overrides
            Override of file attributes
            Override of file names
            Override of file names and file attributes
            Override of the scope of an open file
            How the system processes overrides
              Process priority of overrides
              Scenario: How the system processes overrides
              Process overrides: General principles
            Scenario: Effect of exits on overrides
            Scenario: Effect of TFRCTL on overrides
            Scenario: Overrides to the same file at the same call level
            CL program overrides
            Securing files against overrides
            Usage of a generic override for printer files
              Example: Apply OVRPRTF with *PRTF
              Example: Applying OVRPRTF with *PRTF from multiple call levels
            Application of overrides when compiling a program
          Deletion of overrides
          Display of overrides
            Example: Displaying all overrides for a specific activation group
            Example: Displaying merged file overrides for one file
            Example: Displaying all file overrides for one file
            Example: Displaying merged file overrides for all files
            Example: Displaying overrides with WRKJOB
            Example: Displaying overrides
            Tips about displaying overrides
          File redirection
            Plans for redirecting files
            Tips about redirecting files
            Default actions for redirected files
      Performance
        Avoiding keyed sequence access paths
        Specifying fewer parameters
        Checking record format level identifiers
        Preventing errors when copying files
          Limitation of recoverable errors during copy
          Prevention of date, time, and timestamp errors when copying files
            Mapping considerations using the Copy Object command
          Prevention of position errors when copying files
          Prevention of allocation errors when copying files
            Reasons for allocation errors when copying files
          Prevention of copy errors that result from constraint relationships
          Copy operation on files not in check-pending status
          Copy operation on files in check-pending status
          Prevention of copy errors related to your authority to files
      Security
        Object authority
          Object operational authority
          Object existence authority
          Object management authority
          Object reference authority
          Object alter authority
        Data authorities
        Authorities required for file operations
        Limitation of access to files and data when creating files
      Troubleshooting database file management
        File error detection and handling by the system
        Messages and message monitors in files by the system
        Major and minor return codes in files by the system
        Recovery from file system errors
          Normal completion of errors by the system
          Completion with exceptions of errors by the system
          Permanent system or file error
          Permanent device or session error on I/O operation
          Device or session error on open or acquire operation
          Recoverable device or session errors on I/O operation
      Reference
        Double-byte character set support
          Double-byte character set fundamentals
            DBCS code scheme
            Shift-control double-byte characters
            Invalid double-byte code and undefined double-byte code
            Usage of double-byte data
              Where you can use double-byte data
              Where you cannot use double-byte data
            Double-byte character size
          Process of double-byte characters
            Basic double-byte characters
            Extended double-byte characters
            What happens when extended double-byte characters are not processed
          DBCS device file support
            What a DBCS file is
            When to indicate a DBCS file
            How to indicate a DBCS file
            Improperly indicated DBCS files
              Making printer files capable of DBCS
          DBCS display support
            Inserting shift-control double-byte characters
            Number of displayed extended double-byte characters
            Number of DBCS input fields on a display
            Effects of displaying double-byte data at alphanumeric workstations
          Copy operation of DBCS files
            Copy operation of spooled DBCS files
            Copy operation of nonspooled DBCS files
          Application program considerations for DBCS
            Design of application programs that process double-byte data
            Changing alphanumeric application programs to DBCS application programs
          DBCS font tables
            Commands for DBCS font tables
            Finding out if a DBCS font table exists
            Copying a DBCS font table onto tape or diskette
              When to copy a DBCS table onto tape or diskette
              How to copy a DBCS table onto tape or diskette
            Copying a DBCS font table from tape or diskette
              How to copy a DBCS table from a tape or diskette
            Deleting a DBCS font table
              When to delete a DBCS font table
              How to delete a DBCS font table
            Starting the character generator utility for DBCS font tables
            Copying user-defined double-byte characters
          DBCS font files
          DBCS sort tables
            Commands for DBCS sort tables
            Using DBCS sort tables on the system
            Finding out if a DBCS sort table exists
            Saving a DBCS sort table onto tape or diskette
            Restoring a DBCS sort table from tape or diskette
            Copying a Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
              When to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
              How to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
            Copying a Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
              When to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
              How to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
            Deleting a DBCS sort table
              When to delete a DBCS sort table
              How to delete a DBCS sort table
          DBCS conversion dictionaries
            System-supplied dictionary (for Japanese use only) for DBCS
            User-created dictionary for DBCS
            Commands for DBCS conversion dictionaries
              Creating a DBCS conversion dictionary
              Editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
                Requirements for a DBCS conversion dictionary
                DBCS conversion dictionary operations
                Displays used for editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Working with DBCS conversion dictionary display
                  Edit Related Words display for a DBCS conversion dictionary
                Examples of editing operations for a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Beginning to edit a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Adding the first entries in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Moving a related word in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Deleting an entry in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Ending the editing process in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                Suggestions for editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
            Displaying and printing the DBCS conversion dictionary
            Deleting a DBCS conversion dictionary
          DBCS conversion (for Japanese use only)
            Where you can use DBCS conversion
            How DBCS conversion works
            Usage of DBCS conversion
            Performing DBCS conversion
              Examples of DBCS Conversion
                Converting double-byte Kana to double-byte Kanji
                Converting many alphanumeric entries at one time to DBCS
                Converting alphanumeric blanks to DBCS blanks
                Changing alphanumeric entries or conversion code to DBCS
                Using DBCS conversion to enter words in the DBCS conversion dictionary
              Considerations for using DBCS conversion
        Feedback area layouts
          Open feedback area
            Device definition list
            Volume label fields
          I/O feedback area
            Common I/O feedback area
            I/O feedback area for ICF and display files
            I/O feedback area for printer files
            I/O feedback area for database files
            Get attributes feedback area
      Related information
    Integrated file system
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Integrated file system
      Overview of the integrated file system
        What the integrated file system is
        Why use the integrated file system
      Integrated file system concepts
        Directory
          Current directory
          Home directory
          Provided directories
          *TYPE2 directories
        Link
          Hard link
          Symbolic link
        Path name
        Stream file
        Name continuity
        Extended attributes
        Scanning support
          Examples: Scanning for viruses and files being opened
          Related system values
          Scanning occurrences
            Object change
            Signature change
            Different CCSID
            During save operation
            Object integrity check
      File systems
        File system comparison
        "root" (/) file system
          Case-sensitivity in the "root" (/) file system
          Path names in the "root" (/) file system
          Links in the "root" (/) file system
          Use of integrated file system commands in the "root" (/) file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the "root" (/) file system
          Object changes journaling in the "root" (/) file system
          UDP and TCP devices in the "root" (/) file system
        Open systems file system (QOpenSys)
          Case sensitivity in the QOpenSys file system
          Path names in the QOpenSys file system
          Links in the QOpenSys file system
          Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QOpenSys file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the QOpenSys file system
          Object changes journaling in the QOpenSys file system
        User-defined file systems (UDFSs)
          Temporary user-defined file systems
          Case sensitivity in an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Path names in an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Links in an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Use of integrated file system commands in a user-defined file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in a user-defined file system
          Graphical user interface for a user-defined file system
          Creating an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Deleting an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Displaying an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Mounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Unmounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Saving and restoring an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Object changes journaling in a user-defined file system
          User-defined file system and independent auxiliary storage pools
        Library file system (QSYS.LIB)
          QPWFSERVER authorization list in the QSYS.LIB file system
          File-handling restrictions in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for user spaces in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for save files in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Case-sensitivity in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Path names in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Links in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the QSYS.LIB file system
        Independent ASP QSYS.LIB
          QPWFSERVER authorization list in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          File handling restrictions in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for user spaces in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for save files in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Case-sensitivity in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Path names in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Links in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        Document library services file system (QDLS)
          Integrated file system and HFS in the QDLS file system
          User enrollment in the QDLS file system
          Case sensitivity in the QDLS file system
          Path names in the QDLS file system
          Links in the QDLS file system
          Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QDLS file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the QDLS file system
        Optical file system (QOPT)
          Integrated file system and HFS in the QOPT file system
          Case-sensitivity in the QOPT file system
          Path names in the QOPT file system
          Links in the QOPT file system
          Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QOPT file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the QOPT file system
        i5/OS NetClient file system (QNTC)
          Authorities and ownership in the QNTC file system
          Case sensitivity in the QNTC file system
          Path names in the QNTC file system
          Links in the QNTC file system
          Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QNTC file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the QNTC file system
          QNTC environment variables
          Creating directories in the QNTC file system
            Use of integrated file system APIs in the Network File System
          Enabling QNTC file system for Network Authentication Service
        i5/OS file server file system (QFileSvr.400)
          Case-sensitivity in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Path names in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Communications in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Security and object authority in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Links in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        Network File System (NFS)
          Characteristics of the Network File System
          Variations of servers and clients in the Network File System
          Links in the Network File System
          Use of integrated file system commands in the Network File System
          Use of integrated file system APIs in the Network File System
          Comparison of Network File System version 4 to Prior Versions
          Setting up a network for RPCSEC-GSS
          Identity mapping
      Accessing the integrated file system
        Accessing using menus and displays
        Accessing using CL commands
          Path name rules for CL commands and displays
          Working with output of the RTVDIRINF and PRTDIRINF commands
            Accessing the data of RTVDIRINF
            Using the data of RTVDIRINF
            Collecting and analyzing folder attributes with Systems Director Navigator for i
        Accessing using APIs
        Accessing using a PC
        Accessing using System i Navigator
        Accessing using i5/OS NetServer
        Accessing using File Transfer Protocol
      Integrated file system conversion
        Converting directories from *TYPE1 to *TYPE2
          Overview of *TYPE1 to *TYPE2 conversion
          Directory conversion considerations
            Conversion status determination
            User profiles creation
            Objects renamed
              Combined characters
              Surrogate characters
            User profile considerations
              Changing maximum storage for a user profile
              Changing the owner of a directory
            Auxiliary storage requirements
            Tips: Symbolic link
            Tips: Independent ASP
            Tips: Saving and restoring
            Tips: Reclaiming integrated file system objects
            Integrated file system scanning
        Converting names to support additional characters
          Overview of automatic name conversion
          Name conversion considerations
            Conversion status determination
            Objects renamed
            User profile considerations
            Tips: Symbolic link
            Tips: Independent ASP
            Tips: Saving and restoring
            Tips: Reclaiming integrated file system objects
      Journaling objects
        Journaling overview
          Journal management
          Objects you should journal
          Journaled integrated file system objects
          Journaled operations
          Special considerations for journal entries
          Considerations for multiple hard links and journaling
        Starting journaling
        Changing journaling
        Ending journaling
      Reclaim operation of the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems
        Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) and Reclaim Storage (RCLSTG) commands comparison
        Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
        Re-creation of integrated file system provided objects
        Examples: Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
          Example: Correcting problems for an object
          Example: Correcting problems that exist in a directory subtree
          Example: Finding all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
          Example: Deleting all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
          Example: Running multiple RCLLNK commands to quickly reclaim all objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
      Programming support
        Copying data between stream files and database files
          Copying data using CL commands
          Copying data using APIs
          Copying data using data-transfer functions
            Transferring data from a database file to a stream file
            Transferring data from a stream file to a database file
            Transferring data into a newly created database file definition and file
            Creating a format description file
        Copying data between stream files and save files
        Performing operations using APIs
          ILE C functions
          Large file support
          Path name rules for APIs
          File descriptor
          Security
        Socket support
        Naming and international support
        Data conversion
        Example: Integrated file system C functions
      Working with files and folders using System i Navigator
        Creating a folder
        Removing a file or folder
        Moving files or folders to another file system
        Setting permissions
        Setting up file text conversion
        Sending a file or folder to another system
        Changing options for sending a file or folder
        Creating a file share
        Changing a file share
        Removing a file share
        Creating a new user-defined file system
        Mounting a user-defined file system
        Unmounting a user-defined file system
        Working with dynamically mounted file systems
        Setting whether objects should be scanned or not
        Checking in objects
        Checking out objects
      Transport-independent remote procedure call
        Network selection APIs
        Name-to-address translation APIs
        eXternal Data Representation (XDR) APIs
        Authentication APIs
        Transport-independent RPC (TI-RPC) APIs
          TI-RPC simplified APIs
          TI-RPC top-level APIs
          TI-RPC intermediate-level APIs
          TI-RPC expert-level APIs
          Other TI-RPC APIs
      Related information for integrated file system
    Spooled files
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Spooled files
      Spooling concepts
        Output spooling
          Output queues and spooled files
          Default system output queues
          Spooling writers
          Spooling writer commands
        Input spooling
          Job input commands
          Inline data files
          Considerations for opening inline data files
      Spooled files and output queues
        Spooling overview
        Spooled file
        Output queue
        Multiple output queues
        Output queue recovery
        Spooled file cleanup
        Default output queues
        Order of spooled files on an output queue
        Data queue support
          Record type 01 data queue entry format
          Record type 02 data queue entry format
          Record type 03 data queue entry format
        Spooled file names
        Spooled file security
        Output queue security
        QPRTJOB job
        Spooled file subsystem
        Spooled file library
        Spooled files in independent ASPs
      Managing spooled files
        Displaying a list of spooled files
        Displaying the contents of a spooled file
        Displaying messages associated with a spooled file
        Holding a spooled file
        Releasing a spooled file
        Moving a spooled file
        Deleting spooled files
        Converting a spooled file to PDF
        Exporting a spooled file to your PC
        Copying a spooled file to a physical file
        Sending a spooled file to another user or system
        Changing attributes of a spooled file
        Restarting the printing of a spooled file
        Suspending one spooled file and printing another
        Enabling spooled file notification message
        Controlling the number of spooled files
        Deleting expired spooled files
        Reclaiming spooled file storage
        Saving and restoring spooled files
        Controlling printing by spooled file size
    Tape files
      PDF file for Tape files
      Tape files overview
      Concepts
        Tape data files
        Tape device files
        Records, blocks, and formats
        Tape labeling
      Using tape files
        Initializing tapes
        Storing data in files on tape
          Extending files on tape
        Accessing data from a tape device
          Setting up a device description
          Setting up a device description for each media library device
          Setting up a tape device file
            Creating tape device file
            Specifying tape device file parameters
      Tape device files in high-level language programs
        Open processing for tape device files
        Input/output processing for tape
          Read and write considerations
          Read considerations
          Force-end-of-data considerations
          Force-end-of-volume considerations
        Close processing for tape
        User label processing
          Parameter 1
          Parameter 2
          Parameter 3
      Using overrides
        Overriding file attributes
        Overriding file names in high-level language programs
        Displaying overrides
        Deleting overrides
        File redirection
          Overriding files with the same file types
          Overriding files with different file types
          Recognizing commands that ignore or restrict overrides
      Record formats
        Example: Record format *D
        Example: Record format *DB
        Example: Record format *F
        Example: Record format *FB
        Example: Record format *V
        Example: Record format *VB
        Example: Record format *VS
        Example: Record format *VBS
        Example: Record format *U
      Reference
        Tape file CL commands
          Tape configuration description commands
          Tape device file commands
          Tape support commands
          Virtual tape support commands
        Feedback area layouts
          Open feedback area
            Device definition list
            Volume label fields
              IBM standard volume label (VOL1)
              IBM standard data set label 1 (HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
              IBM standard data set label 2 (HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
              IBM standard user labels (UHL1-UHL8 or UTL1-UTL8)
              Other IBM standard labels
              ISO/ANSI standard volume label (VOL1)
              ISO/ANSI standard data set label 1 (HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
              ISO/ANSI standard data set label 2 (HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
              ISO/ANSI standard user labels (UHL and UTL)
              Other ISO/ANSI labels
          I/O feedback area
            Common I/O feedback area
      Troubleshooting tape files
      Related information for Tape files
  IBM i and related software
    IBM i client partition considerations
      PDF file for IBM i client partition considerations
      Setting up IBM i client logical partitions
      Backing up and restoring IBM i partitions on a blade server
      Considerations and limitations for IBM i client partitions managed by the Integrated Virtualization Manager
        CL commands
        IBM Universal Manageability Enablement for i
    Installing, upgrading, or deleting IBM i and related software
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Installing, upgrading, or deleting IBM i and related software
      Fast path for software installation, upgrade, and deletion tasks
      Concepts for software installation
        Software installation process
        Types of software installation devices
        Contents of a software order
          Software licensing documents
          Media distribution set
          Individual product documentation
        Skipping a release
        Performance data collection
        Mixed-release environment
        Software upgrade or replacement
          Releases supported and system model information for IBM i upgrades
          Installation and IBM-supplied objects
          Compressed objects and storage space
          Files that the system deletes during installation
        Globalization and IBM i software installation
          Considerations for changing a primary language
          Considerations for installing additional secondary languages
        Object conversions (V5R4 to IBM i 7.1 upgrade)
      Checklist: IBM i software upgrade or replacement readiness
      Upgrading or replacing IBM i and related software
        Preparing to upgrade or replace IBM i software
          Verifying the contents of your software order
            Identifying and reviewing information resources
            Verifying the correct optical distribution media
            Verifying license keys for keyed products
          Preparing the system for IBM i software upgrade or replacement
            Verifying firmware requirements for the new release
            Reviewing software PTF (fix) requirements
              Finding the latest PSP information
              Analyzing fixes you currently have on your system
              Installing PTFs and analyzing your system for object conversions (V5R4 to IBM i 7.1 upgrade)
              Permanently applying program temporary fixes (PTFs)
              Adding fix support for currently installed licensed programs
            Working with critical system values before you install software
              Recording and printing all system values before you install software
              Changing certain system values (QSYSLIBL, QUSRLIBL, QALWOBJRST, or QVFYOBJRST)
              Optionally changing the scan control system value
              Setting the Year offset value
            Verifying the integrity of user-modified system objects
              Verifying user profiles and checking cross-reference files
              Checking the QSECOFR user profile
              Ensuring that the IBM-supplied product libraries are in the system ASP
            Ensuring two-phase commit integrity
            Minimizing software installation time
            Gathering performance data for benchmark
              Gathering performance data with Collection Services
              Analyzing performance data
          Performing initial upgrade or replacement tasks
            Choosing a software installation method and device
            Preparing for globalization
            Preparing the upgrade device and media
              Preparing to upgrade or replace software using an image catalog
                Determining storage requirements for image catalog installation
                Freeing up space on the load-source disk unit for an image catalog
                Preparing an optical image catalog to install software
                Preparing a tape image catalog to install software
              Preparing to upgrade or replace software with virtual optical storage using the Network File System
                Requirements for virtual optical storage within a Network File System network
                Setting up the server to share virtual optical image files with the client system for installation and upgrade
                Configure a service tools server for DST for the virtual optical device to use
                Setting up the virtual optical device on the client system for installing IBM i
                Using images on the client systemi
            Required: Creating a custom list of software to install
              Preselecting the licensed programs to install
              Adding additional licensed programs to the installation list
            Required: Accepting software agreements
            Ensuring the system meets disk storage requirements for upgrades
              Determining storage space required for a software upgrade
              Cleaning up disk storage space
                Deleting licensed programs during cleanup
                Cleaning up user profiles
            Choosing disk configuration
            Estimating upgrade or replacement time
            Preparing your console for software installation
            Stopping the integrated server and other application servers
          Saving the system
          Optional: Running the IBM Pre-Upgrade Verification tool
        Upgrading or replacing software using automatic installation
          Before you begin automatic installation
          Replacing software using the automatic installation method
          Verifying completion of automatic installation
        Upgrading or replacing software using manual installation
          Before you begin manual installation
          Replacing the Licensed Internal Code
          Replacing the IBM i operating system
          Replacing the licensed programs
          Verifying completion of manual installation
        Checklist: Completing the IBM i upgrade or replacement
      Replacing Licensed Internal Code and IBM i of the same version and release
        Checklist: IBM i software replacement
        Obtaining a record of PTFs applied
        Permanently applying PTFs for a replacement of the same release
        Determining storage space required for a replacement of the same release
        Replacing software of the same release using manual installation
        Installing PTFs for the Licensed Internal Code and the operating system
        Checklist: Completing the replacement of the same IBM i release
      Checklist: IBM i software installation readiness
      Installing IBM i and related software on a new system or logical partition
        Preparing to install the IBM i release
          Verifying the contents of your software order
            Identifying and reviewing information resources
            Verifying the correct optical distribution media
            Verifying license keys for keyed products
          Performing initial installation tasks
            Ensuring you have the latest information
            Determining disk storage space required for a new installation
            Estimating installation time
            Preparing your console for software installation
            Preparing the installation device and media
        Installing the IBM i release
          Installing Licensed Internal Code on a new logical partition
            Before you begin to install Licensed Internal Code on a logical partition
            Installing Licensed Internal Code on the new logical partition
          Installing software on a new system or logical partition (without IBM i installed)
            Before you begin to install software on a new system or logical partition
            Installing IBM i on a new system or logical partition
          Installing software on a new system (with IBM i installed)
            Before you begin to install software on a new system
            Performing the initial program load (IPL)
        Installing additional licensed programs
          Before you begin to install additional licensed programs
          Using the Work with Licensed Programs menu to install IBM licensed programs
          Using the Restore Licensed Programs command to install IBM or non-IBM licensed programs
        Installing a secondary language
          Before you begin to install a secondary language
          Installing secondary languages for IBM licensed programs
          Installing secondary languages for non-IBM licensed programs
        Checklist: Completing the IBM i installation
      Changing the primary language of your system or logical partition
        Before you begin to change the primary language
        Changing the primary language
        Installing the licensed programs after changing the primary language
      Deleting software related to IBM i
        Determining what unused parts of products to delete
        Considerations for deleting licensed programs
        Deleting licensed programs
      Troubleshooting software installation problems
        Where to begin recovery
        Image catalog recovery
        Operations Console recovery
        Starting point for automatic installation recovery
        Licensed Internal Code recovery
        Operating system recovery
        Licensed programs, PTFs, and secondary language recovery
        Starting the automatic installation process again
        Starting the manual installation process again
        Initialize System (INZSYS) recovery
        Disk configuration warning and error messages
        Starting from a power-off condition
        Reference codes for IBM i software installation
          Common reference codes for IBM i software installation
          IBM i installation recovery after using reference codes
      IBM i software reference
        Licensed program releases and sizes
        Estimates for IBM i software installation time
          Common methods of estimating IBM i installation time
          Conditions that affect IBM i installation time
          IBM i installation processes
          Checklist: Estimating IBM i installation time
            Times for installing licensed programs
            Times for conversions (V5R4 to IBM i 7.1 upgrade)
              Program conversions (V5R4 to IBM i 7.1 upgrade)
              Spooled file conversions (V5R4 to IBM i 7.1 upgrade)
              Integrated file system conversions (V5R4 to IBM i 7.1 upgrade)
              IBM Backup Recovery and Media Services for i conversions (V5R4 to IBM i 7.1 upgrade)
            Data protection mechanisms
        Interactive calculation of total licensed program installation time
        Installation devices and media
          Optical media
          Tape or tape libraries
          Non-IBM tape device
          Virtual optical storage using the Network File System
          Image catalog for a virtual device
          Using an alternate installation device
            Alternate installation device: Overview
            Setting up an alternate installation device
            Disabling an alternate installation device
            Verifying and selecting an alternate installation device during a manual installation
        IBM i release interoperability
        Installation notes about the IBM i release
        Media labels and their contents
          Feature codes for language version
          Blank displays
          System password
          Installed status values
          Options on the Prepare for Install menu
          Options on Work with Licensed Programs menu
            Manual installation Option 1. Install all
            Automatic installation options
            Options for displaying, installing, deleting, and saving from a list
              Option 10. Display installed licensed programs
              Option 11. Install licensed programs
              Option 12. Delete licensed programs
              Option 13. Save licensed programs
            Options for secondary languages
              Option 20. Display secondary languages
              Option 21. Install secondary languages
              Option 22. Delete secondary languages
            Completion status
            Commands related to the Work with Licensed Programs menu
      Related information for Installing, upgrading, or deleting IBM i and related software
    Maintaining and managing IBM i and related software
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Maintaining and managing IBM i and related software
      Using software fixes
        Fixes concepts and terms
          Types of fixes
            Single fixes
            Cumulative PTF packages
            Groups
            Service packs
          Cover letters
            Sample fix cover letter and description of fields
          Save files
          Status information
            Status descriptions using System i Navigator
            Status descriptions using the command interface
            Order status
          Where to find information about fixes
            Summary lists
            Cross-reference summary lists
            Preventive service planning information
              Obtaining preventive service planning information
              Contents of PSP information
            Authorized program analysis reports
        Planning your fix management strategy
        Determining which interface to use
        Ordering fixes
          Ordering fixes using the Internet
          Ordering fixes using the SNDPTFORD command
        Installing fixes
          Step 1: Reviewing fix cover letters prior to fix installation
          Step 2: Preparing the system to install fixes
            Determining the storage area before installing fixes
          Step 3: Choosing your fix installation scenario
            Installing cumulative PTF packages
            Installing fixes received as save files
            Installing fixes from media
            Distributing fixes to multiple systems with System i Navigator
              Sending and installing fixes
                Copying fixes from media
                Adding fix support for a software product
              Comparing and updating fixes
            Installing fixes on systems with logical partitions
            Installing fixes on systems managed by Hardware Management Console
            Installing IBM i fixes from an image catalog
          Step 4: Completing fix installation
          Step 5: Verifying fix installation
          Advanced procedures for fix installation
            Building a custom fix package
            Building virtual image fix packages
            Loading fixes
            Applying fixes
              Canceling the application of fixes
              Applying fixes during an unattended IPL
              Applying fixes during attended IPL
              Applying fixes without an IPL
              Applying fixes at the next unattended IPL
              Applying Licensed Internal Code fixes without an IPL
        Displaying fixes information on your system
          Displaying fix status with System i Navigator
          Displaying PTF information with the character-based interface
          Displaying properties of a fix or fix group
          Displaying an inventory of fixes on your system with Management Central
          Displaying level of fixes
        Working with fix cover letters
          Ordering fix cover letters
          Copying fix cover letters from media
          Displaying and printing fix cover letters
        Cleaning up fixes
        Removing software fixes
          Removing licensed program fixes
          Removing IBM i fixes
          Removing Licensed Internal Code fixes
      Working with software agreements and licenses
        IBM i Application Server licensing
        IBM i licensing on IBM system models that offer user entitlements
        Software agreements and licensing concepts
          Software agreements
          Software license keys
        Planning for software licensing
          Determining the usage limit for products not in the keyed set
          Determining the usage limit for products priced by processor
          Setting a usage limit with workload groups
            Scenario: Software licensing with workload groups
            Setting up software licensing with workload groups
            Retrieving workload groups licensed program information
            Auditing workload groups licensed program information
        Managing software agreements and license keys
          Accepting software agreements
          Displaying or printing your software agreements
          Preparing software agreements for transfer of ownership
          Displaying and changing software license information
            Adding license key information
            Setting the usage limit
          Distributing software license keys
      Managing software inventory
      Building and managing your own software products
        Packaging and sending your own software products
        Generating fixes for installed products using Management Central
        Generating software agreements for your own products
        Generating license keys for your own products
      Related information for Maintaining and managing IBM i and related software
    Distributing software
      PDF file for Distributing software
      Planning to distribute software
      Distributing software using System i Navigator
        Sending IBM software products using System i Navigator
        Packaging and sending your own software products using System i Navigator
      Distributing software using central site distribution
        Central site distribution concepts
          Overview of tasks to distribute software using central site distribution
          Central site distribution of software license information
          Types of distribution media for central site distribution
          Installation profiles for central site distribution
          Benefits of using automatic installation and installation profiles to install distribution media
          Installation methods for the target systems
          Licensed program compression and decompression for central site distribution
          Distribution of primary languages and secondary languages
          Distribution of program temporary fixes (PTFs)
        Checklist: Preparing to distribute software using central site distribution
          Preparing software license information for central site distribution
          Distributing software license information using System i Navigator or paper
          Optional: Writing a user-defined installation program for the target systems
          Optional: Preparing the central system for virtual optical images
          Optional: Preparing the central system for virtual tape images
        Checklist: Creating central site distribution media
          Duplicating and distributing tape or DVD distribution media
          Optional: Duplicating virtual images to physical media
          Optional: Duplicating DVD media to virtual images
          Optional: Distributing virtual images
        Checklist: Installing central site distribution media on the target system
          Optional: Preparing the target system for virtual images
          Installation tasks for the target systems
          Optional tasks to complete after installation
      Distributing additional licensed programs or fixes by using the Network File System
      Distributing software reference
        Central site distribution media contents
        Licensed programs that do not support secondary languages
        Cover sheet for central site distribution media
      Troubleshooting software distribution
      Related information for Distributing software
    Data migrations
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Data migrations
      Data migration concepts
      Planning the IBM i migration
        Planning your hardware for IBM i data migration
        Planning your software for IBM i data migration
        Planning for your IBM i console connection
        Recording an IBM i data migration plan
      Performing the migration
        Preparing for the migration with IBM i 7.1 on the source system
        Completing the migration with IBM i 7.1 on the source system
        Preparing for the migration from a System i model that does not support IBM i 7.1
        Completing the migration from a System i model that does not support IBM i 7.1
        Fixing hardware resource names after a data migration
      Scenarios: Data migration
      Troubleshooting the data migration
      Related information for IBM i data migration
  Linux in a logical partition
  Networking
    HTTP Server
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for IBM HTTP Server for i
      Installing HTTP Server
        Compatibility considerations
        Verify the prerequisites
        Install HTTP Server on your server
        Verify the HTTP Server installation
      Overview of IBM Web Administration for i
        Web browser requirements
        User profile requirements
        Starting Web Administration for i
        User interface conventions
        Configuring SSL for ADMIN wizard
      HTTP Server Concepts
        Context, directives, and the server area
        Content negotiation
        Virtual hosts
        Proxy server types
        Supported file systems for Web content
        Logging
          Log formats
          Web Log Monitor
        Security
          Security tips
          User profiles and required authorities
          Validation lists
          Kerberos
        Performance
          File compression
          Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
          Real time server statistics
          Web Performance Monitor
          Web Performance Advisor
        Extending HTTP Server functionality
          CGI
          Apache modules
          Service-side includes
        High availability
          Highly available HTTP Server
          High availability CGI programs
        Web Publishing with the PUT Method
        WebDAV
      Scenarios
        Setting up HTTP Server
        Adding a new directory
        Adding user directories
        Adding cookie tracking
        Adding virtual hosts
        Adding password protection
        Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
        Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
        Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
        Monitoring Web server activity with logs
      Tasks
        Getting started
        HTTP Server tasks
          Setting up additional MIME types
          Setting up content and language negotiation
          Setting up customized error messages
          Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
          Setting up environment variables
          Setting up highly available HTTP server
          Setting up welcome or index page
          Manually editing HTTP Server
          Managing HTTP Servers
          Managing addresses and ports
          Managing backup files
          Managing directories
          Managing HTTP Server performance
        Compression tasks
          Setting up input decompression
          Setting up output compression
        FRCA tasks
          Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
        Log tasks
          Setting up logs
        Proxy tasks
          Setting up forward proxy
          Setting up reverse proxy
          Set up proxy chaining
        Security tasks
          Setting up password protection
          Setting up to secure against denial of service
        WebDAV tasks
          Setting up WebDAV
        Web tasks
          Integrated Web application server
          Integrated Web services for i
          Web Performance Monitor
          Web Performance Advisor
          WebSphere Portal
        Virtual host tasks
          Setting up virtual hosts
        CGI tasks
          Setting up CGI jobs
          Setting up persistent CGI jobs
        Apache module tasks
          Setting up Apache modules
      Programming
        API
          Apache module APIs
          CGI APIs
          HTTP Server configuration APIs
        CGI programming
          The CGI Process
          CGI Data Conversions
          Writing high availability CGI programs
          Writing persistent CGI programs
          CGI programs and activation groups
          Running CGI Programs in PASE
          Setting up CGI programs
        Apache module programming
          Setting up third party modules
        Handlers
        Server-side scripting languages
          Net.Data
          PHP
        Running Java Web applications
      Troubleshooting
        Troubleshooting Web Administration for i
        Troubleshooting HTTP Server
        Troubleshooting CGI programs
      Reference information
        Directives
        Log file format tokens
        Regular expression notation
        CL commands
        Environment variables
        Server-side include commands
        Time formats
      Related information
      Legal
    Network planning worksheet
    Network scenarios
    Network communications
      Getting started with System i communications
        PDF file for Getting started with System i communications
        Networking concepts
          Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
          Advanced Program-to-Program Communication
          Dependent logical unit requester
          High-Performance Routing
          Systems Network Architecture
          TCP/IP
        Configuring your iSeries server for communications
          Creating a network interface description
          Creating a network server description
          Creating a line description
        Optimizing communications performance
          Improving wide area network performance
            Adjusting WAN protocols for optimum communications performance
            Adjusting the WAN line speed for optimum communications performance
            WAN configuration considerations for IOPs
          Improving local area network performance
            Adjusting LANs for optimum communications performance
            Adjusting LAN lines for optimum communications performance
            LAN line speed considerations for IOPs
          Improving data path performance
            Considerations for subsystem configuration for error recovery performance
            Communications performance considerations for interactive jobs
            Communications performance considerations for batch jobs
            Considerations for mixing interactive and batch jobs on a WAN line
            AnyNet communications for the iSeries system
              Setting up the AnyNet environment
              Performance considerations for AnyNet communications
            Configuring Enterprise Extender communications for the iSeries system
            Migrating from AnyNet to Enterprise Extender
              Migrating a system that can start AnyNet connections
              Migrating a system that cannot start AnyNet connections
              Migrating to Enterprise Extender with the existing AnyNet definitions maintained
            Subsystems
        Communications applications
          User-written APPC applications
          Distributed data management
          Application programming interface performance considerations
            Performance considerations for intersystem communications function
            Performance considerations for Common Programming Interface Communications
        Communicating with a host system
          Matching iSeries system parameters for a host system
            Matching iSeries system line description parameters for a host system
            Matching iSeries system controller description parameters for a host system
            Matching iSeries system device description parameters for a host system
            Matching iSeries system mode and class-of-service description parameters for a host system
            Examples: Connecting an iSeries server to a host server
              Example: iSeries system to host system over a nonswitched SDLC line
              Example: iSeries system to host system over a token ring line
              Example: iSeries system for DLUR support with the host system
              Example: iSeries server with APPN connection to VTAM
          Configuring depedent logical unit requester
            Configuring the host controller description
            Configuring the device descriptions
        Communicating with a remote iSeries server
          Matching iSeries system line description parameters for a remote iSeries system
          Matching iSeries system controller description parameters for a remote iSeries system
          Matching iSeries system device description parameters for a remote iSeries system
          Examples: Connecting one iSeries server to another iSeries server
            Example: iSeries server to iSeries server using X.25
            Example: iSeries server to iSeries server using SDLC
            Example: iSeries server to iSeries server using one-way automatic dialing
            Example: iSeries server to iSeries server using Enterprise Extender (HPRIP)
        Communicating with a remote workstation controller
          Matching iSeries system parameters for a 5494 controller
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by token ring
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by Ethernet
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by frame relay
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by SDLC
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by X.21
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by X.25
          Matching iSeries system parameters for a 3x74 controller
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 3174 controller
            Matching iSeries system parameters for a 3274 controller
            Example: Connecting an iSeries server to a 3174 control unit
          Matching iSeries system parameters for finance controllers
            Matching iSeries system parameters for 470x finance controllers
            Matching iSeries system parameters for FBSS finance controllers
            Example: Connecting an iSeries server to a finance network
          Matching iSeries system parameters for retail controllers
            Matching iSeries system parameters for 3651 retail controllers
              Specifying the SDLCLIN parameter for 3651 retail controllers
            Matching iSeries system parameters for 3684 retail controllers
              Specifying the LINECON parameter for 3684 retail controllers
            Matching iSeries system parameters for 4680/4690 LINE parameter
            Matching iSeries system parameters for 4680/4690 LINK parameter
            Matching iSeries system parameters for 4684 retail controllers
            Examples: Connecting an iSeries server to a 4690 retail controller
              Example: iSeries server to 4690 LU0 over token-ring network
              Example: iSeries server to 4690 peer over token-ring network
        Common networking standards
          Local area network standards
            Distributed data interface networks
            Ethernet networks
            Token-ring networks
            Wireless networks
          Wide area network standards
            Asynchronous communications
            Binary synchronous communications
            Frame relay networks
            Synchronous Data Link Control networks
            X.25 networks
            X.21 networks
        Troubleshooting communications problems
          Displaying message queues to solve communication problems
          Displaying the Product Activity Log to solve communication problems
          Displaying the Print Error Log to solve communication problems
            Job logs and communication problems
          Using communications trace to solve communication problems
            Communications trace and communication problems
            Trace CPI Communications (TRCCPIC) command
          Using the system problem log to solve communication problems
          Using the status information to solve communication problems
          Using reason codes to solve communication problems
          Considerations for system tuning during error recovery
          Using error messages to aid in error recovery
        Reference information
          Example details: iSeries to host server connection over a nonswitched SDLC line
          Example details: iSeries to host server connection over a token-ring line
          Example details: iSeries server DLUR support with connection to the host server
          Example details: iSeries server with APPN connection to VTAM
          Example details: iSeries server to iSeries server connection using X.25
          Example details: iSeries server to iSeries server connection using SDLC
          Example details: iSeries server to iSeries server connection using one-way automatic dial
          Example details: iSeries server to iSeries server connection using Enterprise Extender (HPRIP)
          Example details: iSeries server connection to a 3174 control unit
          Example details: iSeries server connection to 4690 LU0 over token-ring network
          Example details: iSeries server connection to 4690 peer over token-ring network
      APPC, APPN, and HPR
        PDF file for APPC, APPN, and HPR
        Planning APPN and HPR network
          Considerations in selecting APPC networking protocol
          Considerations in designing an APPN and HPR network
        Configuring APPC, APPN, and HPR
          Automatic configuration on LANs
            Parameters determination during automatic configuration
            Automatic creation and vary on of the controller description
            Automatic vary off and deletion of controller descriptions
            Communication considerations using model controllers
            Controlling automatic configuration
          Manual configuration for APPN and HPR
            Changing network attributes
            Creating controller descriptions for APPC connections
            Creating device descriptions for APPC connections
            Creating APPN location lists
            Creating mode descriptions
            Creating class-of-service descriptions
          Configuring Branch Extender support
          Connection network support
            Requirements for an APPN connection network
            Configuration considerations for an APPN connection network
          Configuration considerations used to optimize error recovery performance
            Considerations for the ONLINE parameter that can affect error recovery
            Considerations for communications-related system values
            Considerations for network attributes that can affect APPC error recovery
            Considerations for line configuration settings that can affect error recovery
              Considerations for the automatic creation of APPC controller descriptions on the LAN
              Considerations for the automatic deletion of APPC controller descriptions on the LAN
              Link-level timers and retries
            Considerations for controller configuration descriptions that can affect error recovery
              Considerations for automatic delete device (AUTODLTDEV) parameter for error recovery
              Considerations for the INLCNN parameter that can affect error recovery
              Considerations for the SWTDSC parameter that can affect error recovery
              Considerations for the MINSWTSTS parameter that can affect error recovery
              APPC controller recovery summary
              Considerations for disconnect timer (DSCTMR) parameter for error recovery
            Considerations for modes that can affect error recovery
            Considerations for jobs that can affect error recovery
              Considerations for the CMNRCYLMT parameter that can affect error recovery
              Considerations for prestart job entries that can affect APPC error recovery
              Considerations for job logs that can affect communications error recovery
              The Change System Job (CHGSYSJOB) command
              The Device Wait Timeout parameter
          Connecting a PC to iSeries using Personal Communications
          Configuring APPC with VTAM
        Examples: APPC, APPN, and HPR configuration
          Examples: APPN configuration
            Example: Two iSeries systems as end nodes using APPN
              Configuring system A (New York) as an end node
                Changing the network attributes (New York) in two-system network
                Creating the line description (New York) in two-system network
                Creating the controller description (New York) in two-system network
              Configuring system B (Los Angeles) as end node
                Changing the network attributes (Los Angeles) in two-system network
                Creating the line description (Los Angeles) in two-system network
                Creating the controller description (Los Angeles) in two-system network
            Example: Two iSeries systems as network nodes using APPN
              Configuring network node 1 (Chicago)
                Changing the network attributes (Chicago) in two-system network
                Creating the line description (Chicago to Minneapolis, nonswitched)
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to Minneapolis, nonswitched)
                Creating the line description (Chicago to Minneapolis, switched)
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to Minneapolis, switched)
              Configuring network node 2 (Minneapolis)
                Changing the network attributes (Minneapolis) as a network node
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to Chicago, nonswitched)
                Creating controller description A (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to Chicago, switched)
                Creating controller description B (Minneapolis to Chicago)
            Example: Three iSeries systems using APPN
              Configuring system A (New York)
                Changing the network attributes (New York) in three-system network
                Creating the remote location configuration list (New York) in three-system network
                Creating the line description (SDLC nonswitched - New York)
                Creating the controller description in three-system network (New York)
              Configuring system B (Los Angeles)
                Changing the network attributes (Los Angeles) in three-system network
                Creating the remote location configuration list (Los Angeles)
                Creating the line description (Los Angeles)
                Creating the controller description (Los Angeles)
              Configuring system C (Chicago)
                Changing the network attributes (Chicago) in three-system network
                Creating the line description (Chicago to New York) in three-system network
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to New York) in three-system network
                Creating the line description (Chicago to Los Angeles)
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to Los Angeles)
            Example: Two APPN networks with different network IDs linked together
              Configuring system A (New York)
                Changing the network attributes (New York) for two APPN networks with different IDs
                Creating the line description (New York)
                Creating the controller description (New York) for two-system network with different IDs
              Configuring system B (Detroit)
                Changing the network attributes (Detroit)
                Creating the line description (Detroit to New York)
                Creating the controller description (Detroit to New York)
                Creating the line description (Detroit to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Detroit to Chicago)
              Configuring system NN1 (Chicago)
                Changing the network attributes (Chicago) for two-system APPN network with different IDs
                Creating the line description (Chicago to Minneapolis) for two-system APPN network with different IDs
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to Minneapolis) for two-system APPN network with different IDs
                Creating the line description (Chicago to Detroit)
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to Detroit)
              Configuring NN2 (Minneapolis)
                Changing the network attributes (Minneapolis) for two networks with different ID's
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Chicago)
            Example: Multiple iSeries systems using APPN
              Configuring end node 1 (New York)
                Changing the network attributes (New York) in multiple-system network
                Creating the remote location configuration list (New York)
                Creating the line description (New York to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (New York to Chicago)
                Creating the line description (New York to Minneapolis)
                Creating the controller description (New York to Minneapolis)
              Configuring network node 1 (Chicago)
                Changing the network attributes (Chicago) in multiple-system network
                Creating the line description (Chicago to New York)
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to New York)
                Creating the line description (Chicago to Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
                Creating the controller description (Chicago to Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
                Creating line description B (Chicago to Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
                Creating controller description B (Chicago to Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
              Configuring network node 2 (Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
                Changing the network attributes (Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to New York, switched)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to New York, switched)
                Creating the line description A (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Chicago, nonswitched)
                Creating the line description B (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Chicago, switched)
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to Los Angeles, switched)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Los Angeles, switched)
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Purchasing, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Distribution, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Payroll, token-ring network)
                Changing the network attributes (Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to New York, switched)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to New York, switched)
                Creating the line description A (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Chicago, nonswitched)
                Creating the line description B (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Chicago, switched)
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to Los Angeles, switched)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Los Angeles, switched)
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Purchasing, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Distribution, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Payroll, token-ring network)
                Changing the network attributes (Minneapolis) in multiple-system network
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to New York, switched)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to New York, switched)
                Creating the line description A (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Chicago, nonswitched)
                Creating the line description B (Minneapolis to Chicago)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Chicago, switched)
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to Los Angeles, switched)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Los Angeles, switched)
                Creating the line description (Minneapolis to token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Purchasing, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Distribution, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Minneapolis to Payroll, token-ring network)
              Configuring end node 2 (Los Angeles)
                Changing the network attributes (Los Angeles) in multiple-system network
                Creating the line description (Los Angeles to Minneapolis)
                Creating the controller description (Los Angeles to Minneapolis)
              Configuring end node A (Purchasing)
                Changing the network attributes (Purchasing)
                Creating the remote location configuration list (Purchasing)
                Creating the line description (Purchasing to token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Purchasing to Minneapolis, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Purchasing to Distribution, token-ring network)
              Configuring end node B (Distribution)
                Changing the network attributes (Distribution)
                Creating the line description (Distribution to token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Distribution to Minneapolis, token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Distribution to Purchasing, token-ring network)
              Configuring low entry networking end node 1 (Payroll)
                Creating the line description (Payroll to token-ring network)
                Creating the controller description (Payroll to token-ring network)
                Creating the APPC device (Payroll to New York)
                Creating the APPC device (Payroll to Los Angeles)
                Creating the APPC device (Payroll to Minneapolis)
          Examples: HPR Configuration
            Example: Two iSeries systems as network nodes using HPR
            Example: Three iSeries systems using HPR
        Optimizing APPN and HPR communication performance
          Performance considerations for APPN and HPR
          Communications optimization using high-performance routing
          Communications optimization using APPN virtual controllers
          Configuration parameters for fine-tuning APPC performance
            Maximum length request/response unit size (MAXLENRU) parameter
            Maximum frame size (MAXFRAME) parameter
            Pacing (INPACING, OUTPACING, MAXINPACING) parameters
            Transmission priority (TMSPTY) parameter
            Wait time (QACRETRY and QACINTERVL) data areas
        APPC, APPN, and HPR security
          Session-level security for APPN and HPR
          Protecting your system in an APPN and HPR environment
            APPN filtering support
            Creating a session endpoint filter
            Class of service routing
        Troubleshooting APPN and HPR
          Solving remote communication problems using STRPASTHR
          Solving communication problems using DSPAPPNINF
          Solving communication problems using WRKAPPNSTS
          Solving communications problems using communications trace
          Solving communication problems using session activity
          Systems Network Architecture sense codes
          APPN error log data
            Standard APPN diagnostic data
            APPN session setup states
            Optional APPN diagnostic data
              Search-sent elements
              Regular Route Selection control vector (RSCV) 46
              Regular Route Selection control vector (RSCV) 0E
              Single hop route failure element
              Ineligible destination network nodes elements
              Destination node list
              User class-of-service with inactive transmission groups RSCV
              Any class-of-service with active transmission groups RSCV
      Ethernet on System i
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for Ethernet on System i
        Ethernet support
          Ethernet terminology
          Ethernet capabilities
            Line speed
            Duplex mode
            Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Ethernet
            Auto-negotiation
            Auto-sensing
          Establishment of a physical connection to your network
          Hardware requirements for Ethernet
          LAN IOA addresses
          Ethernet frame format
          Types of Ethernet frames sent
          Maximum Ethernet frame sizes
          Maximum LAN frame sizes
          LAN device connection
            LAN device identification
            SNA exchange identifiers
            LAN device connection initiation
          SNA connections to LAN protocols
            SNA service access points
        Configuring Ethernet support
          Configuring TCP/IP over Ethernet
          Configuring SNA over Ethernet
            Selecting a LAN IOA and creating the Ethernet line description
            Creating the SNA controller description
            Creating the SNA device description
            Varying on configuration objects for SNA
        Managing Ethernet support
          Using existing line descriptions with System i Navigator
            Changing your line description
            Assigning your line description to a TCP/IP interface
          Enabling objects to accept connections
            Varying on configuration objects for SNA
            Starting the TCP/IP interface
          Viewing the LAN IOA address
          Configuration object commands
          Tuning Ethernet performance
            Adjusting your LAN-frame size
            Remote bridges dropping frames
            Improvement of Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Ethernet performance
            SNA over Ethernet timing parameters
              LANCNNTMR and LANCNNRTY
              LANRSPTMR and LANFRMRTY
              LANACKTMR and LANACKFRQ
              LANINACTMR
              LANMAXOUT
              LANWDWSTP
              LANACCPTY
              Changing timing parameters
        Troubleshooting Ethernet
          Viewing QSYSOPR or other message queues
          Troubleshooting LANs
          Physical network problems
          Connection failure and controller descriptions
          Remote system connection failure
        Ethernet Link Aggregation
          Preparing to Create an Aggregate Line Description
          Creating an Aggregate Line Description
          Managing an Aggregate Line Description
        Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
          Preparing for Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
          Suggested Practices for Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
          Configuring Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
          Common Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging Errors
          Managing Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
        Related information for Ethernet on System i
      OptiConnect
        PDF file for OptiConnect
        OptiConnect concepts
          OptiConnect connectivity advantages
          OptiConnect and System i clustering
          OptiConnect software capabilities
          How OptiConnect works
          OptiConnect hardware
            HSL OptiConnect
            Virtual OptiConnect
          OptiConnect software
            OptiConnect components
            QSOC subsystem
            OptiConnect job descriptions
        Installing OptiConnect
          Software requirements
          Hardware requirements
          Installing OptiConnect software
          Verifying OptiConnect software installation
          Activating logical partitions for OptiConnect
            Activating logical partitions for Virtual OptiConnect
            Activating logical partitions for HSL OptiConnect
        Configuring OptiConnect
          Configuring fast path routing
          Configuring extended function path routing
          Customizing OptiConnect
            Routing SNADS over OptiConnect
            Initial library list
            Changing QUSER access authority
            QYYCDTSU job description
            QYYCMGR job description
            OptiConnect performance factors
          Advanced OptiConnect customization
            Routing SQL over OptiConnect
            Routing remote journals over OptiConnect
            Using the mode table
            Reloading the mode table
            Journaling OptiConnect transactions
            Submitting remote jobs
          Configuring TCP/IP over OptiConnect
            Features
            Defining the OptiConnect TCP/IP interface
            Configuring the TCP/IP interfaces for OptiConnect
            OptiConnect and IP forwarding
            Proxy ARP with OptiConnect
            Starting the OptiConnect IP interface
            Ending the OptiConnect IP interface
        Managing OptiConnect
          Starting OptiConnect
          Ending OptiConnect
          Considerations for starting and ending OptiConnect
          Getting information about OptiConnect activity
            Working with active jobs
            Working with OptiConnect activity
            Displaying OptiConnect link status
            Working with hardware resources
            Displaying hardware resources
        Troubleshooting OptiConnect
          Basic troubleshooting procedure
          Re-establishing system connections when OptiConnect is installed
          OptiConnect error messages
          OptiConnect cluster diagnostics
        Related information
      Token ring
        PDF file for Token ring
        Token-ring overview
          Supported token-ring functions
          Connection establishment between LAN devices
            How LAN devices identify themselves
              SNA exchange identifiers
            Which LAN device initiates the connection
              Dial mode (SNA)
              Answer mode (SNA)
          SNA connections to LAN protocols
            Your SNA service access points
          Maximum frame size of token ring
        Planning for token-ring support
          Maximum LAN frame size
          LAN IOA addresses
        Configuring token-ring support
          Configuring TCP/IP over token ring
          Configuring SNA over token ring
            Creating the token-ring line description
              Token-ring IOAs
              Selecting a LAN IOA
            Creating the SNA controller description
            Creating the SNA device description
          Examples: Configuring SNA over token ring
            Example: Connecting a system to another system
            Example: Connecting the system to itself
            Example: Connecting a system to a 3745 host
              Example: Creating a host physical configuration
              Example: Creating a host logical configuration
            Example: Connecting a system to a 3174 Model 1L gateway
              Example: Creating the NCP generation for a 3174 gateway
              Example: Connecting a system to a 3174 subsystem control unit
            Example: Creating parallel connections to a host
              Example: Configuring the physical and logical parallel connections on the host system
        Managing token-ring support
          Changing the line descriptions to use token ring
          Assigning the token-ring line description to a TCP/IP interface
          Enabling objects to accept connections
          Viewing the address of your LAN IOA
          Configuration object commands
        Tuning token-ring performance
          Adjusting your LAN-frame size
            Viewing the QSYSOPR message queue or other message queues
            Bridges dropping frames
            Token-ring line description commands
          Timing
            Timing parameters
              The LANCNNTMR and LANCNNRTY parameters
              The LANRSPTMR and LANFRMRTY parameters
              The LANACKTMR and LANACKFRQ parameters
              The LANINACTMR parameter
              The LANMAXOUT parameter
              The LANWDWSTP parameter
              The LANACCPTY parameter
            Changing timing parameters
        Troubleshooting token ring
          Troubleshooting LANs
          Why some LAN connections fail
          Why PCs do not connect to your system
          Understanding the token-ring address format
      Related information
    Networking security
    TCP/IP setup
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for TCP/IP setup
      Internet Protocol version 6
        IPv6 overview
        IPv6 concepts
          IPv6 address formats
          IPv6 address types
          Neighbor discovery
          Stateless address autoconfiguration
          Address autoconfiguration with DHCPv6
        Comparison of IPv4 and IPv6
        Available IPv6 functions
        Scenario: Creating an IPv6 local area network
          Starting the IPv6 stack
          Configuring IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration
          Starting IPv6 interface
        IPv6 troubleshooting
      Planning TCP/IP setup
        Gathering TCP/IP configuration information
        TCP/IP security considerations
      Installing TCP/IP
      Configuring TCP/IP
        Configuring TCP/IP for the first time
          Step 1: Configuring a line description (Ethernet)
          Step 2: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
          Step 3: Configuring an interface
          Step 4: Configuring a default route
          Step 5: Defining TCP/IP domain
          Step 6: Defining a host table
          Step 7: Starting TCP/IP
          Step 8: Testing TCP/IP connection
        Configuring IPv4 DHCP clients
        Configuring IPv6
          Planning IPv6 configuration
          Configuring IPv6 address autoconfiguration
          Manually creating an IPv6 interface
        Configuring TCP/IP when the operating system is in restricted state
          Starting TCP/IP using special parameters
          Starting a specific TCP/IP interface
          Verifying the interface
      Customizing TCP/IP
        Changing TCP/IP general settings
          Changing TCP/IP domain
          Customizing host table entries
          Changing IPv4 properties
          Changing IPv6 properties
          Changing other TCP/IP attributes
        Customizing IPv4 interfaces
          Adding IPv4 interfaces
          Starting IPv4 interfaces
          Changing IPv4 interfaces
          Ending IPv4 interfaces
          Removing IPv4 interfaces
        Customizing IPv6 interfaces
          Adding IPv6 interfaces
          Starting IPv6 interfaces
          Changing IPv6 interfaces
          Ending IPv6 interfaces
          Removing IPv6 interfaces
        Customizing IPv4 routes
          Adding IPv4 routes
          Changing IPv4 routes
          Removing IPv4 routes
        Customizing IPv6 routes
          Adding IPv6 routes
          Changing IPv6 routes
          Removing IPv6 routes
      Ending TCP/IP connections
      TCP/IP techniques to connect virtual Ethernet to external LANs
        Proxy Address Resolution Protocol method
          Step 1: Enabling virtual Ethernet
          Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 8xx
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models other than 8xx
          Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
          Step 4: Creating the interface to enable proxy ARP
          Step 5: Creating virtual TCP/IP interfaces
          Step 6: Creating a preferred interface list
          Step 7: Creating the default route
          Step 8: Verifying network communications
        Network address translation method
          Step 1: Enabling virtual Ethernet
          Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 8xx
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models other than 8xx
          Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
          Step 4: Creating the interfaces
          Step 5: Creating packet rules
          Step 6: Verifying network communications
        TCP/IP routing method
          Step 1: Enabling virtual Ethernet
          Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 8xx
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models other than 8xx
          Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
          Step 4: Creating the interfaces
        Advantages of using virtual Ethernet
      Related information for TCP/IP setup
    TCP/IP applications, protocols, and services
      BOOTP
        PDF file for Bootstrap Protocol
        Configuring the BOOTP server
        Changing BOOTP attributes
        Working with the BOOTP table
      Connecting to the Internet
      Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for DHCP
        DHCP concepts
          DHCP client/server interaction
          Leases
          Relay agents and routers
          DHCP client support
          BOOTP
          Dynamic updates
          DHCP options lookup
        Examples: DHCP
          Example: Simple DHCP subnet
          Example: Multiple TCP/IP subnets
          Example: DHCP and multihoming
          Example: DNS and DHCP on the same System i
          Example: DNS and DHCP on different System i models
          Example: PPP and DHCP on a single System i
          Example: DHCP and PPP profile on different System i models
        Planning for DHCP
          Security considerations
          Network topology considerations
        Configuring DHCP
          Configuring the DHCP server and BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
            Configuring or viewing the DHCP server
            Starting or stopping the DHCP server
            Configuring the DHCP server to be started automatically
            Accessing the DHCP server monitor
            Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
            Starting or stopping the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
            Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent to be started automatically
          Configuring the DHCP server to use ISC's DHCP 4
            Using ISC's DHCP 4
            Considerations for using the ISC DHCP server
            DHCP failover
          Configuring clients to use DHCP
            Enabling DHCP for Windows Me clients
              Checking the DHCP lease for Windows Me clients
            Enabling DHCP for Windows 2000 clients
              Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
              Updating DNS A records
            Enabling DHCP for Windows XP clients
              Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
              Updating DNS A records
          Configuring DHCP to send dynamic updates to DNS
            Disabling DNS dynamic updates
        Managing leased IP addresses
        Troubleshooting DHCP
          Gathering detailed DHCP error information
            Tracing the DHCP server
          Problem: Clients are not receiving an IP address or their configuration information
          Problem: Duplicate IP address assignments on the same network
          Problem: DNS records are not being updated by DHCP
          Problem: DHCP job log has DNS030B messages with error code 3447
        Related information for DHCP
      IBM Tivoli Directory Server for IBM i (LDAP)
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for IBM Tivoli Directory Server for IBM i (LDAP)
        Directory Server concepts
          Directories
          Distributed directories
            Global administration group
          Distinguished names (DNs)
          Suffix (naming context)
          Schema
            Directory Server schema
            Common schema support
            Object classes
            Attributes
              Common subschema elements
              The objectclass attribute
              The attributetypes attribute
              The IBMAttributeTypes attribute
              Matching rules
              Indexing rules
                Indexing rules specifications for attributes
              Attribute syntax
            Object identifier (OID)
            The subschema entries
            The IBMsubschema object class
            Schema queries
            Dynamic schema
            Disallowed schema changes
            Schema checking
            iPlanet compatibility
            Generalized and UTC time
          Recommended practices for directory structure
          Publishing
          Replication
            Replication overview
            Replication terminology
            Multi-threaded replication
            Replication error table
            Replication agreements
            How replication information is stored in the server
            Security considerations for replication information
            Replication in a high availability environment
          Realms and user templates
          Search parameters
          National language support (NLS) considerations
          Language tags
          LDAP directory referrals
          Transactions
          Directory Server security
            Auditing
            Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) with the Directory Server
            Kerberos authentication with the Directory Server
            Password encryption
            Groups and roles
              Static groups
              Dynamic groups
              Nested groups
              Hybrid groups
              Determining group membership
              Group object classes for nested and dynamic groups
              Group attribute types
              Roles
            Administrative access
            Administrative Roles
            Proxy authorization
            Access control lists
              Filtered access control lists
              The access control attribute syntax
              EntryOwner
              Propagation
              Access evaluation
              Subtree replication considerations
              Example of defining the ACIs and entry owners
              Example of changing the ACI and entry owner values
              Example of deleting the ACI and entry owner values
              Example of retrieving the ACI and entry owner values
            Ownership of LDAP directory objects
            Password policy
            Password policy tips
            Authentication
            Denial of service
          Operating system projected backend
            User projected directory information tree
            LDAP operations
            Administrator and replica bind DNs
            User projected schema
            Read access to projected users
          Directory Server and IBM i journaling support
          Directory Server and IBM i IASP support
          Unique attributes
          Operational attributes
          Server caches
            Attribute cache
            Filter cache
            Entry cache
            ACL cache
          Controls and extended operations
          Save and restore considerations
        Getting started with Directory Server
          Migration considerations
            Migrating to i 7.1 from 5.4 or 6.1
            Migrating data from V5R2 or V5R3 to IBM i 7.1
              Upgrading from V5R2 or V5R3 to an interim release
              Saving the database library and installing IBM i 7.1
            Migrating a network of replicating servers
            Kerberos service name change
          Planning your Directory Server
          Configuring the Directory Server
          Populating the directory
          Web administration
            Setting up Web administration for the first time
            Web administration tool
          Directory Sever and IBM i Navigator
        Scenarios
          Scenario: Setting up a Directory Server
            Scenario details: Set up the Directory Server
            Scenario details: Create the directory database
            Scenario details: Publish the System i5 data to the directory database
            Scenario details: Enter information into the directory database
            Scenario details: Test the directory database
          Scenario: Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
        Administering Directory Server
          General administration tasks
            Starting the Directory Server
            Stopping the Directory Server
            Checking the status of the Directory Server
            Checking jobs on the Directory Server
            Managing server connections
            Managing connection properties
            Persistent search
            Enabling event notification
            Specifying transaction settings
            Changing the port or IP address
            Specifying a server for directory referrals
            Adding and removing Directory Server suffixes
            Granting administrator access to projected users
            Enabling language tags
            Tracking access and changes to the LDAP directory
            Enabling object auditing for the Directory Server
            Adjusting search settings
            Enabling or disabling read access to projected users
            Publishing information to the Directory Server
            Importing an LDIF file
            Exporting an LDIF file
            Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
            Managing instances
          Administrative group tasks
            Enabling the administrative group
            Adding, editing, and removing administrative group members
          Back-end servers setup tasks
            Creating a user entry for membership in the global administration group
            Adding the user entry to the global administration group
          Search limit group tasks
            Creating a search limit group
            Changing a search limit group
            Copying a search limit group
            Removing a search limit group
          Proxy authorization group tasks
            Creating a proxy authorization group
            Changing a proxy authorization group
            Copying a proxy authorization group
            Removing a proxy authorization group
          Unique attribute tasks
            Determining if an attribute can be specified as unique
            Creating a unique attributes list
            Removing an entry from the unique attributes list
          Performance tasks
            Setting database connections and cache settings
            Configuring attribute cache
            Configure group members' cache
            Configuring transaction settings
          Replication tasks
            Creating a master-replica topology
            Creating a master-forwarder-replica topology
            Creating a master server (replicated subtree)
            Creating a new replica server
            Creating replication credentials
            Creating a replica server
            Coping data to the replica
            Adding supplier information to the new replica
            Creating a simple topology with peer replication
            Creating a complex replication topology
            Creating a complex topology with peer replication
            Promoting a server to be a peer
            Setting up a gateway topology
            Setting up a Partial Replication
            Changing replication properties
            Adding supplier information
            Editing supplier information
            Removing supplier information
            Creating replication schedules
            Creating a daily replication schedule
            Managing replication queues
            Modifying lost and found log settings
            Viewing the lost and found log file
            Setting up replication over a secure connection
          Replication topology tasks
            Viewing the topology
            Adding a replica
            Adding a peer-master or gateway server
            Managing gateway servers
            Viewing server information
            Viewing replication schedule
            Editing an agreement
            Moving or promoting a server
            Demoting a master
            Replicating a subtree
            Editing a subtree
            Removing a subtree
            Quiescing the subtree
            Editing access control lists
          Security property tasks
            Password tasks
              Setting password policy properties
              Setting the administration password and lockout policy
              Setting password lockout properties
              Setting password validation properties
              Viewing password policy attributes
              Overriding password policy attributes
            Enabling SSL and Transport Layer Security on the Directory Server
            Enabling Kerberos authentication on the Directory Server
            Configuring DIGEST-MD5 authentication on the Directory Server
            Configuring Pass-through authentication on the Directory Server
          Schema tasks
            Viewing object classes
            Adding an object class
            Editing an object class
            Copying an object class
            Deleting an object class
            Viewing attributes
            Adding an attribute
            Editing an attribute
            Copying an attribute
            Deleting an attribute
            Encrypting an Attributes
            Copying the schema to other servers
          Directory entry tasks
            Browsing the directory tree
            Adding an entry
            Adding an entry containing attributes with language tags
            Deleteing an entry
            Editing an entry
            Copying an entry
            Editing access control lists
            Adding an auxiliary object class
            Deleting an auxiliary class
            Changing group membership
            Searching the directory entries
            Changing binary attributes
          User and group tasks
            User tasks
              Adding users
              Finding users within the realm
              Editing a user's information
              Copying a user
              Removing a user
            Group tasks
              Adding groups
              Finding groups within the realm
              Editing a group's information
              Copying a group
              Removing a group
          Realm and user template tasks
            Creating a realm
            Creating a realm administrator
            Creating a template
            Adding the template to a realm
            Creating groups
            Adding a user to the realm
            Realm tasks
              Adding a realm
              Editing a realm
              Removing a realm
              Editing ACLs on the realm
            Template tasks
              Adding a user template
              Editing a template
              Removing a template
              Editing ACLs on the template
          Access control list (ACL) tasks
            Viewing access rights for a specific effective ACL
            Viewing effective owners
            Adding , editing. and removing nonfiltered ACLs
            Adding , editing. and removing filtered ACLs
            Adding or removing owners
        Reference
          Command line utilities
            ldapmodify and ldapadd
            ldapdelete
            ldapexop
            ldapmodrdn
            ldapsearch
            ldapchangepwd
            ldapcompare
            ldapdiff
            Using SSL with the LDAP command line utilities
          LDAP data interchange format (LDIF)
            RFC 2849 LDIF input
              LDIF style examples
            Modify style LDIF Input
              Modify style examples
          Directory Server configuration schema
            Directory information tree
            Attributes
          Object identifiers (OIDs)
          IBM Tivoli Directory Server equivalence
          Default configuration for Directory Server
        Troubleshooting Directory Server
          Monitoring errors and access with the Directory Server job log
          Using TRCTCPAPP to help find problems
          Using the LDAP_OPT_DEBUG option to trace errors
          GLEnnnn message identifiers
          Common LDAP client errors
            ldap_bind: Inappropriate authentication
            ldap_bind: No such object
            ldap_search: Timelimit exceeded
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Cannot contact LDAP server
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Failed to connect to SSL server
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Insufficient access
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Operations error
          Password policy-related errors
          Troubleshooting the QGLDCPYVL API
        Related information
      Domain Name System
        PDF file for Domain Name System
        DNS concepts
          Understanding zones
          Understanding DNS queries
          DNS domain setup
          Dynamic updates
          BIND 9 features
          DNS resource records
          Mail and MX records
        Examples: DNS
          Example: Single DNS server for an intranet
          Example: Single DNS server with Internet access
          Example: DNS and DHCP on the same System i
          Example: Splitting DNS over firewall by setting up two DNS servers on the same System i
          Example: Splitting DNS over firewall by using view
        Planning for DNS
          Determining DNS authorities
          Determining domain structure
          Planning security measures
        DNS requirements
          Determining if DNS is installed
          Installing DNS
        Configuring DNS
          Accessing DNS in System i Navigator
          Configuring name servers
            Creating a name server instance
            Editing DNS server properties
            Configuring zones on a name server
            Configuring views on a name server
          Configuring DNS to receive dynamic updates
          Importing DNS files
            Record validation
          Accessing external DNS data
        Managing DNS
          Verifying the DNS function is working
          Managing security keys
            Managing DNS keys
            Managing dynamic update keys
          Accessing DNS server statistics
            Accessing server statistics
            Accessing an active server database
          Maintaining DNS configuration files
          Advanced DNS features
            Starting or stopping DNS servers
            Changing debug values
        Troubleshooting DNS
          Logging DNS server messages
          Changing DNS debug settings
        Related information for DNS
      E-mail
        PDF file for E-mail
        E-mail concepts
          SMTP on i5/OS
          POP on i5/OS
        Scenarios: E-mail
          Scenario: Sending and receiving e-mail locally
          Scenario: Configuring the QtmsCreateSendEmail API to use S/MIME
        Planning for e-mail
          Controlling e-mail access
            Controlling SMTP access
            Controlling POP access
          Preventing e-mail access
            Preventing SMTP access
              Preventing SMTP from starting when TCP/IP starts
              Preventing access to SMTP ports
              Holding SNADS queues
            Preventing POP access
              Preventing POP from starting when TCP/IP starts
              Preventing access to POP ports
        Configuring e-mail
          Accessing e-mail servers with System i Navigator
          Configuring TCP/IP for e-mail
          Configuring SMTP and POP servers for e-mail
            Configuring the SMTP server
              Enabling SSL between the SMTP server and client on the receiver system
              Enabling SSL between the SMTP server and client on the sender system
              Installing the receiver certificate authority on the sender system
            Configuring the POP server
              Associating a certificate with the Post Office Protocol server
          Enrolling e-mail users
          Starting and stopping e-mail servers
            Starting the e-mail servers
            Stopping the e-mail servers
          Configuring a dial-up mail connection profile
          Configuring the ISP Dial-up Connection wizard
          Scheduling batch ISP e-mail jobs
          Configuring the SMTP server for dial-up mail retrieval
          Supporting multiple domains
        Securing e-mail
          Sending e-mail through a router or firewall
            Prerequisites for an e-mail router
          Authenticating e-mail for local and relay
            Tracking the e-mail sender
          Restricting the relay of messages
            Accepting relay messages from POP clients
            Using relay restriction and connection restriction functions together
          Restricting connections
          Filtering e-mail to prevent virus proliferation
        Sending and receiving e-mail
          Setting up POP e-mail clients
          JavaMail
          Sending spooled files as PDF files
          Using LDAP for addresses
          Using SNADS to send e-mail
            Setting up headers to differentiate between recipients
            Supporting Internet addressing for the SNDDST command
            Attaching files
          Using SNADS to receive e-mail
        Managing e-mail
          Checking e-mail servers
          Removing POP e-mail users
          Preventing large e-mail messages from splitting
          Receiving delivery status of e-mail
          Hosting a Domino and SMTP server on the same system
          Hosting Domino LDAP and Directory Server on the same system
          Managing SMTP server performance
            Changing values for the SMTP server
            Changing values for the SMTP client
            Selecting a new subsystem for SMTP server jobs
        Reference information
          Mail server journal entries
          SMTP
          POP
        Troubleshooting e-mail
          Determining problems with e-mail
          Checking component journals
          Tracking undelivered e-mail
          Solving problems with the QtmmSendMail API
            Checking the API call
            Checking the MIME file
            Checking mail server framework jobs
        Related information for E-mail
      FTP
        PDF file for File Transfer Protocol
        Scenarios: FTP
          Scenario: Transferring a file from a remote host
          Scenario: Securing FTP with SSL
            Configuration details
              Creating and operating a local CA on the MyCo system
              i5/OS FTP: Enabling SSL for MyCo's FTP server
              Exporting a copy of MyCo's local CA certificate to a file
              Creating an *SYSTEM certificate store on TheirCo's system
              Importing MyCo's local CA certificate into TheirCo's *SYSTEM certificate store
              Specifying MyCo's local CA as a trusted CA for TheirCo's FTP client
        Configuring the FTP server on i5/OS
          Configuring FTP server in System i Navigator
          Configuring FTP servers for graphical FTP clients and Web tools
            File and directory entries in i5/OS format
            File and directory entries in UNIX-style format
          Configuring anonymous FTP
            Preparing for anonymous FTP
            Writing exit programs for anonymous FTP
            Creating an i5/OS user profile: ANONYMOUS
            Creating a public library or directory
            Installing and registering exit programs
              Installing exit programs
              Registering exit programs
        Securing FTP on i5/OS
          Preventing FTP server access on i5/OS
            Preventing the FTP server from starting automatically on i5/OS
            Preventing access to FTP ports on i5/OS
          Controlling FTP access on i5/OS
          Using SSL to secure the FTP server on i5/OS
            Creating a local CA on i5/OS
            Associating a certificate with the FTP server on i5/OS
            Requiring client authentication for the FTP server
            Enabling SSL on the FTP server
          Securing FTP clients with TLS or SSL
          Managing access using FTP exit programs
          Managing access using System i Navigator
          Monitoring incoming FTP users
        Managing the FTP server
          Starting and stopping the FTP server
          Setting the number of available FTP servers
          Improving FTP server performance with configurable subsystem support
        Using the FTP client on the System i platform
          Starting and stopping a client session
          Server timeout considerations
          Transferring files with FTP
          Running FTP in unattended mode using a batch job on i5/OS
            Simple example: Batch FTP
            Complex example: Batch FTP
              Example: Creating a CL program to start FTP
              Example: Creating the FTP input file (FTCPDMS)
              Example: CL program for submitting the FTPBATCH job
              Example: Checking the FTP output file for errors
            Example: Network description for batch FTP
        FTP reference information
          FTP server subcommands on i5/OS
          FTP client subcommands on i5/OS
          FTP exit programs
            Request validation exit point: client and server
              Example: FTP client or server Request Validation exit program in CL code
              Example: FTP Server Request Validation exit program in ILE RPG code
              VLRQ0100 exit point format
                VLRQ0100 exit point format usage notes
            FTP server logon exit point
              Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in CL code
              Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in C code
              Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in ILE RPG code
              TCPL0100 exit point format
                TCPL0100 format usage notes
              TCPL0200 exit point format
              TCPL0300 exit point format
            Removing exit programs
          Data transfer methods
            Transferring files that contain packed decimal data between System i platforms
            Transferring *SAVF files
            Transferring QDLS documents
            Transferring root, QOpenSys, QDLS, and QOPT files
            Transferring files using QfileSvr.400
            Transferring QSYS.LIB files
              Receiving text files to QSYS.LIB
            Considerations for creating files before transferring them into QSYS.LIB
            CCSID conversions
              Specifying mapping tables
              CCSID code page tagging for i5/OS files
              NLS considerations for FTP
          File systems and naming conventions
          i5/OS file systems that are supported by FTP
          Status messages from the FTP server
          FTP server syntax conventions
          FTP client syntax conventions
            Enclosing subcommand parameters
            File names for client-transfer subcommands
            Naming files for transfer
        Troubleshooting File Transfer Protocol
          Determining problems with FTP
          Materials required for reporting FTP problems
          Tracing the FTP server
          Tracing the FTP client
          Working with FTP server jobs and job log
      IP filtering and network address translation
      i5/OS NetServer
        PDF file for i5/OS NetServer
        i5/OS NetServer versus IBM i Access for Windows
          Installing IBM i Access for Windows on Windows PCs
            Installing IBM i Access for Windows on Windows 2000
            Installing IBM i Access for Windows on Windows XP
            Installing IBM i Access for Windows on Windows Server 2003
            Installing IBM i Access for Windows on Windows Vista
        Accessing i5/OS NetServer with Linux and Samba client support
        Getting started
          Requirements
          Configuring i5/OS for NetServer
          Configuring and connecting your PC client
            i5/OS NetServer User Datagram Protocol broadcasts
            i5/OS NetServer and Domain Name System management
              Connecting your PC client with DNS
              Configuring your PC client with DNS
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows 2000
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows XP
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows Server 2003
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows Vista
            i5/OS NetServer and Windows Internet Naming Service management
              Connecting your PC client with WINS
              Configuring your PC client with WINS
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows 2000
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows XP
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows Server 2003
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows Vista
              Configuring i5/OS NetServer with the address of the network WINS server
            PC client LMHOSTS static configuration files
          Finding i5/OS NetServer on the network
        Administering i5/OS NetServer
          Viewing and configuring i5/OS NetServer properties
          Enabling i5/OS NetServer support for Kerberos V5 authentication
            Installing System i Navigator Security option
            Starting i5/OS NetServer Configuration wizard
            Additional configuration requirements for Kerberos V5 authentication enablement
          Changing the i5/OS NetServer server name
          Disabled user profiles
            Displaying disabled user profiles
            Enabling a disabled user profile
          Starting and stopping i5/OS NetServer
          Administering subsystems for i5/OS NetServer
          Setting the guest user profile for i5/OS NetServer
          Viewing i5/OS NetServer status
          Viewing a list of i5/OS NetServer shared objects
            Viewing a list of i5/OS NetServer shared objects using System i Navigator
            Viewing a list of i5/OS NetServer shared objects using Windows clients
          Viewing and configuring i5/OS NetServer shared object properties
          Viewing shared object status
          Viewing a list of i5/OS NetServer sessions
          Viewing i5/OS NetServer session properties
          Viewing i5/OS NetServer session connection status
          Stopping an i5/OS NetServer session
        File shares
          Creating i5/OS NetServer file shares
          Controlling access to i5/OS NetServer file shares
          Stopping i5/OS NetServer file sharing
          Accessing file shares from a Windows client
        Print shares
          Creating a print share
          PC client print device drivers for use with print shares
          Stopping print sharing
          Using print shares with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista client
        Domain logon support
          i5/OS NetServer and client PC configuration
          Logon server setup
          Logon server home directories
          Roaming profiles
            Configuring user profiles from Windows 2000 and Windows XP clients
            Mandatory profiles
            Roaming profile problems
          Logon scripts
          Policy serving
          Browsing support
          Tips and techniques
          Troubleshooting the logon server
        i5/OS NetServer security
          User profile authority requirements
          Guest user profiles
          Hiding i5/OS NetServer from the network
          Requiring clients to sign requests
        Using Windows messenger service with i5/OS NetServer
          Configuring the clients
            Configuring clients on Windows 2000 and Windows XP
            Configuring clients on Windows Server 2003
            Configuring clients on Linux
          Enabling i5/OS NetServer for messaging specific to Windows
          Associated i5/OS messages
          Displaying a log of the message send attempts
          Sending custom messages through i5/OS NetServer
        Tips and techniques
          i5/OS NetServer does not appear in Windows My Network Places
          i5/OS NetServer fails to start
          Starting i5/OS NetServer at initial program load
          i5/OS NetServer security: Guest versus nonguest
        API guides
        Backup and recovery of configuration and share information
        Troubleshooting i5/OS NetServer
          Troubleshooting user profile connections
          Troubleshooting file share directory paths
          Troubleshooting print share problems
          Troubleshooting print problems when using guest support
          Troubleshooting PC client connection problems
          Troubleshooting file share problems
          Troubleshooting print device driver problems
          Troubleshooting i5/OS NetServer using the QSYSOPR message queue
          Troubleshooting i5/OS NetServer location on the network
          Troubleshooting i5/OS NetServer using Windows messenger service
      OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng support
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng support
        OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng concepts
          RIP interfaces
          Point-to-point links for RIP
          Send only
          Default routes
          RIP accepted routes
          RIP filters
          Ignored RIP neighbors
        OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng support tasks
          Enabling TCP/IP for RIP and RIPng on i5/OS
          Configuring i5/OS for RIP and RIPng networking
        OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng commands
      Open Shortest Path First support
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for Open Shortest Path First support
        Open Shortest Path First support concepts
          OSPF routing domain and areas
          OSPF area aggregation
          Link-state advertisements
          Aging of link-state records
          Packet types for OSPF
          OSPF for IPv6
          OSPF interfaces
          Point-to-point links for OSPF
          i5/OS OSPF Authentication
          Enabling of i5/OS OSPF job tracing
        Open Shortest Path First support tasks
          Configuring i5/OS for OSPF networking
          Enabling TCP/IP for OSPF on i5/OS
        Open Shortest Path First support reference
          Open Shortest Path First API and commands
          Scenarios: Configuring OSPF
            Scenario: Configuring OSPF interfaces and neighbors
            Scenario: OSPF multipath routes
            Scenario: Retrieve OSPF State Information API
      IBM HTTP Server for i
      Quality of service
        PDF file for Quality of service
        Concepts
          Differentiated service
            Prioritized classes: How to classify network traffic
            Setting priorities: How to handle the classes
            Traffic conditioners
          Integrated service
            Traffic control functions
            Integrated service types
            Token bucket and bandwidth limits
            Integrated service using differentiated service markings
          Inbound admission policy
          Class of service
            Using codepoints to assign per-hop behaviors
            Average connection rate and burst limits
          Quality of service APIs
            QoS API connection-oriented functional flow
            QoS API connectionless functional flow
            QoS sendmsg() API extensions
          Directory server
            Keywords
            Distinguished name
        Scenarios: Quality of service policies
          Scenario: Limiting browser traffic
            Scenario details: Creating the differentiated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Secure and predictable results (VPN and QoS)
            Scenario details: Setting up a host-to-host VPN connection
            Scenario details: Creating the differentiated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Limiting inbound connections
            Scenario details: Creating the inbound admission policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying your policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Predictable B2B traffic
            Scenario details: Creating the integrated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Dedicated delivery (IP telephony)
            Scenario details: Creating the integrated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Monitoring current network statistics
            Scenario details: Opening QoS within System i Navigator
            Scenario details: Creating a differentiated service policy
            Scenario details: Completing a new class of service
            Scenario details: Monitoring your policy
            Scenario details: Changing values
            Scenario details: Monitoring the policy again
        Planning for quality of service
          Quality of service planning advisor
          Authority requirements
          System requirements
          Service level agreement
          Network hardware and software
        Configuring quality of service
          Configuring QoS with wizards
          Configuring directory server
          Ordering QoS policies
        Managing quality of service
          Accessing QoS help in System i Navigator
          Backing up QoS policies
          Copying an existing policy
          Editing QoS policies
          Monitoring QoS
        Troubleshooting quality of service
          Journaling QoS policies
            Viewing the journal entries on the monitor
            Viewing the journal entries through the output file
          Logging QoS server jobs
          Monitoring system transactions
          Trace TCP applications
            Examples: Reading the trace output
        Related information for Quality of service
      Remote Access Services
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for Remote Access Services
        PPP concepts
          What is PPP
          Connection profiles
          Group policy support
        Scenarios: Remote access using PPP connections
          Scenario: PPP and DHCP on a single System i
          Scenario: DHCP and PPP profile on different System i models
          Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
          Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
            Configuring VPN on System A
            Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System A
            Applying the l2tptocorp dynamic-key group to the toCorp PPP profile
            Configuring VPN on System B
            Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System B
            Activating packet rules
          Scenario: Connecting your system to a PPPoE access concentrator
          Scenario: Connecting remote dial-in clients to your system
          Scenario: Connecting your office LAN to the Internet with a modem
          Scenario: Connecting your corporate and remote networks with a modem
          Scenario: Authenticating dial-up connections with RADIUS NAS
          Scenario: Managing remote user access to resources using group policies and IP filtering
          Scenario: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
            Scenario details: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
              Step 1: Configuring the L2TP terminator profile for any interface on the partition that owns the modems
              Step 2: Configuring an L2TP originator profile on 10.1.1.74
              Step 3: Configuring an L2TP remote dial profile for 192.168.1.2
              Step 4: Testing the connection
        Planning PPP
          Software and hardware requirements
          Connection alternatives
            Analog telephone lines
            Digital service and Digital Data Services
            Switched-56
            Integrated Services Digital Network
            T1/E1 and fractional T1 connections
            Frame relay
            L2TP (tunneling) support for PPP connections
              Voluntary tunnel
              Compulsory tunnel model - incoming call
              Compulsory tunnel model - remote dial
              L2TP multi-hop connection
            PPPoE (DSL) support for PPP connections
          Connection equipment
            Modems
            CSU/DSU
            ISDN terminal adapters
              ISDN terminal adapter suggestions
              ISDN terminal adapter restrictions
          IP address handling
            IP packet filtering
            IP address management strategy
          System authentication
            Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol with MD5
            Extensible Authentication Protocol
            Password Authentication Protocol
            Remote Authentication Dial In User Service overview
            Validation list
          Bandwidth considerations for multilink
        Configuring PPP
          Creating a connection profile
            Protocol type: PPP or Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)
            Mode selections
              Switched line
              Leased line
              L2TP (virtual line)
              PPPoE line
            Link configuration
              Single line
              Line pool
              Multiple-connection profile support
                Remote IP address pools
          Configuring your modem for PPP
            Configuring a new modem
            Setting modem command strings
            Example: Configuring an ISDN terminal adapter
            Associating a modem with a line description
          Configuring a remote PC
          Configuring Internet access through the AT&T Global Network
          Connection wizards
          Configuring a group access policy
          Applying IP packet filtering rules to a PPP connection
          Enabling RADIUS and DHCP services for connection profiles
        Managing PPP
          Setting properties for PPP connection profiles
          Monitoring PPP activity
        Troubleshooting PPP
        Related information for Remote Access Services
      REXEC
        PDF file for REXEC
        Changing attributes
        REXEC command considerations
        Selecting a command processor
        REXEC connection usage
          For i5/OS CL command processing
          For Qshell and spawned path command processing
        Spooled output considerations
        Client considerations
        REXEC server jobs and job names
        Creating REXEC server spooled job logs
        Exit points for controlling REXEC server
          Request validation exit point
            VLRQ0100 exit point format
          Server logon exit point
            TCPL0100 exit point format
            TCPL0300 exit point format
          Server command processing selection exit point
            RXCS0100 exit point format
        Determining problems with REXEC
          Materials required for reporting REXEC problems
          Getting a copy of a REXEC server job log
          Tracing the REXEC server
      RouteD
        PDF file for RouteD
        RouteD configuration commands
        RouteD attribute commands
        Work with RouteD Configuration command
        Scenario: RouteD configuration
        RIP_INTERFACE statement
          Supply values
          DIST_ROUTES_IN
          Metric
          Community
          Additional parameters
            BLOCK
            FORWARD
            FORWARD.COND
            NOFORWARD
      Simple Network Time Protocol
        PDF file for Simple Network Time Protocol
        SNTP concepts
          SNTP client
          SNTP server
        Scenario: Synchronizing clocks with i5/OS
          Configuring System A as an SNTP client and server
          Configuring your firewall to allow SNTP traffic
          Configuring the SNTP client on other systems in the network
          Specifying SNTP as your time maintenance application
          Starting SNTP manually
        Configuring SNTP
        Troubleshooting SNTP
          Logging SNTP activity
      TCP/IP routing and workload balancing
        PDF file for TCP/IP routing and workload balancing
        TCP/IP routing functions by release
        Packet processing
        General routing rules
        Routing connectivity methods
          Routing with point-to-point connections
          Proxy Address Resolution Protocol routing
            Transparent subnets
          Dynamic routing
            Routing Information Protocol
            Open Shortest Path First
          Route binding
          Classless Inter-Domain Routing
          Routing with virtual IP
          Fault tolerance
          Routing with network address translation
            Masquerade NAT
              Inbound masquerade NAT processing (response and other)
              Outbound masquerade NAT processing
            Dynamic NAT
            Static NAT
          Routing with OptiConnect and logical partitions
            TCP/IP and OptiConnect
            Routing with virtual OptiConnect and logical partitions
        TCP/IP workload balancing methods
          DNS-based load balancing
          Duplicate route-based load balancing
          Load balancing using virtual IP and proxy ARP
        Scenario: Adapter failover using virtual IP and proxy ARP
          Failover using automatic interface selection
          Failover using a preferred interface list
        Related information for TCP/IP routing and workload balancing
      TCP/IP subnet calculator advisor
      Telnet
        PDF file for Telnet
        Telnet scenarios
          Telnet scenario: Telnet server configuration
          Telnet scenario: Cascaded Telnet sessions
            System request processing scenarios
            Using a group job
          Telnet scenario: Securing Telnet with SSL
            Configuration details for securing Telnet with SSL
        Planning for the Telnet server
          Virtual device descriptions
          Telnet security
            Preventing Telnet access
            Controlling Telnet access
        Configuring the Telnet server
          Starting the Telnet server
          Setting the number of virtual devices
            Automatically configuring virtual devices
            Creating your own virtual devices
          Restricting privileged users to specific devices and limiting sign-on attempts
          Setting the session keep-alive parameter
          Assigning devices to subsystems
          Activating the QSYSWRK subsystem
          Creating user profiles
          IBM i supported emulation types
            Configuring Telnet server for 5250 full-screen mode
            Configuring Telnet server for 3270 full-screen mode
              Supported 3270 terminal types
            Configuring Telnet server for VTxxx full-screen mode
          Securing Telnet with SSL
            Configuring SSL on the Telnet server
              Removing port restrictions
              Assigning a certificate to the Telnet server
              Enabling client authentication for the Telnet server
                Example: Enabling client authentication for a PC5250 session
              Enabling SSL on the Telnet server
            SSL initialization and handshake
        Managing the Telnet server
          Configuring Telnet printer sessions
            Requirements for Telnet printer sessions
              Telnet server print support to IBM i Access for Windows Telnet client
          Ending the Telnet server session
          Ending device manager jobs
          Using Telnet exit point programs
            Device initialization exit program
              Telnet exit point format INIT0100: Required parameter group
              INIT0100: Format of user description information
              INIT0100: Format of device description information
              INIT0100: Format of connection description information
            Device termination exit program
            Examples: Telnet exit programs
        Managing the Telnet client
          Controlling Telnet server functions from the client
          5250 Telnet client sessions
            Starting a Telnet client session
          3270 Telnet client sessions
            Starting a 3270 Telnet client session
            3270 full-screen considerations
            Using a display station
            3270 keyboard mapping for Telnet servers
          VTxxx Telnet client sessions
            Starting a VTxxx Telnet client session
            VTxxx full screen considerations
            VTxxx emulation options
            VTxxx key values
              VTxxx national language support
              VTxxx national mode
              Numeric keypad
              Editing keypad
              VTxxx key values by 5250 function
              VT220 workstation operating modes
              VT220 top-row function keys
              VT100 and VT220 control character keywords
          Establishing a cascaded Telnet session
            Moving between cascaded Telnet sessions
          Ending a Telnet client session
        Troubleshooting the Telnet problems
          Determining problems with Telnet
            Pinging your host server
          Troubleshooting emulation types
          Troubleshooting your Telnet SSL server
            Checking system status
            Checking for an active SSL listener
            Checking the Telnet job log
            SSL return codes
          TRCTCPAPP service program outputs
          Materials needed to report Telnet problems
          Automatically generated diagnostic information
        Related information for Telnet
      Trivial File Transfer Protocol
        PDF file for Trivial File Transfer Protocol
        Configuring TFTP for clients
        Changing TFTP attributes
        Server ports and client ports
        TFTP Transfer Size option
        TFTP Subnet Broadcast option
          Client-to-server TFTP Read Request options
          Server-to-client TFTP option acknowledgment
          Server-to-client broadcast data packets
        Exit points for controlling TFTP server
      User-defined servers
      Virtual Private Networking
      Related information
    TCP/IP troubleshooting
      PDF file for TCP/IP troubleshooting
      TCP/IP troubleshooter
      Troubleshooting tools and techniques
        Tools to verify your network structure
          Netstat
            Using Netstat from a character-based interface
              Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Interfaces
              Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Routes
              Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Connections
            Using Netstat from System i Navigator
              Using Netstat from System i Navigator: Interfaces
              Using Netstat from System i Navigator: Routes
              Using Netstat from System i Navigator: Connections
          Ping
            Using Ping from a character-based interface
              Pinging the loopback interface on your system
              Pinging your own system
              Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
            Using Ping from System i Navigator
              Pinging the loopback interface on your system
              Pinging your own system
              Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
            Common error messages
            PING parameters
          Trace route
            Using trace route from a character-based interface
            Using trace route from System i Navigator
        Tools for tracing data and jobs
          Communications trace
            Planning a communications trace
            Performing a communications trace
              Starting a communications trace
              Ending a communications trace
              Dumping a communications trace
              Printing a communications trace
              Viewing the contents of a communications trace
              Reading a communications trace
              Deleting a communications trace
            Tools for analyzing a communication trace
              Installing the Communication Trace Analyzer
              Starting the Communications Trace Analyzer
            Additional communications trace functions
              Checking a communications trace
              Programmatically checking storage space
          Trace connection
          Trace TCP/IP application
          Job trace
            Starting a job trace
            Re-creating the problem
            Ending a job trace
            Printing a job trace
            Deleting a job trace
            Advanced job trace functions
              Multiple generic traces
              Trace type information is cumulative
          Advanced trace function: Watch support
            Scenarios: Using watch support with traces
              Scenario: Using watch support with a communications trace
              Scenario: Using watch support with a job trace
            Watch parameters
            Using watch exit programs
              Example: Watch exit program
              Example: Modifying the exit program
            Traces that use watch support
        Troubleshooting tips
          Server table
          Checking jobs, job logs, and message logs
            Verifying that necessary jobs exist
              Verifying jobs from a character-based interface
              Verifying jobs from System i Navigator
            Checking the job logs for error messages and other indication of problems
              Checking job logs using the character-based interface
              Checking job logs using System i Navigator
            Changing the message logging level on job descriptions and active jobs
              Changing the message logging level from the character-based interface
              Changing the message logging level from System i Navigator
            Other job considerations
          Checking for active filter rules
          Verifying system startup considerations for networking
            Starting subsystems
            Starting TCP/IP
              Starting TCP/IP using the character-based interface
              Ending TCP/IP using System i Navigator
            Starting interfaces
            Starting servers
              Starting servers from a character-based interface
              Starting servers from System i Navigator
            Timing considerations
          Varying on lines, controllers, and devices
          Verifying the logical partition configuration
            Verifying the LPAR configuration from a character-based interface
            Verifying the LPAR configuration from System i Navigator
          Troubleshooting IPv6–related problems
        Advanced troubleshooting tools
          Licensed Internal Code logs
          Trace Internal (TRCINT) command
          Product activity log
          IOP dump
          Process dump
            Call stack dump
            Full job dump
      Troubleshooting problems related to specific applications
  Printing
    Basic printing
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for Basic printing
      Printing concepts
        Overview
        Printer file
          Printer file overview
          Printer file overrides
        Spooled files and output queues
          Spooling overview
          Spooled file
          Output queue
          Multiple output queues
          Output queue recovery
          Spooled file cleanup
          Default output queues
          Order of spooled files on an output queue
          Data queue support
            Record type 01 data queue entry format
            Record type 02 data queue entry format
            Record type 03 data queue entry format
          Spooled file names
          Spooled file security
          Output queue security
          QPRTJOB job
          Spooled file subsystem
          Spooled file library
          Spooled files in independent ASPs
        Printer writer program
        Printer data streams
          SNA character string
          Advanced Function Presentation data stream
          Intelligent Printer Data Stream
          American National Standard Code for Information Interchange
        Printer device description
        Job description
        Workstation description
        User profile
        System values
        Controlling printing to output queue or printer
          Routing process order
          Routing examples
            Example 1: Determining your output queue
            Example 2: Determining your output queue
            Example 3: Determining your output queue
            Example 4: Determining your output queue
            Example 5: Determining your output queue
            Example 6: Determining your output queue
            Example 7: Determining your output queue
            Example 8: Determining your printer name
            Example 9: Determining your printer name
            Example 10: Determining your printer name when using batch
            Example 11: Determining your printer name when using batch
            Example 12: Determining your printer name when using batch
            Self-test: Determining output queue and printer device
            Self-test answers
        Printer attachment methods
          TCP/IP-network-attached printers
            Intelligent Printer Data Stream with Print Services Facility
            Simple Network Management Protocol
            Printer Job Language
            Internet Printing Protocol
            Line printer requester/line printer daemon
          PC-attached printers
          Twinaxial-workstation-controller-attached printers
          ASCII-workstation-controller-attached printers
          Lexlink-network-attached printers
          Printers attached to IBM InfoWindow 3477, 3486, 3487, and 3488 display stations
        Remote system printing
          Benefits
          How remote system printing works
          User print information
          Send and defer status
        Fonts
          TrueType and OpenType fonts
          AFP compatibility fonts
            Font character sets
            Font global identifiers
            Code pages
            Stand-alone code pages
            Character set and code page combinations
            Coded fonts
        Double-byte character set support
          Special DBCS printer functions
            Character rotation
            Character expansion
            Condensed printing
            Horizontal and vertical lines
            Shift-control character printing
          Double-byte character printing considerations
            Extended character printing
            Condensed printing
            Page width
            Unprintable double-byte characters
            Double-byte data in an alphanumeric field
            Spanned lines
            Spanned pages
            Print key use
            5553 printer end-of-forms
            Double-byte data printed on alphanumeric printers
          DBCS spooled support
          3130 printer resident font support
        Internet Printing Protocol server
        Network print server
          Network print server objects
          How the network print server is accessed
          Exit points and the network print server
            Exit point QIBM_QNPS_ENTRY
            Exit point QIBM_QNPS_SPLF
          Use of network print server exit points
        Communications network printing functions
          3270 printer emulation
          Remote job entry printing
          3x74-attached printers
          Distributed data management printing
          Object distribution printing
        Host print transform
          Host print transform advantages
          How the host print transform function works
          AFP-to-ASCII transform function
          Host print transform in raster mode
          Host print transform and emulator products
        Image print transform
          Image print transform overview
          Image print transform advantages
          Image configuration objects
          Convert Image API
          Conversion of PostScript data streams with image print transform
          Page size
        Additional printing considerations
          Direct print considerations
          Open considerations
          Output considerations
          Close considerations
          First-character forms-control data considerations
          Printer font considerations
          Alternative character sets and code pages for printer output considerations
          Output field considerations
          Externally described printer-file record-format considerations
          Redirecting output considerations
          3812 and 3816 SCS printer considerations
          3835 printer considerations
          3912, 3916, and 4028 printer considerations
          Special printer file considerations for AFP data stream
          Special data description specifications considerations for AFP data stream
          Performance considerations
      Planning printing
      Configuring printing
        Automatically creating printer device descriptions
        Adding a printer with System i Navigator
        Configuring PJL printers
        Configuring SNMP printers
        Configuring LPR/LPD
        Configuring IPP printers
          Setting up validation lists for the IPP print driver
        Setting up the IPP server
          Verifying IPP server prerequisite programs
          Configuring your Web browser
          Starting the administrator interface
          Configuring an IPP server
          Configuring an IPP printer
          Configuring an IPP client
        Configuring Lexlink printers
        Configuring remote system printing
          i5/OS to i5/OS for remote system printing
          i5/OS to VM/MVS for remote system printing
        Configuring host print transform
          Customizing ASCII printers that use the host print transform function
            Preparing to customize an ASCII printer
              Gathering source materials
              Completing printer setup
              Planning the customization schedule
              Customizing unsupported ASCII printers
            Retrieving the workstation customization source
              Understanding the transform table
              Choosing the customizing source
            Customizing WSCST object of *TRANSFORM transform type
              Changing the source
                Transform Table (TRNSFRMTBL) tag
                Using the tags
                Programming considerations
              Customizing printer information
                Printer Data Stream (PRTDTASTRM) tag
                Raster Mode (RASTERMODE) tag
                No-print Border (NOPRTBDR) tag
                Drawer Page Size
                  Drawer Page Size (DWRPAGSIZ) tag
                  Drawer Page Size Entry (DWRPAGSIZE) tag
                  End Drawer Page Size (EDWRPAGSIZ) tag
              Customizing printer controls
                Bell (BELL) tag
                Carrier Return (CARRTN) tag
                Initialize Printer (INITPRT) tag
                Reset Printer (RESETPRT) tag
                Raster Graphics End (RASEND) tag
                Print All Characters (PRTALLCHR) tag
                Print Next Character (PRTNXTCHR) tag
              Customizing print media size
                Envelope size
                Paper size
                Page length
                  Page Length in Inches (PAGLENI) tag
                  Page Length in Lines (PAGLENL) tag
                Printable area
                  Text Length in Lines (TEXTLENL) tag
                  Top Margin in Inches (TOPMARGINI) tag
              Customizing highlighting
                Bold
                Underscore
              Customizing horizontal movement
                Backspace (BSP) tag
                Characters per inch
                  Characters per Inch in Normal Print Mode (CPI) tag
                  Characters per Inch in COR Mode (CPICOR) tag
                Horizontal Absolute Movement (HORAMOV) tag
                Horizontal Relative Movement (HORRMOV) tag
                Proportional spacing
                Space (SPACE) tag
              Customizing vertical movement
                Form Feed (FORMFEED) tag
                Half-Line Feed (HLFLINEFEED) tag
                Line Feed (LINEFEED) tag
                Vertical Absolute Movement (VERAMOV) tag
                Vertical Relative Movement (VERRMOV) tag
                Reverse Half-Line Feed (RVSHLFLINEFEED) tag
                Reverse Line Feed (RVSLINEFEED) tag
                Vertical line spacing
                  Lines per Inch (LPI) tag
                  Variable Line Spacing (VARLSPC) tag
              Customizing indexing
                Subscript
                Superscript
              Customizing color
              Customizing paper input
                Paper Drawer Selection (DWRSLT) tag
                Selecting Paper Drawer Number (DWRNBR) tag
                Additional paper drawer selection
                  Additional Drawer Selection (ADDDRWTBL) tag
                  Additional Paper Drawer Selection Entry (ADDDRWTBLE) tag
                  End Additional Paper Drawer Selection (EADDDRWTBL) tag
              Customizing paper output
                Output bin selection
                  Output Bin Selection (OUTBINTBL) tag
                  Output Bin Selection Entry (OUTBINTBLE) tag
                  End Output Bin Selection (EOUTBINTBL) tag
                Jog Output Tray (JOGOUTTRAY) tag
                Duplex
                  Set Duplex Printing (DUPXPRT) tag
                  Select Next Side Printing in Duplex (NXTDUPXPRT) tag
                  Set Tumble Duplex Printing (TUMDUPXPRT) tag
                Simplex
              Customizing print orientation
                Print Angle (PRTANGLE) tag
                Paper Orientation (PRTORIENT) tag
              Customizing print quality
              Customizing fonts
                Font groups
                  Font Group (FNTGRP) tag
                  Font Group Entry (FNTGRPE) tag
                  End Font Group (EFNTGRP) tag
                Individual fonts
                  Individual Font (INDFNT) tag
                  Individual Font Entry (INDFNTE) tag
                  End Individual Font (EINDFNT) tag
                Font mapping
                  Font Mapping (FNTMAPTBL) tag
                  Font Mapping Entry (FNTMAPE) tag
                  End Font Mapping (EFNTMAPTBL) tag
              Customizing code page support
                Customizing EBCDIC-to-ASCII code page mapping
                  EBCDIC-to-ASCII Mapping Table (EBCASCTBL) tag
                  EBCDIC-to-ASCII Mapping Table Entry (EBCASCTBLE) tag
                  End EBCDIC-to-ASCII Mapping Table (EEBCASCTBL) tag
                Additional ASCII code pages
                  ASCII Code Page Information (ASCCPINFO) tag
                  Code Page (CODEPAGE) tag
                  ASCII Control Code Mapping (ASCIICTL) tag
                  End ASCII Code Page Information (EASCCPINFO) tag
                Default ASCII Code Page (DFTASCCP) Tag
              Customizing fax support
                Fax Size for Transform (FAXSIZXFM) tag
                Fax Size Entry (FAXSIZE) tag
                End Fax Size for Transform (EFAXSIZXFM) tag
              Customizing Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) support
                CCSID mapping
                  EBCDIC-to-ASCII CSSID mapping (EBCASCCSID) tag
                  EBCDIC-to-ASCII CSSID mapping entry (EBCASCCSIDE) tag
                  End EBCDIC-to-ASCII CSSID mapping table entry (EEBCASCCSID) tag
                Shift In (SI) tag
                Shift Out (SO) tag
                DBCS Space (DBSPACE) tag
                Character Orientation (CHRORIENT) tag
                Set Character Pitch (SCPITCH) tag
                Set Line Pitch (SLPITCH) tag
                Set Font Size Scaling (FONTSCALING) tag
                Set Font Size Scale (FONTSCALE) tag
                Set Characters per Inch (CPI) tag
                Set Grid Type (GLTYPE) tag
                Set Grid Line Width (GLWIDTH) tag
                Draw Grid Line (DRAWLINE) tag
                Printer Data Stream (PRTDTASTRM) tag
              Customizing file extension
            Customizing WSCST object of *CTXFORM transform type
              CTT Transform (CTXFRMTBL) tag
              Output Data Format (OUTDTAFMT) tag
              File Extension (FILEEXT) Tag
              Font Mapping by FGID
                Font Mapping by FGID (FGIDMAPTBL) tag
                Font Mapping Entry (FGIDMAPE) tag
                End Font Mapping (EFGIDMAPTBL) tag
              TrueType font mapping
                TrueType Font Mapping (TTFMAPTBL) tag
                TrueType Font Mapping Entry (TTFMAPE) tag
                End TrueType Font Mapping (ETTFMAPTBL) tag
              Font directory
          Changing an existing printer device description
          Displaying the printer device description
          IBM IBM i Access for Windows PC5250 configuration recommendations
          3486, 3487, and 3488 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
          3477 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
          3197 display station configuration recommendations
          ASCII workstation controller configuration recommendations
          IBM remote 5250 emulation program configuration recommendations
        Configuring image print transform
          Printing to an ASCII printer with image print transform
          Printing to an IPDS printer with image print transform
          Printing with remote output queues and image print transform
      Managing printing
        Managing spooled files
          Displaying a list of spooled files
          Displaying the contents of a spooled file
          Displaying messages associated with a spooled file
          Holding a spooled file
          Releasing a spooled file
          Moving a spooled file
          Deleting spooled files
          Converting a spooled file to PDF
          Exporting a spooled file to your PC
          Copying a spooled file to a physical file
          Sending a spooled file to another user or system
          Changing attributes of a spooled file
          Restarting the printing of a spooled file
          Suspending one spooled file and printing another
          Enabling spooled file notification message
          Controlling the number of spooled files
          Deleting expired spooled files
          Reclaiming spooled file storage
          Saving and restoring spooled files
          Controlling printing by spooled file size
          Repairing output queues and spooled files
        Printer-file-related tasks
          Changing printer files
          Overriding printer files
            Overriding file attributes
            Overriding file names or types
            Overriding file names or types and file attributes of the new file
            Generic override for printer files
          Deleting printer file overrides
          Displaying printer file overrides
        Managing printers
          Checking the status of a printer
          Making a printer available
          Making a printer unavailable
        Managing printer writers
          Starting a printer writer
          Stopping a printer writer
          Checking the status of a printer writer
        Managing remote writers
          Displaying remote writer status
          Starting a remote writer
          Stopping a remote writer
        Managing IPP server
          Starting the IPP server
          Stopping the IPP server
          Changing an IPP printer configuration
          Displaying an IPP printer configuration
          Deleting an IPP printer configuration
        Miscellaneous printing tasks
          Allowing direct printing
          Specifying separator pages
          Specifying print text
          Replacing unprintable characters
          Printing a graphic with other output
          Displaying graphic symbol sets
          Changing remote output queue description
      Examples: Using DDS and printer files
        Examples: Using DDS with RPG or COBOL
          Example: DDS row and column positioning source code
          Example: DDS absolute positioning source code
          Example: COBOL positioning source code
          Example: RPG positioning source code
        Example: Print font samples
          DDS source code
          C source code
          COBOL source code
          RPG source code
        Example: Using a program-described printer file with an application program
        Example: Using an externally described printer file with an application program
      Troubleshooting printing
        Troubleshooting the IPP server
        Troubleshooting the image print transform
      Reference information
        CL commands
          Jobs
          Output queues
          Printer devices
          Printer files
          Printer writers
          Spooled files
          User profiles
        Printer file parameter considerations
          Align (ALIGN) parameter
          Coded font (CDEFNT) parameter
          Corner staple (CORNERSTPL) parameter
          DBCS coded font (IGCCDEFNT) parameter
          Device type (DEVTYPE) parameter
          Edge stitch (EDGESTITCH) parameter
          Fidelity (FIDELITY) parameter
          Font character set (FNTCHRSET) parameter
          Margin (FRONTMGN and BACKMGN) parameters
          MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*NONE) parameters
          MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*TEXT) parameters
            MULTIUP support
            MULTIUP support for the 4224, 4230, 4234, 4247 printers
            Restrictions for MULTIUP with REDUCE(*TEXT)
          Output priority (OUTPTY) parameter
          Overlay (FRONTOVL and BACKOVL) parameters
          Page rotation (PAGRTT) parameter
            PAGRTT = *AUTO
            PAGRTT = *DEVD
            PAGRTT = 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees
            PAGRTT = *COR
            Page rotation on the 3831, 3835, 3900, InfoPrint 3000, and InfoPrint 4000 printers
            Page rotation and duplex printing
          Saddle stitch (SADLSTITCH) parameter
          Spooled output schedule (SCHEDULE) parameter
          To stream file (TOSTMF) parameter
          Workstation customizing object (WSCST) parameter
        Printer file return codes
          Major code 00 (00xx)
          Major code 80 (80xx)
          Major code 81 (81xx)
          Major code 82 (82xx)
          Major code 83 (83xx)
        Printer file feedback areas
          Open feedback area for printer
            Device definition list
            Open feedback extensions list
            Stream file name open feedback extension
          I/O feedback area
        AFP compatibility fonts and font substitution
          Font-related examples
          Font information
          Font attributes and font types
          Printer font support
          Font substitution by font ID range
          Mapping host-resident to printer-resident font character sets
          Mapping host-resident to printer-resident code pages
          Mapping printer-resident to host-resident font character sets
          Mapping printer-resident to host-resident code pages
          CHRID values supported
          LPI values supported
          CPI values supported
          4019 printer information
          4234 compressed font substitution by lines-per-inch value
        QWP4019 program
          QWP4019 parameter names and functions
          QWP4019 program use
        QPQCHGCF program
          QPQCHGCF parameter names and functions
          QPQCHGCF program use
          Restrictions on using the QPQCHGCF program
          Coded fonts whose font character sets reside in the 3130
          QPQCHGCF instructions for marking coded fonts
      Related information for Basic printing
    Advanced Function Presentation (AFP)
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF files for AFP
      AFP concepts
        Overview of AFP printing
        Data streams
          Line data
          Mixed data
          zSeries and z/OS data
        AFP resources
          AFP fonts
          Form definitions
          Object containers
          Overlays
          Page definitions
          Page segments
          Resources in the integrated file system
        TrueType and OpenType fonts
          Resource access tables
          How TrueType and OpenType fonts differ from AFP fonts
        Resource libraries
          Resource library lists
          AFP font libraries
        PSF configuration options
          PSF configuration objects
            IPDS pass-through
          How page definitions, form definitions, and printer files interact
      Planning for AFP
        Determining whether PSF is required
        Installing PSF
        Ensuring that you have the necessary AFP resources
      Getting started with AFP
        Obtaining AFP resources
          Fonts provided by IBM i
          Purchasing fonts
          Creating AFP resources
          Receiving AFP resources from another system
            Receiving fonts from zSeries
            Receiving AFP resources inline in the data stream
            Receiving resources and AFPDS data sent to network files
        Specifying AFP resources
          Specifying a form definition
          Specifying a page definition
          Specifying a PSF configuration object
          Specifying an overlay
          Specifying an AFP font
          Specifying a TrueType or OpenType font
          Example: Specifying a font
          Specifying a page segment
          Specifying an object container
          Search order of library list
        Creating AFP data
        Printing AFP data with PSF
          Printing AFP data generated on IBM i
          Printing data sent to IBM i from zSeries
        Transforming IPDS data to PDF
          Transforming spooled files to PDF without manual setup
          Transforming spooled files to PDF with manual setup
            Setting up your PSF configuration object
            Changing the input file to create multiple output files or an indexed file
            Configuring a device for PDF conversion
          Sending the PDF file as e-mail
          Encrypting the PDF file
      Configuring PSF
      Managing PSF
        Enabling IPDS pass-through support
        Sharing print sessions
        Automatic session recovery
        Disabling offset stacking and edge marking
        Specifying public data authority for directories created by PSF
      Line and mixed data stream support
        Special characters used with line data
        Printer file parameters used with line and mixed data
        Considerations and restrictions when using line data or mixed data
      Sending data from zSeries to IBM i
        Sending print data from VM to the output queue of a user ID
        Sending print data from z/OS to an IBM i output queue
        Sending data from zSeries to IBM i network files
      AFP reference information
        Form definitions included with the operating system
        Page definitions included with the operating system
        CL commands for PSF configuration objects
        CL commands for device descriptions
        TrueType fonts on OS/400 V5R2
        zSeries parameters and corresponding IBM i printer file parameters
        American National Standard carriage control characters
        Machine code carriage control characters
      Troubleshooting AFP
        Troubleshooting mapping problems
          Error message reason codes
          The diagnostic spool file (PSFTRACE)
            Requesting the diagnostic spool file
            Format of the diagnostic spool file
            Automatically generated PSFTRACE file
            User-requested PSFTRACE file
      Related information for AFP
  Programming
    Application programming interfaces
      APIs overview
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for APIs
      API finder
      APIs by category
        Backup and Recovery APIs
        Client Management Support APIs
        Cluster APIs
        Communications APIs
        Configuration APIs
        Cryptographic Services APIs
        Database and File APIs
        Date and Time APIs
        Debugger APIs
        Dynamic Screen Manager APIs
        Edit Function APIs
        GDDM APIs
        Hierarchical File System APIs
        High-Level Language APIs
        IBM HTTP Server for i APIs
        IBM i Access for Windows APIs
        IBM PASE for i APIs
        ILE CEE APIs
        International Components for Unicode APIs
        Java APIs
        Journal and Commit APIs
        Lotus Domino for IBM i
        Machine Interface Instructions APIs
        Message Handling APIs
        National Language Support APIs
        Network Management APIs
        Object APIs
        Office APIs
        Operational Assistant APIs
        Performance Management APIs
        Print APIs
        Problem Management APIs
        Process Open List APIs
        Program and CL Command APIs
        Pthread APIs
        Registration Facility APIs
        Remote Control Panel APIs
        Remote Procedure Call APIs
        Security APIs
        Server Support APIs
        Software Product APIs
        System Manager for i APIs
        UNIX-Type APIs
        User Application APIs
        User Interface Manager APIs
        Virtual Terminal APIs
        Work Management APIs
        Workstation Support APIs
        XML Parsing APIs
        Miscellaneous APIs
      Alphabetic list of APIs
      API concepts
        API terminology
        Generic library names
        API naming conventions
        Language selection considerations
        Types of APIs
          APIs for the program-based environment
          APIs for the service-program-based environment
          APIs for the ILE Common Execution Environment
          Differences between program-based APIs and service-program-based APIs
            Example in ILE C: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
            Example in OPM COBOL: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
            Example in OPM RPG: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
            Example in ILE RPG: Logging software error (program API without pointers)
            Example in ILE C: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
            Example in ILE COBOL: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
            Example in ILE RPG: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
          APIs for the UNIX-type environment
            Examples: UNIX-type APIs
        API information format
          API description
          API format
          API field descriptions
          API error messages
          Extracting a field from the format
          Processing lists that contain data structures
        API parameters
          Passing parameters
          Input and output parameters
          Offset values and lengths
          Offset versus displacement considerations for structures
          Error code parameter
            Error code parameter format
            Examples: Receiving error conditions
            Using the job log to diagnose API errors
        Include files and the QSYSINC library
        Internal object types
        Data types and APIs
        Internal identifiers
        User spaces and receiver variables
          User spaces
            General data structure
            Common data structure formats
            Example: User space format
            List sections
          Receiver variables
            Bytes available and bytes returned fields
            Keyed interface
            User space alternative
        Continuation handle
        List APIs overview
          General data structure for list APIs
          User spaces for list APIs
            Logic flow of processing a list of entries
            Manipulating a user space with pointers
            Manipulating a user space without pointers
            Examples: Changing a user space
              Example: User space before and after change
              Example in ILE RPG: Changing a user space
              Example in OPM RPG: Changing a user space
            Additional information about list APIs and user spaces
            Example in CL: Listing database file members
          Example in OPM RPG: List APIs
          Example in ILE CL: List APIs
          Example in ILE C: List APIs
          Example in ILE RPG: List APIs
          Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): List APIs
        Domains
        Exit programs
        User index considerations
        Performance considerations
        APIs and system objects
        Open list information format
        Path name format
      Using APIs
        Examples: Program-based APIs
          Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in OPM RPG: Printing the HOLD value
          Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Printing the HOLD value
          Example in ILE C: Printing the HOLD value
          Example in ILE RPG: Printing the HOLD value
          Example in OPM RPG: Accessing a field value (initial library list)
          Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Accessing a field value (initial library list)
          Example in ILE C: Accessing a field value (initial library list)
          Example in ILE RPG: Accessing a field value (initial library list)
          Example in OPM RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
          Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
          Example in ILE C: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
          Example in ILE RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
        Examples: Service-program-based APIs
          Example in ILE C: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in OPM COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in ILE COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in OPM RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in ILE RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in ILE C: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in OPM COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in ILE COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in OPM RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in ILE RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in ILE C: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in OPM COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
        Performing tasks using APIs
          Examples: Packaging your own software products
            Creating the example product
            Example in CL: Creating objects for packaging a product
            Example in OPM RPG: Packaging a product
            Example in ILE C: Packaging a product
            Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Packaging a product
            Example in ILE RPG: Packaging a product
          Examples: Retrieving a file description to a user space
            Example in ILE C: Retrieving a file description to a user space
            Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Retrieving a file description to a user space
            Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving a file description to a user space
          Examples: Using data queues or user queues
            Considerations for using data queues and user queues
            Example in ILE C: Using data queues
            Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Using data queues
            Example in OPM RPG: Using data queues
            Example in ILE RPG: Using data queues
            Example in ILE C: Using user queues
      Examples: APIs and exit programs
        Example: Changing an active job
        Example: Changing a job schedule entry
        Example: Creating a batch machine
        Example: Creating and manipulating a user index
        Example: Creating your own telephone directory
        Example: Defining queries
        Example: Deleting old spooled files
        Example: Diagnostic reporting
        Example: Generating and sending an alert
        Example: Listing directories
        Example: Listing subdirectories
        Example: Saving to multiple devices
        Example: Saving and restoring system-level environment variables
        Examples: Scanning string patterns
        Example: Using a COBOL/400 program to call APIs
        Examples: Using the Control Device (QTACTLDV) API
        Examples: Processing data queue entries
        Example: Using environment variables
        Examples: Using ILE Common Execution Environment APIs
        Example: Using generic terminal APIs
        Example: Using profile handles
        Example: Using registration facility APIs
        Example: Using semaphore set and shared memory functions
        Example: Using SNA/Management Services Transport APIs
        Example: Using source debugger APIs
        Example: Using process-related APIs
        Example: Using the user-defined communications programs for file transfer
        Example: Working with stream files
        Example: Creating a program temporary fix exit program
        Example: Creating an exit program for Operational Assistant backup
      Machine interface programming
        Machine interface instructions
        Example: Writing an MI program
        Compiling an MI program
        Creating an MI version of the CLCRTPG program
        Enhanced version of the MICRTPG program
          Writing the MICRTPG2 program (by sections of code)
          Beginning the instruction stream
          Using static storage to your advantage
          MI code example: MICRTPG2 complete program
          Updated CL06 program
        Creating the MICRTPG2 program
        Example: Common MI programming techniques
        Program storage
      Common API programming errors
        Using the error code parameter
        Defining data structures
        Defining receiver variables
        Defining list-entry format lengths
        Using null pointers with program-based APIs
        Defining byte alignment
        Using offsets in a user space
        Coding for new functions
    Control language
      Control language overview
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF files for Control language
      CL command finder
      Alphabetic list of CL commands by command name
      CL commands by product
        IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities commands
        IBM Advanced Job Scheduler for i commands
        IBM Backup, Recovery and Media Services for i commands
        IBM Business Graphics Utility for System i commands
        IBM CICS Transaction Server for i commands
        IBM Communications Utilities for System i commands
        IBM Content Manager OnDemand for i commands
        IBM DB2 DataPropagator for iSeries, V8.1 commands
        IBM DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit for i commands
        IBM Developer Kit for Java commands
        IBM HTTP Server for i commands
        IBM Infoprint Server for iSeries commands
        IBM i commands
        IBM i Access for Web commands
        IBM Managed System Services for i commands
        IBM Performance Tools for i commands
        IBM PowerHA for i commands
        IBM Query for i commands
        IBM Rational Development Studio for i commands
        IBM System Manager for i commands
        IBM TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for i commands
      CL concepts
        System operation control
          Control language
          Menus
          Messages
            Message descriptions
            Message queues
        CL commands
          CL command names
            Abbreviations of CL commands and keywords
              CL command verb abbreviations
              CL command abbreviations
              CL command keyword abbreviations
          CL command parts
            CL command syntax
            CL command label
            CL command parameters
            CL command delimiters
            CL command continuation
            CL command comments
          CL command definition
          CL command coding rules
          CL command information and documentation
            CL command documentation format
              CL environment classification
              CL threadsafe classification
              CL command description
              CL parameters
              CL command coding examples
              CL error messages
            CL command help
            Printing CL command descriptions on the system
            CL command prompters
          CL commands that operate on i5/OS objects
          CL commands that operate on multiple objects
        CL programs and procedures
          CL procedure
          CL module
          CL program
          Service program
        CL parameters
          Parameter values
            Constant value
              Character string
              Hexadecimal values
              Date values
              Decimal values
              Logical values
              Floating-point constants
            Variable name
            Expressions
            List of values
          Parameters in keyword and positional form
          Required, optional, and key parameters
          Commonly used parameters
            AUT parameter
            CLS parameter
            COUNTRY parameter
            FILETYPE parameter
            FRCRATIO parameter
            IGCFEAT parameter
            JOB parameter
            LABEL parameter
            LICOPT parameter
            MAXACT parameter
            OBJ parameter
            OBJTYPE parameter
            OUTPUT parameter
            PRTTXT parameter
            REPLACE parameter
            JOBPTY, OUTPTY, and PTYLMT scheduling priority parameters
            SEV parameter
            SPLNBR parameter
            TEXT parameter
            VOL parameter
            WAITFILE parameter
          Parameter values used for testing and debugging
            Program-variable description
            Basing-pointer description
            Subscript description
            Qualified-name description
        Control language elements
          CL character sets and values
            Character sets
              Double-byte character text in CL commands
            Special character use
            Symbolic operators
            Predefined values
          Expressions in CL commands
            Arithmetic expressions
            Character string expressions
              Example: Character string expressions
              Example: Using character strings and variables
            Relational expressions
            Logical expressions
            Operators in expressions
            Priority of operators when evaluating expressions
          Built-in functions for CL
          Naming within commands
            Folder and document names
        i5/OS objects
          Library objects
          External object types
          Simple and qualified object names
          Generic object names
          Object naming rules
            Communication names (*CNAME)
            Generic names (*GENERIC)
            Names (*NAME)
            Path names (*PNAME)
            Simple names (*SNAME)
            Additional rules for unique names
        Database files and device files used by CL commands
      CL programming
        Process for creating a CL program or CL procedure
          Interactive entry
          Batch entry
          Parts of a CL source program
          Example: Simple CL program
        Commands used in CL programs or procedures
          Common commands used in CL programs and procedures
        Operations performed by CL programs or procedures
        Variables in CL commands
          Declaring variables to a CL program or procedure
          Uses for based variables
          Uses for defined variables
          Variables to use for specifying a list or qualified name
          Cases of characters in variables
          Variables that replace reserved or numeric parameter values
          Changing the value of a variable
          Trailing blanks on command parameters
          Writing comments in CL programs or procedures
        Controlling processing within a CL program or CL procedure
          GOTO command and command labels in a CL program or procedure
          IF command in a CL program or procedure
          ELSE command in a CL program or procedure
          Embedded IF commands in a CL program or procedure
          DO command and DO groups in a CL program or procedure
          Showing DO and SELECT nesting levels
          DOUNTIL command in a CL program or procedure
          DOWHILE command in a CL program or procedure
          DOFOR command in a CL program or procedure
          ITERATE command in a CL program or procedure
          LEAVE command in a CL program or procedure
          CALLSUBR command in a CL program or procedure
          SELECT command and SELECT groups in a CL program or procedure
          SUBR command and subroutines in a CL program or procedure
          *AND, *OR, and *NOT operators
          %ADDRESS built-in function in a CL program or procedure
          %BINARY built-in function
          %OFFSET built-in function
          %SUBSTRING built-in function
          %SWITCH built-in function
            %SWITCH with the IF command
            %SWITCH with the Change Variable command
          Monitor Message command
        Retrieving values that can be used as variables
          Retrieving system values
            Example: Retrieving QTIME system value
            Retrieving the QDATE system value into a CL variable
          Retrieving configuration source
          Retrieving configuration status
          Retrieving network attributes
            Example: Using the Retrieve Network Attributes command
          Retrieving job attributes
            Example: Using the Retrieve Job Attributes command
          Retrieving user profile attributes
            Example: Using the Retrieve User Profile command
          Retrieving member description information
            Example: Using the Retrieve Member Description command
        Compiling CL source program
          Setting create options in the CL source program
          Embedding CL commands from another source member
          Logging CL program or procedure commands
          Retrieving CL source code
          CL module compiler listings
          Common compilation errors
          Obtaining a CL procedure dump
          Displaying module attributes
          Displaying program attributes
          Return code summary
        Compiling source programs for a previous release
          Previous-release (*PRV) libraries
          Installing CL compiler support for a previous release
        Controlling flow and communicating between programs and procedures
          Passing control to another program or procedure
            Using the Call Program command to pass control
            Using the Call Bound Procedure command to pass control
            Using the Return command to pass control
          Passing parameters
            Using the Call Program command to pass control to a called program
            Common errors when calling programs and procedures
              Data type errors using the CALL command
              Data type errors when passing parameters
              Decimal length and precision errors
              Character length errors
        Communicating between programs and procedures
          Using data queues
            Remote data queues
            Comparisons with using database files as queues
            Similarities to message queues
            Prerequisites for using data queues
            Managing the storage used by a data queue
            Allocating data queues
            Examples: Using a data queue
              Example: Waiting up to two hours to receive data from data queue
              Example: Waiting for input from a display file and an ICF file
              Example: Waiting for input from a display file and a data queue
            Creating data queues associated with an output queue
            Creating data queues associated with jobs
          Using data areas
            Local data area
            Group data area
            Program Initialization Parameter data area
            Remote data areas
            Creating a data area
            Data area locking and allocation
            Displaying a data area
            Changing a data area
            Retrieving a data area
            Examples: Retrieving a data area
              Example: Retrieving data area ORDINFO
              Example: Retrieving data area DA1
              Example: Retrieving data area DA2
            Example: Changing and retrieving a data area
        Defining and documenting commands
          Defining commands
            Command definition statements
              Creating user-defined commands
            Command definition process
              Create Command command
              Command definition object
              Validity checking
              Prompt override program
              Command processing program
              Command exit programs and independent ASPs
              Authority needed for defining commands
              Example: Creating a command
            Defining a command
              Using the CMD statement
              Create options in command definition source
              Defining parameters
                Naming the keyword for the parameter
                Parameter types
                Length of parameter value
                Default values
                Example: Defining a parameter
            Data type and parameter restrictions
            Defining lists for parameters
              Defining a simple list
                Using CL or other HLLs for simple lists
                Using REXX for simple lists
              Defining a mixed list
                Using CL or other HLLs for mixed lists
                Using REXX for mixed lists
              Defining lists within lists
                Using CL or other HLLs for lists within lists
                Using REXX for lists within lists
              Defining a qualified name
                Using CL or other HLLs for a qualified name
                Using REXX for a qualified name
              Defining a dependent relationship
              Possible choices and values for parameter definitions
            Specifying prompt control
              Specifying conditional prompting
              Additional parameters for prompting
            Key parameters and prompt override programs
              Using a prompt override program
                Identifying key parameters
                Prompt override program
                  Parameters passed to the prompt override program
                  Information returned from the prompt override program
                  Allowing for errors in a prompt override program
                Specifying the prompt override program when creating or changing commands
              Example: Using a prompt override program
            Creating commands
              Command definition source listing
              Command errors when processing command definition statements
            Displaying a command definition
            Effect of changing the command definition of a command in a procedure or program
              Changing command defaults
              Examples: Changing command defaults
            Command processing program
              CL or HLL command processing program
              REXX command processing procedure
            Validity checking program
            Examples: Defining and creating commands
              Example: Calling application programs
              Example: Substituting a default value
              Example: Displaying an output queue
              Example: Displaying messages from IBM-supplied commands more than once
              Example: Creating abbreviated change job command
              Example: Creating abbreviated printer writer command
              Example: Deleting files and source members
              Example: Deleting program objects
          Documenting command
            Commands and command help
            Writing command help
              Generating UIM source for command help
              Common help sharing
              Organizing help text into help modules
            Generating HTML source for command documentation
          Proxy commands
        Command-related APIs
          QCAPCMD program
          QCMDEXC program
            QCMDEXC program with DBCS data
          QCMDCHK program
        Prompting for user input at run time
          Using the i5/OS prompter within a CL procedure or program
          Using selective prompting for CL commands
          Using QCMDEXC with prompting in CL procedures and programs
        Entering program source
          Using the Start Programmer Menu command
            Using the EXITPGM parameter of the Start Programmer Menu command
        Command analyzer exit points
        Designing application programs for DBCS data
          Designing DBCS application programs
          Converting alphanumeric programs to process DBCS data
          Using DBCS data in a CL program
        Unicode support in control language
          Unicode overview
          Design of Unicode in control language
          Example: Passing the EBCDIC and Unicode value
          Calling Unicode-enabled commands
        Loading and running an application from tape or optical media
          Example: QINSTAPP program
        Transferring control to improve performance
          Example: Using the Transfer Control command
          Passing parameters using the Transfer Control command
        Examples: CL programming
          Example: Initial program for setup (programmer)
          Example: Saving specific objects in an application (system operator)
          Example: Recovery from abnormal end (system operator)
          Example: Timing out while waiting for input from a device display
          Example: Performing date arithmetic
      Debugging CL programs and procedures
        Debugging ILE programs
          Debug commands
          Preparing a program object for a debug session
            Using a root source view to debug ILE programs
            Using a listing view to debug ILE programs
            Encrypting the debug listing view
            Using a statement view to debug ILE programs
          Starting the ILE source debugger
          Adding program objects to a debug session
          Removing program objects from a debug session
          Viewing the program source
            Changing a module object
            Changing the module object view
          Setting and removing breakpoints
            Setting and removing unconditional breakpoints
            Setting and removing conditional breakpoints
            Using the Work with Breakpoints display
            Using the BREAK and CLEAR debug commands to set and remove conditional breakpoints
            National Language Sort Sequence
            Examples: Conditional breakpoint
            Removing all breakpoints
          Using instruction stepping
            F10 (Step) to step over program objects or F22 (Step into) to step into program objects
            Using the STEP debug command to step through a program object
          Displaying variables
            Example: Displaying logical variable
            Examples: Displaying character variable
            Example: Displaying decimal variable
            Example: Displaying variables as hexadecimal values
          Changing the value of variables
            Example: Changing logical variable
            Examples: Changing character variable
            Examples: Changing decimal variable
          Displaying variable attributes
          Equating a name with a variable, an expression, or a command
          Source debug and i5/OS globalization
            Working with *SOURCE view
          Operations that temporarily remove steps
        Debugging original program model programs
          Starting debug mode
            Adding programs to debug mode
            Preventing updates to database files in production libraries
          Displaying the call stack
            Program activations
          Handling unmonitored messages
          Breakpoints
            Adding breakpoints to programs
            Adding conditional breakpoints
            Removing breakpoints from programs
          Traces
            Adding traces to programs
            Using instruction stepping
            Using breakpoints within traces
            Removing trace information from the system
            Removing traces from programs
          Displaying testing information
          Displaying the values of variables
          Changing the values of variables
          Reasons for using a job to debug another job
            Debugging batch jobs that are submitted to a job queue
            Debugging batch jobs that are not started from job queues
            Debugging a job that is running
            Debugging another interactive job
            Considerations when debugging one job from another job
          Debugging at the machine interface level
          Security considerations
          Operations that temporarily remove breakpoints
      Objects and libraries
        Objects
          Object types and common attributes
          Functions performed on objects
            Functions the system performs automatically
            Functions you can perform using commands
        Libraries
          Library lists
            Functions of using a library list
            A job's library list
            Changing the library list
            Considerations for using a library list
            Displaying a library list
            Using library lists to search for objects
              Generic object names searching
              Searching for multiple objects or a single object
        Using libraries
          Creating a library
          Authority for libraries specification
            Object authority
            Data authority
            Combined authority
          Security considerations for objects
            The Display Audit Journal Entries command to generate security journal audit reports
          Setting default public authority
          Setting default auditing attribute
          Placing objects in libraries
          Deleting and clearing libraries
          Displaying library names and contents
          Displaying and retrieving library descriptions
        Changing national language versions
          Static prompt message for control language
          Dynamic prompt message for control language
        Describing objects
        Displaying object descriptions
        Retrieving object descriptions
          Example: Using the Retrieve Object Description command
        Creation information for objects
        Detecting unused objects on the system
        Moving objects from one library to another
        Creating duplicate objects
        Renaming objects
        Object compression or decompression
          Restrictions for compression of objects
          Temporarily decompressed objects
          Automatic decompression of objects
        Deleting objects
        Allocating resources
          Lock states for objects
          Displaying the lock states for objects
        Accessing objects in CL programs
          Accessing command definitions, files, and procedures
            Accessing command definitions
            Accessing files
            Accessing procedures
          Checking for the existence of an object
        Working with files in CL programs or procedures
          Data manipulation commands
          Files in a CL program or procedure
          Opening and closing files in a CL program or procedure
          Declaring a file
          Sending and receiving data with a display file
          Example: Writing a CL program or procedure to control a menu
          Overriding display files in a CL procedure or program (OVRDSPF command)
          Working with multiple device display files
          Receiving data from a database file (RCVF command)
          Reading a file multiple times (CLOSE command)
          Overriding database files in a CL procedure or program (OVRDBF command)
          Output files from display commands
      Messages
        Defining message descriptions
          Creating a message file
            Message files in independent ASPs
            Determining the size of a message file
          Adding messages to a file
            Assigning a message identifier
            Defining messages and message help
            Defining substitution variables
            Assigning a severity code
            Specifying validity checking for replies
            Example: Sending an immediate message and handling a reply
              Sending immediate messages with double-byte characters
            Defining default values for replies
            Specifying default message handling for escape messages
              Example: Sending the last diagnostic message as an escape message
              Specifying the alert option
            Example: Describing a message
            Defining double-byte messages
          Viewing messages
          Message file searching
            System message file searches
            Overriding message files
              Example: Overriding a message file
        Message queues
          Types of message queues
          Creating or changing a message queue
            Message queues in independent ASPs
            Message queues in break mode
            Placing a message queue in break mode automatically
          Job message queues
            External message queue
            Call message queue
        Commands used to send messages to a system user
        Commands used to send messages from a CL program
          Inquiry and informational messages
          Completion and diagnostic messages
          Status messages
          Escape and notify messages
          Examples: Sending messages
          Identifying a call stack entry
            Using the Send Program Message command as the base
            Identifying the base entry by name
            Using the program boundary as a base (*PGMBDY)
            Using the most recently called procedure as a base (*PGMNAME)
            Using a control boundary as a base (*CTLBDY)
            Considerations for service programs
        Receiving messages into a CL procedure or program
          Receiving request messages
          Writing request-processor procedures and programs
          Determining if a request processor exists
        Retrieving message descriptions from a message file
        Removing messages from a message queue
        Monitoring for messages in a CL program or procedure
          Watching for messages
          CL handling for unmonitored messages
          Monitoring for notify messages
          Monitoring for status messages
          Preventing the display of status messages
        Receiving a message from a program or procedure that has ended
        Break-handling programs
        Ways of handling replies to inquiry messages
          Using a sender copy message to obtain a reply
          Finding the job that sent the reply
          Using the system reply list
          Using the reply handling exit program
        Message subfiles in a CL program or procedure
        Log messages
          Job log
            Writing a job log to a file
            Controlling information written in a job log
            Job log message filtering
            Example: Controlling information written in a job log
            Job log sender or receiver information
            Displaying a job log
            Preventing the production of job logs
            Job log considerations
            Interactive job log considerations
            Batch job log considerations
            Message filtering through the Control Job Log Output API
            Job log output files
              Job log direction
              Primary job log model
          QHST history log
            Format of the history log
            QHST file processing
            QHST job start and completion messages
            QHST files deletion
        QSYSMSG message queue
          Messages sent to QSYSMSG message queue
          Example: Receiving messages from QSYSMSG
    Communications
      Socket programming
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF files for Socket programming
        Prerequisites for socket programming
        How sockets work
        Socket characteristics
          Socket address structure
          Socket address family
            AF_INET address family
            AF_INET6 address family
            AF_UNIX address family
            AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
          Socket type
          Socket protocols
        Basic socket design
          Creating a connection-oriented socket
            Example: A connection-oriented server
            Example: A connection-oriented client
          Creating a connectionless socket
            Example: A connectionless server
            Example: A connectionless client
          Designing applications with address families
            Using AF_INET address family
            Using AF_INET6 address family
            Using AF_UNIX address family
              Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX address family
              Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX address family
            Using AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
              Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
              Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
        Advanced socket concepts
          Asynchronous I/O
          Secure sockets
            Global Secure ToolKit (GSKit) APIs
            SSL_ APIs
            Secure socket API error code messages
          Client SOCKS support
          Thread safety
          Nonblocking I/O
          Signals
          IP multicasting
          File data transfer—send_file() and accept_and_recv()
          Out-of-band data
          I/O multiplexing—select()
          Socket network functions
          Domain Name System support
            Environment variables
            Data caching
          Berkeley Software Distribution compatibility
          UNIX 98 compatibility
          Descriptor passing between processes: sendmsg() and recvmsg()
          Sockets-related User Exit Points
            Example: User Exit Program for QIBM_QSO_ACCEPT
        Socket scenario: Creating an application to accept IPv4 and IPv6 clients
          Example: Accepting connections from both IPv6 and IPv4 clients
          Example: IPv4 or IPv6 client
        Socket application design recommendations
        Examples: Socket application designs
          Examples: Connection-oriented designs
            Example: Writing an iterative server program
            Example: Using the spawn() API to create child processes
              Example: Creating a server that uses spawn()
              Example: Enabling the worker job to receive a data buffer
            Example: Passing descriptors between processes
              Example: Server program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
              Example: Worker program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
            Examples: Using multiple accept() APIs to handle incoming requests
              Example: Server program to create a pool of multiple accept() worker jobs
              Example: Worker jobs for multiple accept()
            Example: Generic client
          Example: Using asynchronous I/O
          Examples: Establishing secure connections
            Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous data receive
            Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous handshake
            Example: Establishing a secure client with Global Secure ToolKit APIs
          Example: Using gethostbyaddr_r() for threadsafe network routines
          Example: Nonblocking I/O and select()
          Using poll() instead of select()
          Example: Using signals with blocking socket APIs
          Examples: Using multicasting with AF_INET
            Example: Sending multicast datagrams
            Example: Receiving multicast datagrams
          Example: Updating and querying DNS
          Examples: Transferring file data using send_file() and accept_and_recv() APIs
            Example: Using accept_and_recv() and send_file() APIs to send contents of a file
            Example: Client request for a file
        Xsockets tool
          Configuring Xsockets
            What is created by integrated Xsocket setup
          Configuring Xsockets to use a Web browser
            Configuring an Integrated Web Application Server
            Updating configuration files
            Configuring Xsockets Web application
            Testing Xsockets tool in a Web browser
          Using Xsockets
            Using integrated Xsockets
            Using Xsockets in a Web browser
          Deleting objects created by the Xsockets tool
          Customizing Xsockets
        Serviceability tools
      Using Sun TI-RPC to develop distributed applications
        PDF file for Using Sun TI-RPC to develop distributed applications
        Using the rpcbind daemon
          Ensuring that the rpcbind daemon is running on i5/OS
          Starting and ending the rpcbind daemon on i5/OS
        Using the rpcgen compiler
        Using the network selection mechanism
        Using data conversion support
        Examples: Developing service applications based on TI-RPC code
          Example: TI-RPC simplified-level service API
          Example: TI-RPC top-level service API
          Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level service API
          Example: TI-RPC expert-level service API
          Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC service
        Examples: Developing client applications based on TI-RPC code
          Example: TI-RPC simplified-level client API
          Example: TI-RPC top-level client API
          Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level client API
          Example: TI-RPC expert-level client API
          Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC client
    DDS
      DDS keyword finder
      DDS concepts
        PDF file for DDS concepts
        Creating a file using DDS
          Completing the DDS form
          Entering the DDS source statements
          Creating the DDS file
        DDS coding rules, conventions, and terms
          Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
          Rules for DDS keywords and parameter values
          DDS naming conventions
          DDS keywords and parameters
        General considerations for using DBCS text with DDS files
          Positional entries for files that use DBCS data
            Length (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type (position 35)
          Keyword entries for files that use DBCS (positions 45 through 80)
          DBCS character strings
            Entering bracketed-DBCS character strings
            Entering DBCS-graphic character strings
          DDS computer printouts with DBCS output
        Examples: DDS
          Examples: DDS syntax
            DDS syntax for a physical file
            DDS syntax for a simple logical file
            DDS syntax for a join logical file
            DDS syntax for a display file
            DDS syntax for a printer file
            DDS syntax for an intersystem communications function file
          Examples: DDS for each file type
            Example: A field reference file
            Example: A physical file with a new record format
            Example: A logical file specifying multiple formats and new keys
            Example: A logical file specifying a new record format
            Example: A join logical file
            Example: An inquiry display with two record formats in DDS
            Example: A subfile with SFLPAG value equal to SFLSIZ value
            Example: A subfile with paging by i5/OS and high-level language program
            Example: A horizontal subfile displayable on two display sizes
            Example: A message subfile using DDS
            Example: A printer file using DDS
            Example: An intersystem communications function file using DDS
          Example: Program that uses a physical file, display file, and printer file
          Example: DDS compiler listing
          DDS debugging template
        When to specify REF and REFFLD keywords for DDS files
        Related information for DDS concepts
      DDS for physical and logical files
        PDF file for DDS for physical and logical files
        Defining physical and logical files using DDS
          Defining a physical file using DDS
          Defining a logical file using DDS
            Simple- and multiple-format logical files in DDS
            Join logical files in DDS
            Specifying record formats in a logical file in DDS
          Positional entries for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 44)
            Sequence number for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 5)
            Form type for physical and logical files (position 6)
            Comment for physical and logical files (position 7)
            Condition for physical and logical files (positions 8 through 16)
            Type of name or specification for physical and logical files (position 17)
            Reserved for physical and logical files (position 18)
            Name for physical and logical files (positions 19 through 28)
              Record format
              Field name
              Key field name
                DDS access path keywords
                DDS logical files with more than one record format
                Using *NONE in the key field when creating a DDS file
                Example 1: Specifying the key field
                Example 2: Specifying the key field
                Example 3: Specifying the key field
                Example 4: Specifying the key field
              Select/omit field name
            Reference for physical and logical files (position 29)
            Length for physical and logical files (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type for physical and logical files (position 35)
              Conversion of one numeric data type to another in a DDS file
              Conversion between zoned decimal and character or hexadecimal in a DDS file
              Conversion of a field from floating point to packed decimal, zoned decimal, or binary in DDS
              Conversion of data types when concatenating fields in DDS
              Conversion of data types when substringing fields in DDS
            Decimal positions for physical and logical files (positions 36 and 37)
            Usage for physical and logical files (position 38)
            Location for physical and logical files (positions 39 through 44)
        Keyword entries for physical and logical files (positions 45 through 80)
          ABSVAL (Absolute Value) keyword for physical and logical files
          ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for physical and logical files
          ALL (All) keyword—logical files only
          ALTSEQ (Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
          ALWNULL (Allow Null Value) keyword—physical files only
          CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
          CHECK (Check) keyword for physical and logical files
          CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
          CMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
          COLHDG (Column Heading) keyword for physical and logical files
          COMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
            Specifying COMP at the field level
            Specifying COMP at the select/omit-field level
          CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword—logical files only
          DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for physical and logical files
          DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
          DESCEND (Descend) keyword for physical and logical files
          DFT (Default) keyword—physical files only
          DIGIT (Digit) keyword for physical and logical files
          DYNSLT (Dynamic Select) keyword—logical files only
          EDTCDE (Edit Code) and EDTWRD (Edit Word) keywords for physical and logical files
          FCFO (First-Changed First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
          FIFO (First-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
          FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword for physical and logical files
          FORMAT (Format) keyword for physical and logical files
          JDFTVAL (Join Default Values) keyword—join logical files only
          JDUPSEQ (Join Duplicate Sequence) keyword—join logical files only
          JFILE (Joined Files) keyword—join logical files only
          JFLD (Joined Fields) keyword—join logical files only
          JOIN (Join) keyword—join logical files only
          JREF (Join Reference) keyword—join logical files only
          LIFO (Last-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
          NOALTSEQ (No Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
          PFILE (Physical File) keyword—logical files only
          RANGE (Range) keyword for physical and logical files
            Specifying RANGE at the field level
            Specifying RANGE at the select/omit-field level
          REF (Reference) keyword—physical files only
          REFACCPTH (Reference Access Path Definition) keyword—logical files only
          REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword—physical files only
          REFSHIFT (Reference Shift) keyword for physical and logical files
          RENAME (Rename) keyword—logical files only
          SIGNED (Signed) keyword for physical and logical files
          SST (Substring) keyword—logical files only
          TEXT (Text) keyword for physical and logical files
          TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword for physical and logical files
          TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
          TRNTBL (Translation Table) keyword—logical files only
          UNIQUE (Unique) keyword for physical and logical files
          UNSIGNED (Unsigned) keyword for physical and logical files
          VALUES (Values) keyword for physical and logical files
            Specifying VALUES at the field level
            Specifying VALUES at the select/omit-field level
          VARLEN (Variable-Length Field) keyword for physical and logical files
          ZONE (Zone) keyword for physical and logical files
        Unicode considerations for database files
          Unicode considerations for database files: Length (positions 30 through 34)
          Unicode considerations for database files: Data type (position 35)
          Unicode considerations for database files: Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
          Unicode considerations for database files: Keyword considerations (positions 45 through 80)
        DBCS considerations for database files
          Positional entry considerations for database files that use DBCS
            Length (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type (position 35)
            Decimal (positions 36 and 37)
          Keyword considerations for database files that use DBCS
            CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword
          Additional considerations for describing database files that contain DBCS data
      DDS for display files
        PDF file for DDS for display files
        Defining a display file for DDS
          Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
          Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 44)
            Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 7)
            Condition for display files (positions 7 through 16)
              Specifying a condition for a field or for more than one keyword
              Display size condition names
            Type of name or specification for display files (position 17)
            Reserved for display files (position 18)
            Name for display files (positions 19 through 28)
            Reference for display files (position 29)
            Length for display files (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type and keyboard shift for display files (position 35)
              Keyboard types
                Typewriter-like keyboard
                Data-entry keyboard
              Valid entries for display files
                Default (blank)
                Alphabetic only (X)
                Alphanumeric shift (A)
                Numeric shift (N)
                Signed numeric (S)
                Numeric only (Y)
                Katakana (W)
                Inhibit keyboard entry (I)
                Digits only (D)
                Numeric only character (M)
                Floating point (F)
                Date (L), Time (T), and Timestamp (Z)
            Decimal positions for display files (positions 36 and 37)
            Usage for display files (position 38)
            Location for display files (positions 39 through 44)
              Line (positions 39 through 41)
              Position (positions 42 through 44)
              Beginning attribute character
              Ending attribute character
              Overlapping fields
              Display length
        DDS keyword entries for display files (positions 45 through 80)
          ALARM (Audible Alarm) keyword for display files
          ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for display files
          ALTHELP (Alternative Help Key) keyword for display files
          ALTNAME (Alternative Record Name) keyword for display files
          ALTPAGEDWN/ALTPAGEUP (Alternative Page Down/Alternative Page Up) keyword for display files
          ALWGPH (Allow Graphics) keyword for display files
          ALWROL (Allow Roll) keyword for display files
          ASSUME (Assume) keyword for display files
          AUTO (Auto) keyword for display files
          BLANKS (Blanks) keyword for display files
          BLINK (Blink) keyword for display files
          BLKFOLD (Blank Fold) keyword for display files
          CAnn (Command Attention) keyword for display files
          CFnn (Command Function) keyword for display files
          CHANGE (Change) keyword for display files
          CHCACCEL (Choice Accelerator Text) keyword for display files
          CHCAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Available) keyword for display files
          CHCCTL (Choice Control) keyword for display files
          CHCSLT (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Selected) keyword for display files
          CHCUNAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Unavailable) keyword for display files
          CHECK (Check) keyword for display files
          CHGINPDFT (Change Input Default) keyword for display files
          CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for display files
          CHOICE (Selection Field Choice) keyword for display files
          CHRID (Character Identifier) keyword for display files
          CLEAR (Clear) keyword for display files
          CLRL (Clear Line) keyword for display files
          CMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
          CNTFLD (Continued-Entry Field) keyword for display files
          COLOR (Color) keyword for display files
          COMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
          CSRINPONLY (Cursor Movement to Input-Capable Positions Only) keyword for display files
          CSRLOC (Cursor Location) keyword for display files
          DATE (Date) keyword for display files
          DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for display files
          DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for display files
          DFT (Default) keyword for display files
          DFTVAL (Default Value) keyword for display files
          DLTCHK (Delete Check) keyword for display files
          DLTEDT (Delete Edit) keyword for display files
          DSPATR (Display Attribute) keyword for display files
          DSPMOD (Display Mode) keyword for display files
          DSPRL (Display Right to Left) keyword for display files
          DSPSIZ (Display Size) keyword for display files
          DUP (Duplication) keyword for display files
            Programming for the Dup key
          EDTCDE (Edit Code) keyword for display files
          EDTMSK (Edit Mask) keyword for display files
          EDTWRD (Edit Word) keyword for display files
          ENTFLDATR (Entry Field Attribute) keyword for display files
          ERASE (Erase) keyword for display files
          ERASEINP (Erase Input) keyword for display files
          ERRMSG (Error Message) and ERRMSGID (Error Message Identifier) keywords for display files
          ERRSFL (Error Subfile) keyword for display files
          FLDCSRPRG (Cursor Progression Field) keyword for display files
          FLTFIXDEC (Floating-Point to Fixed Decimal) keyword for display files
          FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) Keyword for Display Files
          FRCDTA (Force Data) keyword for display files
          GETRETAIN (Get Retain) keyword for display files
          HELP (Help) keyword for display files
          HLPARA (Help Area) keyword for display files
          HLPBDY (Help Boundary) keyword for display files
          HLPCLR (Help Cleared) keyword for display files
          HLPCMDKEY (Help Command Key) keyword for display files
          HLPDOC (Help Document) keyword for display files
          HLPEXCLD (Help Excluded) keyword for display files
          HLPFULL (Help Full) keyword for display files
          HLPID (Help Identifier) keyword for display files
          HLPPNLGRP (Help Panel Group) keyword for display files
          HLPRCD (Help Record) keyword for display files
          HLPRTN (Help Return) keyword for display files
          HLPSCHIDX (Help Search Index) keyword for display files
          HLPSEQ (Help Sequencing) keyword for display files
          HLPTITLE (Help Title) keyword for display files
          HOME (Home) keyword for display files
          HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) keyword for display files
          INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword for display files
          INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword for display files
          INVITE (Invite) keyword for display files
          INZINP (Initialize Input) keyword for display files
            ERASEINP(*ALL) keyword
          INZRCD (Initialize Record) keyword for display files
          KEEP (Keep) keyword for display files
          LOCK (Lock) keyword for display files
          LOGINP (Log Input) keyword for display files
          LOGOUT (Log Output) keyword for display files
          LOWER (Lower) keyword for display files
          MAPVAL (Map Values) keyword for display files
          MDTOFF (Modified Data Tag Off) keyword for display files
          MLTCHCFLD (Multiple-Choice Selection Field) keyword for display files
          MNUBAR (Menu Bar) keyword for display files
          MNUBARCHC (Menu-Bar Choice) keyword for display files
          MNUBARDSP (Menu-Bar Display) keyword for display files
          MNUBARSEP (Menu-Bar Separator) keyword for display files
          MNUBARSW (Menu-Bar Switch Key) keyword for display files
          MNUCNL (Menu-Cancel Key) keyword for display files
          MOUBTN (Mouse Buttons) keyword for display files
          MSGALARM (Message Alarm) keyword for display files
          MSGCON (Message Constant) keyword for display files
          MSGID (Message Identifier) keyword for display files
          MSGLOC (Message Location) keyword for display files
          NOCCSID (No Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for display files
          OPENPRT (Open Printer File) keyword for display files
          OVERLAY (Overlay) keyword for display files
          OVRATR (Override Attribute) keyword for display files
          OVRDTA (Override Data) keyword for display files
          PAGEDOWN/PAGEUP (Page Down/Page Up) keywords for display files
          PASSRCD (Passed Record) keyword for display files
          PRINT (Print) keyword for display files
          PROTECT (Protect) keyword for display files
          PSHBTNCHC (Push Button Field Choice) keyword for display files
          PSHBTNFLD (Push Button Field) keyword for display files
          PULLDOWN (Pull-Down Menu) keyword for display files
          PUTOVR (Put with Explicit Override) keyword for display files
          PUTRETAIN (Put-Retain) keyword for display files
          RANGE (Range) keyword for display files
          REF (Reference) keyword for display files
          REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword for display files
          RETKEY (Retain Function Keys) and RETCMDKEY (Retain Command Keys) keywords for display files
          RETLCKSTS (Retain Lock Status) keyword for display files
          RMVWDW (Remove Window) keyword for display files
          ROLLUP/ROLLDOWN (Roll Up/Roll Down) keywords for display files
          RTNCSRLOC (Return Cursor Location) keyword for display files
          RTNDTA (Return Data) keyword for display files
          SETOF (Set Off) keyword for display files
          SETOFF (Set Off) keyword for display files
          SFL (Subfile) keyword for display files
          SFLCHCCTL (Subfile Choice Control) keyword for display files
          SFLCLR (Subfile Clear) keyword for display files
          SFLCSRPRG (Subfile Cursor Progression) keyword for display files
          SFLCSRRRN (Subfile Cursor Relative Record Number) keyword for display files
          SFLCTL (Subfile Control) keyword for display files
          SFLDLT (Subfile Delete) keyword for display files
          SFLDROP (Subfile Drop) keyword for display files
          SFLDSP (Subfile Display) keyword for display files
          SFLDSPCTL (Subfile Display Control) keyword for display files
          SFLEND (Subfile End) keyword for display files
          SFLENTER (Subfile Enter) keyword for display files
          SFLFOLD (Subfile Fold) keyword for display files
          SFLINZ (Subfile Initialize) keyword for display files
          SFLLIN (Subfile Line) keyword for display files
          SFLMLTCHC (Subfile Multiple Choice Selection List) keyword for display files
          SFLMODE (Subfile Mode) keyword for display files
          SFLMSG (Subfile Message) and SFLMSGID (Subfile Message Identifier) keywords for display files
          SFLMSGKEY (Subfile Message Key) keyword for display files
          SFLMSGRCD (Subfile Message Record) keyword for display files
          SFLNXTCHG (Subfile Next Changed) keyword for display files
          SFLPAG (Subfile Page) keyword for display files
          SFLPGMQ (Subfile Program Message Queue) keyword for display files
          SFLRCDNBR (Subfile Record Number) keyword for display files
          SFLRNA (Subfile Records Not Active) keyword for display files
          SFLROLVAL (Subfile Roll Value) keyword for display files
          SFLRTNSEL (Subfile Return Selected Choices) keyword for display files
          SFLSCROLL (Subfile Scroll) keyword for display files
          SFLSIZ (Subfile Size) keyword for display files
          SFLSNGCHC (Subfile Single Choice Selection List) keyword for display files
          SLNO (Starting Line Number) keyword for display files
          SNGCHCFLD (Single-Choice Selection Field) keyword for display files
          SYSNAME (System Name) keyword for display files
          TEXT (Text) keyword for display files
          TIME (Time) keyword for display files
          TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword for display files
          TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword for display files
          UNLOCK (Unlock) keyword for display files
          USER (User) keyword for display files
          USRDFN (User-Defined) keyword for display files
          USRDSPMGT (User Display Management) keyword for display files
          USRRSTDSP (User Restore Display) keyword for display files
          VALNUM (Validate Numeric) keyword for display files
          VALUES (Values) keyword for display files
          VLDCMDKEY (Valid Command Key) keyword for display files
          WDWBORDER (Window Border) keyword for display files
          WDWTITLE (Window Title) keyword for display files
          WINDOW (Window) keyword for display files
          WRDWRAP (Word Wrap) keyword for display files
        DDS for 3270 remote attachment
        System/36 environment considerations for display files
          Keyword considerations for display files used in the System/36 environment
            ALTNAME (Alternative Record Name) keyword
            CHANGE record-level keyword
            HELP and HLPRTN keyword
            MSGID keyword
            PRINT(*PGM) keyword
            RETKEY (Retain Function Keys) and RETCMDKEY (Retain Command Keys) keywords
              RETKEY keyword
              RETCMDKEY keyword
              Considerations for specifying RETKEY and RETCMDKEY keywords
            USRDSPMGT (User Display Management) keyword
        Unicode considerations for display files
          Positional entry considerations for display files that use Unicode data
          Keyword considerations for display files that use Unicode data (positions 45 through 80)
            CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword
        Double-byte character set considerations for DDS
          Positional entry considerations for display files that use DBCS
            Length (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type (position 35)
            Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
          Keyword considerations for display files that use DBCS
            CNTFLD (Continued-Entry Field) keyword
            GRDATR (Grid Attribute) keyword
            GRDBOX (Grid Box) keyword
            GRDCLR (Grid Clear) keyword
            GRDLIN (Grid Line) keyword
            GRDRCD (Grid Record) keyword
            IGCALTTYP (Alternative Data Type) keyword
            IGCCNV (DBCS Conversion) keyword
          Additional considerations for describing display files that contain DBCS data
      DDS for printer files
        PDF file for DDS for printer files
        Defining a printer file
          Conventions and terminology for DDS information
          Positional entries for printer files (positions 1 through 44)
            Sequence number for printer files (positions 1 through 5)
            Form type for printer files (position 6)
            Comment for printer files (position 7)
            Condition for printer files (positions 7 through 16)
            Type of name or specification for printer files (position 17)
            Reserved for printer files (position 18)
            Name for printer files (positions 19 through 28)
              Record format name in printer files
              Field name in printer files
              Constant fields in printer files
            Reference for printer files (position 29)
            Length for printer files (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type for printer files (position 35)
            Decimal positions for printer files (positions 36 and 37)
            Usage for printer files (position 38)
            Location for printer files (positions 39 through 44)
              Line (positions 39 through 41)
              Position (positions 42 through 44)
        Keyword entries for printer files (positions 45 through 80)
          Keywords that require AFP(*YES) in printer device descriptions
          AFPRSC (AFP Resource) keyword in printer files
          ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword in printer files
          BARCODE (Bar Code) keyword in printer files
          BLKFOLD (Blank Fold) keyword in printer files
          BOX (Box) keyword in printer files
          CDEFNT (Coded Font Name) keyword in printer files
          CHRID (Character Identifier) keyword in printer files
          CHRSIZ (Character Size) keyword in printer files
          COLOR (Color) keyword in printer files
          CPI (Characters Per Inch) keyword in printer files
          CVTDTA (Convert Data) keyword in printer files
          DATE (Date) keyword in printer files
          DATFMT (Date Format) keyword in printer files
          DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword in printer files
          DFNCHR (Define Character) keyword in printer files
            Selecting which code points to redefine
            Dot matrix
            Specifying dots to be printed in the dot matrix
          DFT (Default) keyword in printer files
          DLTEDT (Delete Edit) keyword in printer files
          DOCIDXTAG (Document Index Tag) keyword in printer files
          DRAWER (Drawer) keyword in printer files
          DTASTMCMD (Data Stream Command) keyword in printer files
          DUPLEX (Duplex) keyword in printer files
          EDTCDE (Edit Code) keyword in printer files
            IBM i edit codes in printer files
            User-defined edit codes in printer files
          EDTWRD (Edit Word) keyword in printer files
            Parts of an edit word in printer files
            Forming the body of an edit word in printer files
            Forming the status of an edit word in printer files
            Formatting the expansion of an edit word in printer files
          ENDPAGE (End Page) keyword in printer files
          ENDPAGGRP (End Page Group) keyword in printer files
          FLTFIXDEC (Floating-Point to Fixed Decimal) keyword in printer files
          FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword in printer files
          FNTCHRSET (Font Character Set) keyword in printer files
          FONT (Font) keyword in printer files
          FONTNAME (Font name) keyword in printer files
          FORCE (Force) keyword in printer files
          GDF (Graphic Data File) keyword in printer files
          HIGHLIGHT (Highlight) keyword in printer files
          INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword in printer files
          INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword in printer files
          INVDTAMAP (Invoke Data Map) keyword in printer files
          INVMMAP (Invoke Medium Map) keyword in printer files
          LINE (Line) keyword in printer files
          LPI (Lines Per Inch) keyword in printer files
          MSGCON (Message Constant) keyword in printer files
          OUTBIN (Output Bin) keyword in printer files
          OVERLAY (Overlay) keyword in printer files
          PAGNBR (Page Number) keyword in printer files
          PAGRTT (Page Rotation) keyword in printer files
          PAGSEG (Page Segment) keyword in printer files
          POSITION (Position) keyword in printer files
          PRTQLTY (Print Quality) keyword in printer files
          REF (Reference) keyword in printer files
          REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword in printer files
          RELPOS (Relative Position) keyword in printer files
          SKIPA (Skip After) keyword in printer files
          SKIPB (Skip Before) keyword in printer files
          SPACEA (Space After) keyword in printer files
          SPACEB (Space Before) keyword in printer files
          STAPLE (Staple) keyword in printer files
          STRPAGGRP (Start Page Group) keyword in printer files
          TEXT (Text) keyword in printer files
          TIME (Time) keyword in printer files
          TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword in printer files
          TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword in printer files
          TRNSPY (Transparency) keyword in printer files
          TXTRTT (Text Rotation) keyword in printer files
          UNDERLINE (Underline) keyword in printer files
          UNISCRIPT (Unicode Text Layout) keyword in printer files
          ZFOLD (Z-fold) keyword in printer files
        CODE128 character set in DDS
        Unicode considerations for printer files
          Positional entry considerations for printer files that use UTF-16 data
          Keyword considerations for printer files that use UTF-16 data (positions 45 through 80)
            CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword
        DBCS considerations for printer files
          Positional entry considerations for printer files that use DBCS
            Length (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type or keyboard shift (position 35)
            Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
          Keyword considerations for printer files that use DBCS
            CHRSIZ (Character Size) keyword
            DFNLIN (Define Line) keyword
            IGCALTTYP (Alternative Data Type) keyword
            IGCANKCNV (Alphanumeric-to-DBCS Conversion) keyword
            IGCCDEFNT (DBCS Coded Font) keyword
            IGCCHRRTT (DBCS Character Rotation) keyword
          Additional considerations for describing printer files that contain DBCS data
        Related information for DDS for printer files
      DDS for ICF files
        PDF file for DDS for ICF files
        Defining an ICF file using DDS
          Sequence number for ICF files (positions 1 through 5)
          Form type for ICF files (position 6)
          Comment for ICF files (position 7)
          Condition for ICF files (positions 7 through 16)
          Type of name or specification for ICF files (position 17)
          Reserved for ICF files (position 18)
          Name for ICF files (positions 19 through 28)
          Reference for ICF files (position 29)
          Length for ICF files (positions 30 through 34)
          Data type for ICF files (position 35)
          Decimal positions for ICF files (positions 36 and 37)
          Usage for ICF files (position 38)
          Location for ICF files (positions 39 through 44)
        DDS keyword entries for ICF files (positions 45 through 80)
          ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for ICF files
          ALWWRT (Allow Write) keyword for ICF files
          CANCEL (Cancel) keyword for ICF files
          CNLINVITE (Cancel Invite) keyword for ICF files
          CONFIRM (Confirm) keyword for ICF files
          CTLDTA (Control Data) keyword for ICF files
          DETACH (Detach) keyword for ICF files
          DFREVOKE (Defer Evoke) keyword for ICF files
          ENDGRP (End of Group) keyword for ICF files
          EOS (End of Session) keyword for ICF files
          EVOKE (Evoke) keyword for ICF files
          FAIL (Fail) keyword for ICF files
          FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword for ICF files
          FMH (Function Management Header) keyword for ICF files
          FMTNAME (Format Name) keyword for ICF files
          FRCDTA (Force Data) keyword for ICF files
          INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword for ICF files
          INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword for ICF files
          INVITE (Invite) keyword for ICF files
          NEGRSP (Negative Response) keyword for ICF files
          PRPCMT (Prepare for Commit) keyword for ICF files
          RCVCANCEL (Receive Cancel) keyword for ICF files
          RCVCONFIRM (Receive Confirm) keyword for ICF files
          RCVCTLDTA (Receive Control Data) keyword for ICF files
          RCVDETACH (Receive Detach) keyword for ICF files
          RCVENDGRP (Receive End of Group) keyword for ICF files
          RCVFAIL (Receive Fail) keyword for ICF files
          RCVFMH (Receive Function Management Header) keyword for ICF files
          RCVNEGRSP (Receive Negative Response) keyword for ICF files
          RCVROLLB (Receive Rollback Response Indicator) keyword for ICF files
          RCVTKCMT (Receive Take Commit Response Indicator) keyword for ICF files
          RCVTRNRND (Receive Turnaround) keyword for ICF files
          RECID (Record Identification) keyword for ICF files
          REF (Reference) keyword for ICF files
          REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword for ICF files
          RQSWRT (Request Write) keyword for ICF files
          RSPCONFIRM (Respond Confirm) keyword for ICF files
          SECURITY (Security) keyword for ICF files
          SUBDEV (Subdevice) keyword for ICF files
          SYNLVL (Synchronization Level) keyword for ICF files
          TEXT (Text) keyword for ICF files
          TIMER (Timer) keyword for ICF files
          TNSSYNLVL (Transaction Synchronization Level) keyword for ICF files
          VARBUFMGT (Variable Buffer Management) keyword for ICF files
          VARLEN (Variable-Length User Data) keyword for ICF files
        DBCS considerations for ICF files
          Positional entry considerations for ICF files that use DBCS
          Additional considerations for describing ICF files that contain DBCS data
    Development tools
      ADTS
      System i5 Debugger
        PDF file for System i5 Debugger
        System i5 Debugger components
        Installing System i5 Debugger
        Running System i5 Debugger
        Related information for System i5 Debugger
      i5/OS PASE shells and utilities
      Qshell
      Rational Development Studio support
    Device
      Application Display Programming
      ASCII Work Station Reference
      Basic printing
      IBM Portable Utilities for i
      Optical device programming
        PDF file for Optical device programming
        Optical device programming concepts
          Integrated file system and optical device programming
          Hierarchical file system and optical device programming
          Volume, directory, and file considerations
        Integrated file system programming for i5/OS
          Integrated file system APIs
          Integrated file system generic commands
          Examples: Integrated file system
        Hierarchical file system programming
          Hierarchical File System APIs
          Control file system functions
          Standard attributes
          Extended attributes
          Copied file attributes using hierarchical file system
          Example: Programming Hierarchical File System APIs for the optical file system
        Tips: Optical device programming
          Media capacity and volume threshold
          Media capacity management on a per-file basis
          Expanding buffer I/O method
          Forced buffered data APIs
          Management of held optical files
          Path names requirements
          Examples: Moving spooled files to and from optical storage
        Related information
      Workstation Customization Programming
    i5/OS globalization
      PDF file for i5/OS globalization
      Globalization overview
        Multiple language support
        National language version
        i5/OS translations
        National language design in i5/OS
          Character representation
            Encoding scheme
            Conversion of character data
            Coded character set identifier values
            Character data integrity
          Character processing
          Character presentation
          Globalization hardware support in System i
          Character data translation
          Locales
        Linguistic and cultural values
          User profiles
          Subsystems
            Creating a subsystem description
            Subsystem attributes
            Workstation entry
            Starting a subsystem
          Job attributes
            Coded character set identifier job attribute
            Job default coded character set identifier
            Job library list
          System values
            Century (QCENTURY) system value
            Character identifier (QCHRID) system value
            Character identifier control (QCHRIDCTL) system value
            Coded character set identifier (QCCSID) system value
            Coordinated universal time offset (QUTCOFFSET) system value
            Country or region identifier (QCNTRYID) system value
            Currency symbol (QCURSYM) system value
            System date (QDATE) system value
            Date format (QDATFMT) system value
            Date separator (QDATSEP) system value
            Day of the month (QDAY) system value
            Day of week (QDAYOFWEEK) system value
            DBCS system indicator (QIGC) system value
            DBCS font name (QIGCCDEFNT) system value
            Decimal format (QDECFMT) system value
            Language identifier (QLANGID) system value
            Language indicator for keyboard type (QKBDTYPE) system value
            Leap year adjustment (QLEAPADJ) system value
            Locale (QLOCALE) system value
            Month of the year (QMONTH) system value
            Set job attributes (QSETJOBATR) system value
            Sort sequence (QSRTSEQ) system value
            System library list (QSYSLIBL) system value
            Time separator (QTIMSEP) system value
            Year (QYEAR) system value
          Device descriptions
          Display and printer files
          Database files
          UIM menus and panel groups
      Setting up i5/OS with a national language version
        How a language is displayed for i5/OS functions
        Installation preparation and national languages
        Checklist: Globalization planning
        Hardware installation and national languages
          Console device
          Workstation considerations
          Considerations for changing printers
        Software installation and national languages
        Configuring a national language version
          User profile name considerations
          Service tools
          System and user interfaces
            Automatic device configuration
            Automatic character set and code page conversion
            Printer file conversion
          Configuring the primary language
          Configuring secondary languages
            Notes on secondary languages when you require English as the primary language
            Enabling the secondary language
            Multilingual support
          Installing and enabling locales
        Scenarios: Setting up i5/OS with a national language version
          Scenario: A single system supporting Spanish
          Scenario: A single system supporting Spanish and an existing EBCDIC database
          Scenario: A single system supporting English, Japanese, and German
      Developing globalized applications
        Goals and processes
          Globalization development goals
          Market research process
          Development process
          Documentation process
          Translation process
          Testing process
          Packaging and installation process
          Application maintenance process
        Designing globalized applications
          Checklist: Application design
          Globalization and localization
          Application arrangement and architecture
            Program module separation
            Application part names
            Specification references
            Database definitions
          User interfaces
            Checklist: User interface design
            Text translation design
            Textual data code design
              Early message binding
              Late message binding
              Direct coding as an unnamed output field
              Text stored in database files
            User interface manager
              Online help design
              Index search tags
              Index search and double-byte character set
            Program message design
            Menu design
            Command design
            Cultural-dependent design
              Database file attributes
              Job attributes
              Program attributes
              Information in message CPX8416
              Date formats
              Date separators
              Edit date presentation
              Time formats
              Time separators
              Edit time presentation
              Decimal formats
              Sort sequences
            Display file design
              Constant text strings
              Input and output fields
              Field editing specifications
              Cursor positioning specifications
              Input field default values
              Field validation specifications
              Error messages
            Printer file design and translation
            Source file design
            Character data representation architecture design
              Use of the Send Network File command
              Scenario: Multilingual single system
              Scenario: Multilingual network
            Handling languages with no NLV support
        Programming considerations in globalized application design
          Coding globalized applications with high-level languages
            Language compilers CCSID
            Session manager
            ILE C considerations
            ILE RPG sort sequence
            ILE COBOL sort sequence
            DB2 and SQL sort sequence
            System i Access sort sequence
          Coding globalized applications that use bidirectional data
          Using message catalogs
            Source for message catalogs
            Opening, extracting, and closing message catalogs
        Delivering globalized applications
      Handling data in globalized applications
        Working with Unicode
          Why use Unicode
          Different encodings of Unicode
            UTF-8
            UTF-16
            UTF-32
          UCS-2 and its relationship to Unicode (UTF-16)
          How Unicode relates to prior standards such as ASCII and EBCDIC
          International Components for Unicode
          Mapping of data
            Example: Displaying data without Unicode
            Example: Displaying data with Unicode
          Unicode on i5/OS
            Database files and functions
            DB2 for i
            SQL tables
            Query files and tools
            Data description specifications
            Display files and panel groups
            Unicode variables in user interface manager
        GB18030: The Chinese standard
        Working with CCSIDs
          Recommendations and guidelines for using CCSIDs
          i5/OS function support for CCSIDs
            Database management
            Work management
            Workstation function management
              Display files
              Printer files
              User interface manager menus and panel groups
            CCSID support for messages
              Handling messages with a specific object-level CCSID
                Object-level coded character set identifier 65535
                Using a specific object-level CCSID for handling messages
              Message-level support
                Message-level CCSID with a message queue CCSID of 65535 or 65534
                Message-level CCSID with a specific message queue CCSID
                Message-level CCSID when a message queue CCSID conversion error occurs
                Message-level CCSID when a message is a stored message
              Message description-level support
                Message file with a CCSID of 65535 or 65534
                Message file with a specific CCSID
                Changing the CCSID of a message description
              Message queues
              Job message queues
              System reply list
              History log
              Setting up CCSID support for message handling
              CCSID support for message catalogs
              Converted character replacement data type field
              Retrieving messages
                CCSID of the text returned (TXTCCSID) return field
                CCSID conversion status indicator (TXTCCSTA) return field
                Replacement data CCSID conversion status indicator (MDTACCSTA) return field
              Receiving messages
                CCSID of the message text returned (TXTCCSID) return field
                CCSID of the replacement data returned (DTACCSID) return field
              Common questions about CCSID support for handling messages
                When is the job default CCSID used for handling messages?
                How can I determine if a message description is defined with *CCHAR?
                Can the length of *CCHAR replacement data change?
                Can I correct the CCSID of a message queue?
                Can I correct the CCSID of a message file?
                Can I correct the CCSID of a message?
                Can I correct the CCSID of a message description?
          Changing the CCSID of a physical file
          Character sorting
            i5/OS sort sequence support
              Sort sequence tables
                Sort sequence for Arabic
              Sort sequence support
                Sort sequence support in programs
                Sort sequence support in work management
                Sort sequence support in database management
                Sort sequence support in other system components
              Sort sequence scenarios
              Sort sequence types
            ICU-based sort support
              ICU-based sort sequence types
              ICU locales and sort tables provided by the system
              Sort sequence scenarios
              ICU-based sort sequence support
        Working with bidirectional data
          Bidirectional application support
          Checklist: Bidirectional support guidelines
        Working with DBCS data
          Checklist: DBCS application design
          Developing applications that process DBCS data
            Use of double-byte data
            DBCS coding considerations
              Creating physical files
              Target physical files
              Using DBCS CCSIDs
              Using DDS keywords
              DBCS file data types
              The Katakana code page (00290)
              Unicode support and IBM DBCS displays
            Processing double-byte characters
            Display support
            Making printer files DBCS capable
            Copying spooled and nonspooled DBCS files
            Changing alphanumeric programs to DBCS programs
            Entering DBCS text in CL commands
            DBCS conversion
              Conversion dictionaries
              Working with DBCS conversion dictionaries
              Japanese DBCS conversion
            SQL and DBCS
              SQL graphic strings
              SQL assignments and comparisons
              SQL conversion rules
          DBCS code schemes
          DBCS font tables
            Copying a DBCS font table
            Deleting a DBCS font table
          DBCS font files
          DBCS sort tables
            Saving and restoring a DBCS sort table
            Deleting a DBCS sort table
          DBCS field definition
        Working with locales
          Locale restrictions
          Locale categories
            LC_COLLATE category
            LC_CTYPE category
            LC_MESSAGES category
            LC_MONETARY category
            LC_NUMERIC category
            LC_TIME category
            LC_TOD category
          Locale symbolic names
          Examples: Locale programming
            Example: How locales work
            Example: Creating and enabling a locale
            Example: Producing unique monetary formats
            Example: Locales as part of a multilingual environment
            Example: POSIX locale
            Example: EN_US locale
      Globalization reference information
        National language version feature codes
        Country and region identifiers
        Default system values for national language versions
          Albanian (Feature 2995)
          Arabic (Feature 2954)
          Belgian Dutch MNCS (Feature 2963)
          Belgium English (Feature 2909)
          Belgian French MNCS (Feature 2966)
          Brazilian Portuguese (Feature 2980)
          Bulgarian (Feature 2974)
          Canadian French MNCS (Feature 2981)
          Croatian (Feature 2912)
          Czech (Feature 2975)
          Danish (Feature 2926)
          Dutch Netherlands (Feature 2923)
          English Uppercase and Lowercase (Feature 2924)
          English Uppercase DBCS (Feature 2938)
          English Uppercase and Lowercase DBCS (Feature 2984)
          Estonian (Feature 2902)
          Farsi (Feature 2998)
          Finnish (Feature 2925)
          French (Feature 2928)
          French MNCS (Feature 2940)
          German (Feature 2929)
          German MNCS (Feature 2939)
          Greek (Feature 2957)
          Hebrew (Feature 2961)
          Hungarian (Feature 2976)
          Icelandic (Feature 2958)
          Italian (Feature 2932)
          Italian MNCS (Feature 2942)
          Japanese Universal (Feature 2930)
          Japanese (Katakana) (Feature 2962)
          Korean (Feature 2986)
          Laotian (Feature 2906)
          Latvian (Feature 2904)
          Lithuanian (Feature 2903)
          Macedonian (Feature 2913)
          Norwegian (Feature 2933)
          Polish (Feature 2978)
          Portuguese (Feature 2922)
          Portuguese MNCS (Feature 2996)
          Romanian (Feature 2992)
          Russian (Feature 2979)
          Serbian (Feature 2914)
          Simplified Chinese (Feature 2989)
          Slovakian (Feature 2994)
          Slovenian (Feature 2911)
          Spanish (Feature 2931)
          Swedish (Feature 2937)
          Thai (Feature 2972)
          Traditional Chinese (Feature 2987)
          Turkish (Feature 2956)
          Vietnamese (Feature 2905)
        System values for other languages with no national language version
        Workstation controllers reference
          Twinaxial workstation controller requirements
          ASCII workstation controller requirements
          5394 remote workstation controller requirements
          Determining the number of supported keyboard types
        Keyboard reference information
          Keyboard layouts
            Albanian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Arabic IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Austrian German IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Belgian Multinational IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Brazilian Portuguese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Bulgarian Cyrillic IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Canadian French IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Croatian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Czech IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Danish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Dutch IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Farsi IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Finnish/Swedish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            French (AZERTY) IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Greek IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Hebrew IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Hebrew, Latin IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Hungarian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Italian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Japanese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Korean IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Macedonian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Norwegian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Polish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Portuguese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Romanian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Russian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Serbian Cyrillic IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Slovakian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Slovenian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Spanish-Speaking IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Spanish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Swiss-Bilingual-French IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Swiss-Bilingual-German IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Traditional Chinese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            Turkish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            U.K. English IBM Enhanced Keyboard
            U.S. English IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          SBCS keyboard and display part numbers by language
          Special-character keyboard set
          National language keyboard types and SBCS code pages
        Code pages
        Character sets
          Country extended character set 00697
          Graphic character conversion tables
          International DP 94 00103 (ASCII)
          Character set 01169 (International Alphabet 5)
          Invariant character set
          Monocase tables
          Portable character set
          Syntactic/invariant character set 00640
          T.61 Character Set 01252
          T.61 Character Repertoire 01253
          T.61 graphic character conversions
        CCSID reference information
          CCSID values defined on i5/OS
          Supported CCSID mappings
          Associated CCSIDs
          Encoding schemes for the CCSIDs
          Language identifiers and associated default CCSIDs
        Locale reference information
          System-supplied locales and recommended CCSIDs
          Mapping of locale symbolic names
        UCS-2 level-1 mapping tables
          Unicode uppercase to lowercase conversion mapping table
          Unicode lowercase to uppercase conversion mapping table
        REXX extension characters
          REXX/400 extension characters: Axxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Bxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Gxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Hxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Jxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Kxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Lxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Nxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Oxxxxxxx GCGIDs
          REXX/400 extension characters: Sxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        Default character data conversion that can use substitution
      Globalization checklists
      Related information for i5/OS globalization
    IBM PASE for i
      What's new for IBM i 7.1
      PDF file for IBM PASE for i
      IBM PASE for i overview
        IBM PASE for i concepts
        IBM PASE for i as a useful option for application development
      Installing IBM PASE for i
      Planning for IBM PASE for i
      Preparing programs to run in IBM PASE for i
        Analyzing program compatibility with IBM PASE for i
        Compiling your AIX source
          Installing AIX compilers on IBM i
            Installing the AIX compilers from the installation media
            PTF update instructions
        Copying the IBM PASE for i program to your system
          Case sensitivity
          Line-terminating characters in integrated file system files
          Transferring files
        Customizing IBM PASE for i programs to use IBM i functions
          Copying header files
          Copying export files
          IBM PASE for i APIs for accessing IBM i functions
      Using IBM PASE for i programs in the IBM i environment
        Running IBM PASE for i programs and procedures
          Running an IBM PASE for i program with QP2SHELL()
          Running an IBM PASE for i program with QP2TERM()
          Running an IBM PASE for i program from within IBM i programs
            Examples: Running an IBM PASE for i program from within IBM i programs
          Calling an IBM PASE for i procedure from within IBM i programs
            Example 1: Calling an IBM PASE for i procedure from within IBM i programs
            Example 2: An IBM i ILE program that uses pointer arguments in a call to an IBM PASE for i procedure
          Using IBM PASE for i native methods from Java
          Working with environment variables
        Calling IBM i programs and procedures from your IBM PASE for i programs
          Calling ILE procedures
            Examples: Calling ILE procedures
          Calling IBM i programs from IBM PASE for i
            Example: Calling IBM i programs from IBM PASE for i
          Running IBM i commands from IBM PASE for i
            Example: Running IBM i commands from IBM PASE for i
        How IBM PASE for i programs interact with IBM i
          Communications
          Database
            Example: Calling DB2 for i CLI functions in an PASE for i program
          Data encoding
          File systems
          Globalization
          Message services
          Printing output from IBM PASE for i applications
          Pseudo-terminal (PTY)
          Security
          Work management
      Debugging your IBM PASE for i programs
      Optimizing performance
      IBM PASE for i shells and utilities
        IBM PASE for i commands
        IBM PASE for i system utility
        IBM PASE for i qsh, qsh_inout, and qsh_out commands
      Examples: IBM PASE for i
      Related information
    System i Access
    Java
      ABLE 2.0
      IBM Developer Kit for Java
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for IBM Developer Kit for Java
        Installing and configuring Java
          Installing Java on your IBM i server
            Considerations for using IBM Technology for Java Virtual Machine
            Installing a licensed program with the Restore Licensed Program command
            Support for multiple Java Development Kits (JDKs)
            Installing Java extensions
            Downloading and installing Java packages
          Running your first Hello World Java program
          Creating, compiling, and running a HelloWorld Java program
          Mapping a network drive to your server
          Creating and editing Java source files
        Customizing your IBM i server for Java usage
          Java classpath
          Java system properties
            SystemDefault.properties file
            List of Java system properties
          Internationalization
            Time zone configuration
            Java character encodings
              File.encoding values and IBM i CCSID
              Default file.encoding values
            Examples: Creating an internationalized Java program
        Release-to-release compatibility
        Database access from Java programs
          Accessing your IBM i database with the Java JDBC driver
            Getting started with JDBC
              Types of JDBC drivers
              JDBC requirements
              JDBC tutorial
                Example: JDBC
              Setting up JNDI for the Java examples
            Connections
              Java DriverManager class
                Example: Invalid user ID and password
              JDBC driver connection properties
              Using DataSources with UDBDataSource
                Example: Creating a UDBDataSource and binding it with JNDI
                Example: Creating a UDBDataSourceBind and setting DataSource properties
                Example: Obtaining an initial context before binding UDBDataSource
                Example: Creating a UDBDataSource and obtaining a user ID and password
              DataSource properties
            JVM properties for JDBC
            DatabaseMetaData interface
              Example: Returning a list of tables using the DatabaseMetaData interface
              Example: Using metadata ResultSets that have more than one column
            Java exceptions
              Java SQLException class
                Example: SQLException
              SQLWarning
              DataTruncation and silent truncation
            JDBC transactions
              JDBC auto-commit mode
              Transaction isolation levels
              Savepoints
            JDBC distributed transactions
              Example: Using JTA to handle a transaction
              Example: Multiple connections that work on a transaction
              Example: Using a connection with multiple transactions
              Example: Suspended ResultSets
              Example: Ending a transaction
              Example: Suspending and resuming a transaction
            Statement types
              Statement objects
                Example: Using the Statement object's executeUpdate method
              PreparedStatements
                Creating and using PreparedStatements
                  Example: ParameterMetaData
                Processing PreparedStatements
                Example: Using PreparedStatement to obtain a ResultSet
              CallableStatements
                Processing CallableStatements
                Example: Creating a procedure with multiple ResultSets
                Example: Creating a procedure with input and output parameters
                Example: Creating a procedure with return values
            ResultSets
              ResultSet characteristics
                Example: Sensitive and insensitive ResultSets
                Example: ResultSet sensitivity
              Cursor movement
              Retrieving ResultSet data
                Example: ResultSetMetaData interface
              Changing ResultSets
                Example: Removing values from a table through another statement's cursor
                Example: Changing values with a statement through another statement's cursor
              Creating ResultSets
              Example: ResultSet interface
            JDBC object pooling
              Using DataSource support for object pooling
                Example: Setting up connection pooling with UDBDataSource and UDBConnectionPoolDataSource
                Example: Testing the performance of connection pooling
              ConnectionPoolDataSource properties
              DataSource-based statement pooling
                Example: Testing the performance of two DataSources
              Building your own connection pooling
            Batch updates
              Statement batch update
              PreparedStatement batch update
              JDBC BatchUpdateException
              Blocked inserts with JDBC
            Advanced data types
              Writing code that uses BLOBs
                Example: BLOB
                Example: Updating BLOBs
                Example: Using BLOBs
              Writing code that uses CLOBs
                Example: CLOB
                Example: Updating CLOBs
                Example: Using CLOBs
              Writing code that uses Datalinks
                Example: Datalink
              Example: Distinct types
            JDBC RowSets
              RowSet characteristics
              DB2CachedRowSet
                Using DB2CachedRowSet
                Creating and populating a DB2CachedRowSet
                Accessing DB2CachedRowSet data and cursor manipulation
                Changing DB2CachedRowSet data and reflecting changes back to the data source
                DB2CachedRowSet features
              DB2JdbcRowSet
                DB2JdbcRowSet events
            Performance tips for the native JDBC driver
          Accessing databases using DB2 SQLJ support
            Structured Query Language for Java profiles
            The structured query language for Java (SQLJ) translator (sqlj)
            Precompiling SQL statements in a profile using the DB2 SQLJ profile customizer, db2profc
            Printing the contents of DB2 SQLJ profiles (db2profp and profp)
            SQLJ profile auditor installer (profdb)
            Converting a serialized profile instance to Java class format using the SQLJ profile conversion tool (profconv)
            Embedding SQL statements in your Java application
              Host variables in Structured Query Language for Java
              Example: Embedding SQL Statements in your Java application
            Compiling and running SQLJ programs
          Java SQL routines
            Using Java SQL routines
              Setting up your system to use SQLJ
            Java stored procedures
              JAVA parameter style
              DB2GENERAL parameter style
              Restrictions on Java stored procedures
            Java user-defined scalar functions
              Restrictions on Java user-defined functions
              Java user-defined table functions
            SQLJ procedures that manipulate JAR files
              SQLJ.INSTALL_JAR
              SQLJ.REMOVE_JAR
              SQLJ.REPLACE_JAR
              SQLJ.UPDATEJARINFO
              SQLJ.RECOVERJAR
              SQLJ.REFRESH_CLASSES
            Parameter passing conventions for Java stored procedures and UDFs
        Java with other programming languages
          Native methods and the Java Native Interface
            Getting started with Java native methods
            ILE native methods for Java
              Teraspace storage model native methods for Java
              Strings in ILE native methods
              Example: ILE native method for Java
            PASE for i native methods for Java
              Example: IBM PASE for i native method for Java
            Managing native method libraries
            Java native methods and threads considerations
          Java Invocation API
            Invocation API functions
            Support for multiple Java virtual machines
            Example: Java Invocation API
          Using java.lang.Runtime.exec()
            Example: Calling another Java program with java.lang.Runtime.exec()
            Example: Calling a CL program with java.lang.Runtime.exec()
            Example: Calling a CL command with java.lang.Runtime.exec()
          Interprocess communications
            Using sockets for interprocess communication
              Example: Using sockets for interprocess communication
            Using input and output streams for interprocess communication
              Example: Using input and output streams for interprocess communication
            Example: Calling Java from ILE C
            Example: Calling Java from RPG
        Java platform
          Java applets and applications
          Java virtual machine
          Java JAR and class files
          Java threads
          Java Development Kit
        Advanced topics
          Java classes, packages, and directories
          Java-related files in the IFS
          Java file authorities in the integrated file system
          Running Java in a batch job
        Running your Java application on a host that does not have a GUI
          Native Abstract Windowing Toolkit
            Selecting an AWT mode
              Using AWT in normal mode with full GUI support
                Creating a VNC password file
                Starting the VNC Server
                  Configuring NAWT environment variables
                Configuring the iceWM window manager
                Using a VNCviewer or Web browser
                Tips on using VNC
                Tips for using AWT with WebSphere Application Server
              Verifying your AWT configuration
        Java security
          Changes to adopted authority in IBM i 7.1
            Examples: Adopted authority alternatives
          Java security model
          Java Cryptography Extension
            Using hardware cryptography
              Key pairs and hardware utilization
          Java Secure Socket Extension
            Preparing your system for secure sockets layer support
            Changing your Java code to use socket factories
              Examples: Changing your Java code to use server socket factories
              Examples: Changing your Java code to use client socket factories
            Changing your Java code to use secure sockets layer
              Examples: Changing your Java server to use secure sockets layer
              Examples: Changing your Java client to use secure sockets layer
            Selecting a digital certificate
            Using the digital certificate when running your Java application
            Using Java Secure Socket Extension 1.4
              Configuring your system to support JSSE 1.4
                JSSE 1.4 providers
                JSSE 1.4 security properties
                JSSE for 1.4 Java system properties
              Using the native IBM i JSSE 1.4 provider
                SSLConfiguration Javadoc information for JSSE 1.4
              Examples: IBM Java Secure Sockets Extension 1.4
                Example: SSL client using an SSLContext object for version 1.4
                Example: SSL server using an SSLContext object for version 1.4
            Using Java Secure Socket Extension 1.5
              Configuring your server to support JSSE 1.5
                JSSE 1.5 providers
                JSSE 1.5 security properties
                JSSE for 1.5 Java system properties
              Using the native IBM i JSSE 1.5 provider
                i5OSLoadStoreParameter class Javadoc information
                i5OSSystemCertificateStoreFile class Javadoc information
                SSLConfiguration Javadoc information for version 1.5
              Examples: IBM Java Secure Sockets Extension 1.5
                Example: SSL client using an SSLContext object for version 1.5
                Example: SSL server using an SSLContext object for version 1.5
            Using Java Secure Socket Extension 6
              Configuring your server to support JSSE 6
                JSSE 6 providers
                JSSE 6 security properties
                JSSE for 6 Java system properties
              Using the native IBM i JSSE 6 provider
                i5OSLoadStoreParameter class Javadoc information
                i5OSSystemCertificateStoreFile class Javadoc information
                SSLConfiguration Javadoc information for version 6
              Examples: IBM Java Secure Sockets Extension 6
                Example: SSL client using an SSLContext object for version 6
                Example: SSL server using an SSLContext object for version 6
          Java Authentication and Authorization Service
            Java Authentication and Authorization Service (JAAS) 1.0
          IBM Java Generic Security Service (JGSS)
            JGSS concepts
              JGSS principals and credentials
                com.ibm.security.krb5.internal.tools Class Klist
                com.ibm.security.krb5.internal.tools Class Kinit
                com.ibm.security.krb5.internal.tools Class Ktab
              JGSS context establishment
              JGSS message protection and exchange
              Resource cleanup and release
              Security mechanisms
            Configuring your server to use IBM JGSS
              Configuring your IBM i to use JGSS
              JGSS providers
              Using a security manager
                JVM permissions
                JAAS permission checks
            Running IBM JGSS applications
              Obtaining Kerberos credentials and creating secret keys
              The kinit and ktab tools
              JAAS Kerberos login interface
              Configuration and policy files
            Developing IBM JGSS applications
              IBM JGSS application programming steps
                Creating a GSSManager
                Creating a GSSName
                Creating a GSSCredential
                Creating GSSContext
                Requesting optional JGSS security services
                Establishing JGSS context
                Using JGSS per-message services
                Deleting JGSS context
              Using JAAS with your JGSS application
            JGSS debugging
            Samples: IBM Java Generic Security Service (JGSS)
              Viewing the IBM JGSS samples
                Sample: Kerberos configuration file
                Sample: JAAS login configuration file
                Sample: JAAS policy file
                Sample: Java policy file
              Samples: Downloading and viewing Javadoc information for the IBM JGSS samples
              Samples: Downloading and running the sample JGSS programs
                Samples: Downloading the IBM JGSS samples
                Samples: Preparing to run the JGSS sample programs
                Samples: Running the JGSS sample programs
                Example: Running the non-JAAS sample
            IBM JGSS Javadoc reference information
        Tuning Java program performance
          Java garbage collection
          Java Native Method Invocation performance considerations
          Java exception performance considerations
          Java profiling performance tools
            Java Virtual Machine Tool Interface
          Collecting Java performance data
        Java commands and tools
          Java tools and utilities
            Standard Java tools and utilities
            IBM Java tools and utilities
              Java hwkeytool
            Additional Java tools and utilities
          CL commands that are supported by Java
        Debugging Java programs on IBM i
          Debugging Java programs using System i Debugger
            System debugging for IBM Technology for Java
            Debug operations
              Initial debugging displays for Java programs
              Setting breakpoints
              Stepping through Java programs
              Evaluating variables in Java programs
              Debugging Java and native method programs
            Using the QIBM_CHILD_JOB_SNDINQMSG environment variable for debug
            Debugging Java classes loaded through a custom class loader
            Debugging servlets
          Java Platform Debugger Architecture
          Finding memory leaks
          Using the Generate JVM Dump command
        Java Code examples
        Troubleshooting Java programs
          Limitations
          Finding job logs for Java problem analysis
          Collecting data for Java problem analysis
          Applying program temporary fixes
          Getting support for Java on IBM i
        Related information
          Java Naming and Directory Interface
          JavaMail
          Java Print Service
      IBM Toolbox for Java
        What's new for IBM i 7.1
        PDF file for IBM Toolbox for Java
        Class finder
        Installing and managing IBM Toolbox for Java
          Managing your IBM Toolbox for Java installation
          Installing IBM Toolbox for Java
            IBM i requirements for IBM Toolbox for Java
              Required IBM i options
              Determining if IBM Toolbox for Java is installed on your system
              Checking the QUSER profile
              Changing the QUSER user profile
              Dependencies on other licensed programs
              Compatibility with different levels of IBM i
              Native optimizations when running on the IBM i JVM
              ToolboxME requirements
            Workstation requirements for IBM Toolbox for Java
              Workstation requirements for running IBM Toolbox for Java applications
              Workstation requirements for running IBM Toolbox for Java applets
              ToolboxME requirements
              Workstation Swing requirements for IBM Toolbox for Java
            Installing IBM Toolbox for Java on your system
            Installing IBM Toolbox for Java on your workstation
              JAR files
          System properties
          Simple programming examples
        IBM Toolbox for Java classes
          Access classes
            Server access points
            AS400 class
              Managing default user IDs
              Using a password cache
              Prompting for user IDs and passwords
              Prompting, default user ID, and password caching summary
            SecureAS400 class
            AS400JPing class
            BidiTransform class
            BidiConversionProperties class
            CallStackEntry class
            ClusteredHashTable classes
            CommandCall class
            Connection pooling
            Data area
            Data conversion and description
              Conversion classes for numeric data
              Text conversion
              Conversion classes for composite types
              FieldDescription classes
              RecordFormat class
              Record class
              Retrieving the contents of a field
              Setting the contents of a field
              LineDataRecordWriter class
            Data queues
              Sequential data queues
              Keyed data queues
            Digital certificates
            EnvironmentVariable class
            Event log
            Exceptions
            FileAttributes class
            FTP class
            Integrated file system classes
              IFSFile class
              IFSJavaFile class
              IFSFileInputStream
              IFSTextFileInputStream class
              IFSFileReader
              IFSFileOutputStream class
              IFSTextFileOutputStream class
              IFSFileWriter
              IFSRandomAccessFile
              IFSFileDialog
              IFSKey class
              File sharing mode
              IFSSystemView
            ISeriesNetServer class
            JavaApplicationCall class
            JDBC classes
              AS400JDBCBlob class
              CallableStatement interface
              AS400JDBCClob class
              AS400JDBCConnection class
              AS400JDBCConnectionPool
              AS400JDBCManagedConnectionPoolDataSource class
                Examples: Using AS400JDBCManagedConnectionPoolDataSource class
              DatabaseMetaData interface
              AS400JDBCDataSource class
              Registering the JDBC driver
              AS400JDBCParameterMetaData class
              PreparedStatement interface
              ResultSet class
              AS400JDBCRowSet class
              AS400JDBCSavepoint class
              Running SQL statements with Statement objects
              JDBC XA Distributed Transaction Management
            Jobs classes
              Job class
              JobList class
              JobLog class
            Message classes
            NetServer class
            ObjectReferences class
            Permission classes
              DLOPermission class
              QSYSPermission
              RootPermission
            Print classes
              Listing Print objects
              Working with Print objects
              Retrieving PrintObject attributes
              AFP Resource Attributes
              Output queue attributes
              Printer Attributes
              Printer file attributes
              Spooled file attributes
              Writer Job Attributes
              Print Object Attributes
              Copying spooled files
              Creating new spooled files
              Generating an SCS data stream
              Reading spooled files and AFP resources
              Reading spooled files using PrintObjectPageInputStream and PrintObjectTransformedInputStream
            ProductLicense class
            ProgramCall class
            QSYSObjectPathName class
            Record-level access
              AS400File
              KeyedFile
              SequentialFile
              AS400FileRecordDescription
              Creating and deleting files and members
              Reading and writing records
              Locking files
              Using record blocking
              Setting the cursor position
              Commitment control
            SaveFile class
            ServiceProgramCall class
            Subsystem class
            SystemStatus classes
              SystemPool class
            System values
            Trace class
            User and group classes
            UserSpace class
          Commtrace classes
            Commtrace model
            Format and FormatProperties classes
              Running Format as a standalone program
            Prolog class
            Frame class
            LanHeader class
            IPPacket class
            Header class
            Example: Using the commtrace classes
          HTML Classes
            BidiOrdering class
            HTMLAlign class
            HTMLDocument class
              Using HTMLDocument to create HTML data
              Using HTMLDocument to create XSL FO data
                XSL FO-enabled classes
              Examples: Using HTMLDocument
            HTML form classes
              FormInput classes
                ButtonFormInput class
                FileFormInput class
                HiddenFormInput class
                ImageFormInput class
                ResetFormInput class
                SubmitFormInput class
                TextFormInput class
                PasswordFormInput class
                RadioFormInput class
                CheckboxFormInput class
              LayoutFormPanel class
                GridLayoutFormPanel
                LineLayoutFormPanel class
              TextAreaFormElement class
              LabelFormElement class
              SelectFormElement class
              SelectOption class
              RadioFormInputGroup class
            HTMLHead class
            HTMLHeading class
            HTMLHyperlink class
            HTMLImage class
            HTMLList classes
            HTMLMeta class
            HTMLParameter class
            HTMLServlet class
            HTML Table classes
              HTMLTableCell class
              HTMLTableRow class
              HTMLTableHeader class
              HTMLTableCaption class
            HTML Text class
            HTMLTree classes
              HTMLTreeElement class
              FileTreeElement class
              FileListElement class
              FileListRenderer class
          ReportWriter classes
            Context classes
            JSPReportProcessor class
            XSLReportProcessor class
          Resource classes
            Resource and ChangeableResource classes
            Resource lists
            Presentation class
          Security classes
            Secure Sockets Layer
              Using SSL to encrypt data between IBM Toolbox for Java and IBM i servers
                Setting up IBM i to use SSL
            Authentication services
          Servlet classes
            Authentication classes
            RowData class
              ListRowData class
              RecordListRowData class
              ResourceListRowData class
              SQLResultSetRowData class
            RowMetaData classes
              ListMetaData class
              RecordFormatMetaData class
              SQLResultSetMetaData class
            Converter classes
              StringConverter class
              HTMLFormConverter class
              HTMLTableConverter class
          Utility classes
            Client installation and update classes
            AS400ToolboxJarMaker
              Components supported by IBM Toolbox for Java
              CCSID and encoding values supported by IBM Toolbox for Java
            CommandHelpRetriever class
            CommandPrompter class
            RunJavaApplication
            JPing
          Vaccess classes
            Vaccess classes
            AS400Panes
            Command Call
            Data queues
            Error events
            IFS graphical user interface components
              IFSFileSystemView
              File dialogs
              Directories in AS400Panes
              IFSTextFileDocument
            VJavaApplicationCall class
            JDBC classes
              Buttons and menu items
              SQLStatementDocument class
              SQLResultSetFormPane class
              SQLResultSetTablePane class
              SQLResultSetTableModel class
              SQL query builders
            Jobs
            Vaccess message classes
              VMessageList class
              VMessageQueue class
            Permission classes
            Vaccess print classes
              VPrinters class
              VPrinter class
              VPrinterOutput class
              SpooledFileViewer class
            Vaccess ProgramCall classes
            Vaccess record-level access classes
              RecordListFormPane class
              RecordListTablePane class
              RecordListTablePane and RecordListTableModel classes
            ResourceListPane and ResourceListDetailsPane
            System status classes
              VSystemPool class
              VSystemStatusPane class
            System values GUI
            Vaccess users and groups classes
        Javadocs
        Graphical Toolbox and PDML
          Setting up the Graphical Toolbox
          Creating your user interface
          Displaying your panels at runtime
          Editing help documents generated by GUI Builder
          Graphical Toolbox examples
          Using the Graphical Toolbox in a browser
          GUI Builder Panel Builder toolbar
        IBM Toolbox for Java beans
        JDBC
          Enhancements to IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC support for IBM i 7.1
          Enhancements to IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC support for IBM i 6.1
          Enhancements to IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC support for IBM i 5.4
          IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC properties
            JDBC Librarylist property
          JDBC SQL Types
        Proxy Support
        Secure Sockets Layer and Java Secure Socket Extension
        IBM Toolbox for Java 2 Micro Edition
          ToolboxME requirements
          Downloading and setting up ToolboxME
          Concepts important for using ToolboxME
          ToolboxME classes
            MEServer class
            AS400 class
            CommandCall class - Micro package
            DataQueue class - Micro package
            Micro package - ProgramCall class
            JdbcMe classes
              Using ToolboxME to connect to a database on the host server
              JdbcMeDriver class
              Result sets
              JdbcMeOfflineData class
              JdbcMeStatement class
          Creating and running a ToolboxME program
          ToolboxME working examples
            Downloading the ToolboxME examples
        Extensible Markup Language components
          Program Call Markup Language
            Requirements for using PCML
            Building IBM i program calls with PCML
            PCML syntax
              PCML program tag
              PCML struct tag
              PCML data tag
                Values for length and precision
            Examples: Program Call Markup Language (PCML)
          Graphical Toolbox and PDML
          Record Format Markup Language
            Requirements for using RFML
            Example: Using RFML compared to using IBM Toolbox for Java Record classes
            RecordFormatDocument class
            Record format documents and RFML syntax
              RFML document type definition (DTD)
              The RFML data tag
              The RFML rfml tag
              The RFML recordformat tag
              The RFML struct tag
          XML parser and XSLT processor
          Extensible Program Call Markup Language
            Advantages of XPCML over PCML
            Requirements for using XPCML
            XPCML schema and syntax
              Comparison of XPCML source to PCML source
              Schema xpcml.xsd file
              XPCML syntax
              XPCML tag attributes
            Using XPCML
              Converting existing PCML to XPCML
              Using XPCML to call a program on your server
              Obtaining program call results as XPCML
              Passing in parameter values as XPCML
              Using condensed XPCML
              Identifying parse errors in XPCML
        Frequently asked questions (FAQ)
        Tips for programming
          Shutting down your Java program
          Integrated file system path names for server objects
          Managing connections in Java programs
          IBM i Java virtual machine
            Comparing the IBM i Java virtual machine and the IBM Toolbox for Java classes
            Running IBM Toolbox for Java classes on the IBM i Java virtual machine
            Setting system name, user ID, and password with an AS400 object in the IBM i Java virtual machine
          Independent auxiliary storage pool (ASP)
          Exceptions
          Error events
          Trace class
          IBM i optimization
          Performance improvements
          Client installation and update classes
          AS400ToolboxJarMaker
          Java national language support
          Service and support for the IBM Toolbox for Java
        Code examples
          Examples: Access classes
          Examples: JavaBeans
          Examples: Commtrace classes
          Graphical Toolbox examples
          Examples from the HTML classes
          Examples: Program Call Markup Language (PCML)
          Examples: ReportWriter classes
          Examples: Resource classes
          Examples: RFML
          Example: Using a profile token credential to swap the IBM i thread identity
          Examples from the servlet classes
          Simple programming examples
          Examples: Tips for programming
          Examples: ToolboxME
          Examples: Utility classes
          Examples: Vaccess classes
          Examples: XPCML
        Related information for IBM Toolbox for Java
      Qshell
    Programming languages
      C and C++
        ILE C/C++ Compiler Reference
          ILE C/C++ Compiler Reference
          About ILE C/C++ Compiler Reference (SC09-4816)
            Who Should Read This Book
            Prerequisite and Related Information
            Install Licensed Program Information
            A Note About Examples
            Control Language Commands
            How to Read the Syntax Diagrams
            How to Send Your Comments
            What is new for IBM i 7.1
          Predefined Macros
            ANSI/ISO Standard Predefined Macros
            ILE C/C++ Predefined Macros
          ILE C/C++ Pragmas
            Pragma directive syntax
            Scope of Pragma directives
            Summary of Pragma Directives
            Individual Pragma Descriptions
              argopt
              argument
              cancel_handler
              chars
              checkout
              comment
              convert
              datamodel
              define
              descriptor
              disable_handler
              disjoint
              do_not_instantiate
              enum
              exception_handler
              hashome
              implementation
              info
              inline
              ishome
              isolated_call
              linkage
              map
              mapinc
              margins
              namemangling
              namemanglingrule
              noargv0
              noinline (function)
              nomargins
              nosequence
              nosigtrunc
              pack
                Related Operators and Specifiers
                  __align Specifier
                  _Packed Specifier
                  __alignof Operator
                Examples
              page
              pagesize
              pointer
              priority
              sequence
              strings
              weak
          Control Language Commands
            Control Language Command Syntax
            Control Language Command Options
              MODULE
              PGM
              SRCFILE
              SRCMBR
              SRCSTMF
              TEXT
              OUTPUT
              OPTION
              CHECKOUT
              OPTIMIZE
              INLINE
              MODCRTOPT
              DBGVIEW
              DBGENCKEY
              DEFINE
              LANGLVL
              ALIAS
              SYSIFCOPT
              LOCALETYPE
              FLAG
              MSGLMT
              REPLACE
              USRPRF
              AUT
              TGTRLS
              ENBPFRCOL
              PFROPT
              PRFDTA
              TERASPACE
              STGMDL
              DTAMDL
              RTBND
              PACKSTRUCT
              ENUM
              MAKEDEP
              PPGENOPT
              PPSRCFILE
              PPSRCMBR
              PPSRCSTMF
              INCDIR
              CSOPT
              LICOPT
              DFTCHAR
              TGTCCSID
              TEMPLATE
              TMPLREG
              WEAKTMPL
              DECFLTRND
          Using the ixlc Command to Invoke the C/C++ Compiler
            Using ixlc in Qshell
            ixlc Command and Options Syntax
            ixlc Command Options
          I/O Considerations
            Data Management Operations on Record Files
            Data Management Operations on Stream Files
            C Streams and File Types
            DDS-to-C/C++ Data Type Mapping
          Appendix. Control Characters
          Bibliography
          Index
        PDF file for ILE C/C++ Compiler Reference
        ILE C/C++ Language Reference
          ILE C/C++ Language Reference
          About ILE C/C++ Language Reference (SC09-7852-01)
            Who should read this book
            Highlighting Conventions
            How to Read the Syntax Diagrams
            Prerequisite and related information
            How to send your comments
          What's new for IBM i 7.1
          Scope and linkage
            Scope
              Block/local scope
              Function scope
              Function prototype scope
              File/global scope
              Examples of scope in C
              Class scope (C++ only)
              Namespaces of identifiers
              Name hiding (C++ only)
            Program linkage
              Internal linkage
              External linkage
              No linkage
              Language linkage
                Name mangling (C++ only)
          Lexical elements
            Tokens
              Keywords
                Keywords for language extensions
              Identifiers
                Characters in identifiers
                Reserved identifiers
                The __func__ predefined identifier
              Literals
                Integer literals
                  Decimal integer literals
                  Hexadecimal integer literals
                  Octal integer literals
                Boolean literals
                Floating-point literals
                  Binary floating-point literals
                  Hexadecimal floating-point literals
                  Decimal floating-point literals
                Packed Decimal Literals
                Character literals
                String literals
                  String concatenation
              Punctuators and operators
                Alternative tokens
            Source program character set
              Multibyte characters
              Escape sequences
              The Unicode standard
              Digraph characters
              Trigraph sequences
            Comments
          Data objects and declarations
            Overview of data objects and declarations
              Overview of data objects
                Incomplete types
                Compatible and composite types
              Overview of data declarations and definitions
                Tentative definitions
            Storage class specifiers
              The auto storage class specifier
                Storage duration of automatic variables
                Linkage of automatic variables
              The static storage class specifier
                Linkage of static variables
              The extern storage class specifier
                Storage duration of external variables
                Linkage of external variables
              The mutable storage class specifier (C++ only)
              The register storage class specifier
                Storage duration of register variables
                Linkage of register variables
              The __thread storage class specifier
            Type specifiers
              Integral types
              Boolean types
              Floating-point types
                Real floating-point types
              Character types
              The void type
              Compatibility of arithmetic types (C only)
            User-defined types
              Structures and unions
                Structure and union type definition
                Member declarations
                  Flexible array members
                  Zero-extent array members
                  Bit field members
                Structure and union variable declarations
                Structure and union type and variable definitions in a single statement
                Access to structure and union members
                Anonymous unions
              Enumerations
                Enumeration type definition
                  Enumeration members
                Enumeration variable declarations
                Enumeration type and variable definitions in a single statement
              Compatibility of structures, unions, and enumerations (C only)
                Compatibility across separate source files
              typedef definitions
                Examples of typedef definitions
            Type qualifiers
              The __align type qualifier
                Examples using the __align qualifier
              The const type qualifier
              The restrict type qualifier
              The volatile type qualifier
            Type attributes
              The aligned type attribute
              The packed type attribute
              The transparent_union type attribute (C only)
          Declarators
            Overview of declarators
              Examples of declarators
            Type names
            Pointers
              Pointer arithmetic
              Type-based aliasing
              Compatibility of pointers (C only)
            Arrays
              Variable length arrays (C++ only)
              Compatibility of arrays
            References (C++ only)
            Initializers
              Initialization and storage classes
                Initialization of automatic variables
                Initialization of static variables
                Initialization of external variables
                Initialization of register variables
              Initialization of structures and unions
              Initialization of enumerations
              Initialization of pointers
              Initialization of arrays
                Initialization of character arrays
                Initialization of multidimensional arrays
              Initialization of references (C++ only)
                Direct binding
            Variable attributes
              The aligned variable attribute
              The packed variable attribute
              The mode variable attribute
              The weak variable attribute
          Type conversions
            Arithmetic conversions and promotions
              Integral conversions
              Boolean conversions
              Floating-point conversions
              Integral and floating-point promotions
            Lvalue-to-rvalue conversions
            Pointer conversions
              Conversion to void*
            Reference conversions (C++ only)
            Qualification conversions (C++ only)
            Function argument conversions
          Expressions and Operators
            Lvalues and rvalues
            Primary expressions
              Names
              Literals
              Integer constant expressions
              Identifier expressions (C++ only)
              Parenthesized expressions ( )
              Scope resolution operator :: (C++ only)
            Function call expressions
            Member expressions
              Dot operator .
              Arrow operator ->
            Unary expressions
              Increment operator ++
              Decrement operator --
              Unary plus operator +
              Unary minus operator -
              Logical negation operator !
              Bitwise negation operator ~
              Address operator &
              Indirection operator *
              The typeid operator (C++ only)
              The __alignof__ operator
              The sizeof operator
              The __typeof__ operator
            Binary expressions
              Assignment operators
                Simple assignment operator =
                Compound assignment operators
              Multiplication operator *
              Division operator /
              Remainder operator %
              Addition operator +
              Subtraction operator -
              Bitwise left and right shift operators << >>
              Relational operators < > <= >=
              Equality and inequality operators == !=
              Bitwise AND operator &
              Bitwise exclusive OR operator ^
              Bitwise inclusive OR operator |
              Logical AND operator &&
              Logical OR operator ||
              Array subscripting operator [ ]
              Comma operator ,
              Pointer to member operators .* ->* (C++ only)
            Conditional expressions
              Types in conditional C expressions
              Types in conditional C++ expressions
              Examples of conditional expressions
            Cast expressions
              Cast operator ()
              The static_cast operator (C++ only)
              The reinterpret_cast operator (C++ only)
              The const_cast operator (C++ only)
              The dynamic_cast operator (C++ only)
            Compound literal expressions
            new expressions (C++ only)
              Placement syntax
              Initialization of objects created with the new operator
              Handling new allocation failure
            delete expressions (C++ only)
            throw expressions (C++ only)
            Operator precedence and associativity
          Statements
            Labeled statements
            Expression statements
              Resolution of ambiguous statements (C++ only)
            Block statements
              Example of blocks
            Selection statements
              The if statement
                Examples of if statements
              The switch statement
                Restrictions on switch statements
                Examples of switch statements
            Iteration statements
              The while statement
              The do statement
              The for statement
                Examples of for statements
            Jump statements
              The break statement
              The continue statement
                Examples of continue statements
              The return statement
                Examples of return statements
              The goto statement
            Null statement
          Functions
            Function declarations and definitions
              Function declarations
              Function definitions
              Examples of function declarations
              Examples of function definitions
              Compatible functions (C only)
              Multiple function declarations (C++ only)
            Function storage class specifiers
              The static storage class specifier
              The extern storage class specifier
            Function specifiers
              The inline function specifier
                Linkage of inline functions
            Function return type specifiers
              Function return values
            Function declarators
              Parameter declarations
                Parameter types
                Parameter names
                Static array indices in function parameter declarations (C only)
            Function attributes
              The const function attribute
              The noinline function attribute
              The pure function attribute
              The weak function attribute
            The main() function
            Function calls
              Pass by value
              Pass by reference
            Allocation and deallocation functions (C++ only)
            Default arguments in C++ functions (C++ only)
              Restrictions on default arguments
              Evaluation of default arguments
            Pointers to functions
          Namespaces (C++ only)
            Defining namespaces (C++ only)
            Declaring namespaces (C++ only)
            Creating a namespace alias (C++ only)
            Creating an alias for a nested namespace (C++ only)
            Extending namespaces (C++ only)
            Namespaces and overloading (C++ only)
            Unnamed namespaces (C++ only)
            Namespace member definitions (C++ only)
            Namespaces and friends (C++ only)
            The using directive (C++ only)
            The using declaration and namespaces (C++ only)
            Explicit access (C++ only)
          Overloading (C++ only)
            Overloading functions (C++ only)
              Restrictions on overloaded functions (C++ only)
            Overloading operators (C++ only)
              Overloading unary operators (C++ only)
              Overloading increment and decrement operators (C++ only)
              Overloading binary operators (C++ only)
              Overloading assignments (C++ only)
              Overloading function calls (C++ only)
              Overloading subscripting (C++ only)
              Overloading class member access (C++ only)
            Overload resolution (C++ only)
              Implicit conversion sequences (C++ only)
                Standard conversion sequences
                User-defined conversion sequences
                Ellipsis conversion sequences
              Resolving addresses of overloaded functions (C++ only)
          Classes (C++ only)
            Declaring class types (C++ only)
              Using class objects (C++ only)
            Classes and structures (C++ only)
            Scope of class names (C++ only)
              Incomplete class declarations (C++ only)
              Nested classes (C++ only)
              Local classes (C++ only)
              Local type names (C++ only)
          Class members and friends (C++ only)
            Class member lists (C++ only)
            Data members (C++ only)
            Member functions (C++ only)
              Inline member functions (C++ only)
              Constant and volatile member functions (C++ only)
              Virtual member functions (C++ only)
              Special member functions (C++ only)
            Member scope (C++ only)
            Pointers to members (C++ only)
            The this pointer (C++ only)
            Static members (C++ only)
              Using the class access operators with static members (C++ only)
              Static data members (C++ only)
              Static member functions (C++ only)
            Member access (C++ only)
            Friends (C++ only)
              Friend scope (C++ only)
              Friend access (C++ only)
          Inheritance (C++ only)
            Derivation (C++ only)
            Inherited member access (C++ only)
              Protected members (C++ only)
              Access control of base class members (C++ only)
            The using declaration and class members (C++ only)
              Overloading member functions from base and derived classes (C++ only)
              Changing the access of a class member (C++ only)
            Multiple inheritance (C++ only)
              Virtual base classes (C++ only)
              Multiple access (C++ only)
              Ambiguous base classes (C++ only)
                Name hiding
                Ambiguity and using declarations
                Unambiguous class members
                Pointer conversions
                Overload resolution
            Virtual functions (C++ only)
              Ambiguous virtual function calls (C++ only)
              Virtual function access (C++ only)
            Abstract classes (C++ only)
          Special member functions (C++ only)
            Overview of constructors and destructors (C++ only)
            Constructors (C++ only)
              Default constructors (C++ only)
              Explicit initialization with constructors (C++ only)
              Initialization of base classes and members (C++ only)
              Construction order of derived class objects (C++ only)
            Destructors (C++ only)
              Pseudo-destructors (C++ only)
            User-defined conversions (C++ only)
              Conversion constructors (C++ only)
              The explicit specifier (C++ only)
              Conversion functions (C++ only)
            Copy constructors (C++ only)
            Copy assignment operators (C++ only)
          Templates (C++ only)
            Template parameters (C++ only)
              Type template parameters (C++ only)
              Non-type template parameters (C++ only)
              Template template parameters (C++ only)
              Default arguments for template parameters (C++ only)
            Template arguments (C++ only)
              Template type arguments (C++ only)
              Template non-type arguments (C++ only)
              Template template arguments (C++ only)
            Class templates (C++ only)
              Class template declarations and definitions (C++ only)
              Static data members and templates (C++ only)
              Member functions of class templates (C++ only)
              Friends and templates (C++ only)
            Function templates (C++ only)
              Template argument deduction (C++ only)
                Deducing type template arguments
                Deducing non-type template arguments
              Overloading function templates (C++ only)
              Partial ordering of function templates (C++ only)
            Template instantiation (C++ only)
              Implicit instantiation (C++ only)
              Explicit instantiation (C++ only)
            Template specialization (C++ only)
              Explicit specialization (C++ only)
                Definition and declaration of explicit specializations
                Explicit specialization and scope
                Class members of explicit specializations
                Explicit specialization of function templates
                Explicit specialization of members of class templates
              Partial specialization (C++ only)
                Template parameter and argument lists of partial specializations
                Matching of class template partial specializations
            Name binding and dependent names (C++ only)
            The typename keyword (C++ only)
            The template keyword as qualifier (C++ only)
          Exception handling (C++ only)
            try blocks (C++ only)
              Nested try blocks (C++ only)
            catch blocks (C++ only)
              Function try block handlers (C++ only)
              Arguments of catch blocks (C++ only)
              Matching between exceptions thrown and caught (C++ only)
              Order of catching (C++ only)
            throw expressions (C++ only)
              Rethrowing an exception (C++ only)
            Stack unwinding (C++ only)
            Exception specifications (C++ only)
            Special exception handling functions (C++ only)
              The unexpected() function (C++ only)
              The terminate() function (C++ only)
              The set_unexpected() and set_terminate() functions (C++ only)
              Example using the exception handling functions (C++ only)
          Preprocessor directives
            Macro definition directives
              The #define directive
                Object-like macros
                Function-like macros
                  Variadic macro extensions
              The #undef directive
              The # operator
              The ## operator
            File inclusion directives
              The #include directive
                Using the #include Directive when Compiling Source in a Data Management File
                Using the #include Directive When Compiling Source in an Integrated File System File
              The #include_next directive
            Conditional compilation directives
              The #if and #elif directives
              The #ifdef directive
              The #ifndef directive
              The #else directive
              The #endif directive
            Message generation directives
              The #error directive
              The #warning directive
              The #line directive
            Assertion directives
            The null directive (#)
            Pragma directives
              The _Pragma preprocessing operator
          Appendix A. The ILE C language extensions
            C99 features as extensions to C89
            Extensions for GNU C compatibility
            Extensions for decimal floating-point support
          Appendix B. The ILE C++ language extensions
            General IBM extensions
            Extensions for C99 compatibility
            Extensions for GNU C compatibility
            Extensions for GNU C++ compatibility
            Extensions for decimal floating-point support
          Notices
            Programming Interface Information
            Trademarks and Service Marks
            Industry Standards
          Index
        PDF file for ILE C/C++ Language Reference
        ILE C/C++ Runtime Library Functions
          ILE C/C++ Runtime Library Functions
          Tables
          About ILE C/C++ Runtime Library Functions (SC41-5607)
            Who should read this book
              A note about examples
            Prerequisite and related information
            How to send your comments
          Summary of Changes
          Runtime Library Functions
            Include Files
              <assert.h>
              <ctype.h>
              <decimal.h>
              <errno.h>
              <except.h>
              <float.h>
              <inttypes.h>
              <langinfo.h>
              <limits.h>
              <locale.h>
              <math.h>
              <mallocinfo.h>
              <monetary.h>
              <nl_types.h>
              <pointer.h>
              <recio.h>
              <regex.h>
              <setjmp.h>
              <signal.h>
              <stdarg.h>
              <stddef.h>
              <stdint.h>
              <stdio.h>
              <stdlib.h>
              <string.h>
              <strings.h>
              <time.h>
              <wchar.h>
              <wctype.h>
              <xxcvt.h>
              <xxdtaa.h>
              <xxenv.h>
              <xxfdbk.h>
              Machine Interface (MI) Include Files
            Library Functions
              The C/C++ Library
                Error Handling
                Searching and Sorting
                Mathematical
                Time Manipulation
                Type Conversion
                Conversion
                Record Input/Output
                Stream Input/Output
                Handling Argument Lists
                Pseudorandom Numbers
                Dynamic Memory Management
                Memory Objects
                Environment Interaction
                String Operations
                Character Testing
                Multibyte Character Testing
                Character Case Mapping
                Multibyte Character Manipulation
                Data Areas
                Message Catalogs
                Regular Expression
              abort() — Stop a Program
              abs() — Calculate Integer Absolute Value
              acos() — Calculate Arccosine
              asctime() — Convert Time to Character String
              asctime_r() — Convert Time to Character String (Restartable)
              asin() — Calculate Arcsine
              assert() — Verify Condition
              atan() – atan2() — Calculate Arctangent
              atexit() — Record Program Ending Function
              atof() — Convert Character String to Float
              atoi() — Convert Character String to Integer
              atol() — atoll() — Convert Character String to Long or Long Long Integer
              Bessel Functions
              bsearch() — Search Arrays
              btowc() — Convert Single Byte to Wide Character
              _C_Get_Ssn_Handle() — Handle to C Session
              calloc() — Reserve and Initialize Storage
              catclose() — Close Message Catalog
              catgets() — Retrieve a Message from a Message Catalog
              catopen() — Open Message Catalog
              ceil() — Find Integer >=Argument
              clearerr() — Reset Error Indicators
              clock() — Determine Processor Time
              cos() — Calculate Cosine
              cosh() — Calculate Hyperbolic Cosine
              _C_Quickpool_Debug() — Modify Quick Pool Memory Manager Characteristics
              _C_Quickpool_Init() — Initialize Quick Pool Memory Manager
              _C_Quickpool_Report() — Generate Quick Pool Memory Manager Report
              ctime() — Convert Time to Character String
              ctime64() — Convert Time to Character String
              ctime_r() — Convert Time to Character String (Restartable)
              ctime64_r() — Convert Time to Character String (Restartable)
              _C_TS_malloc_debug() — Determine amount of teraspace memory used (with optional dumps and verification)
              _C_TS_malloc_info() — Determine amount of teraspace memory used
              difftime() — Compute Time Difference
              difftime64() — Compute Time Difference
              div() — Calculate Quotient and Remainder
              erf() – erfc() — Calculate Error Functions
              exit() — End Program
              exp() — Calculate Exponential Function
              fabs() — Calculate Floating-Point Absolute Value
              fclose() — Close Stream
              fdopen() — Associates Stream With File Descriptor
              feof() — Test End-of-File Indicator
              ferror() — Test for Read/Write Errors
              fflush() — Write Buffer to File
              fgetc() — Read a Character
              fgetpos() — Get File Position
              fgets() — Read a String
              fgetwc() — Read Wide Character from Stream
              fgetws() — Read Wide-Character String from Stream
              fileno() — Determine File Handle
              floor() —Find Integer <=Argument
              fmod() — Calculate Floating-Point Remainder
              fopen() — Open Files
              fprintf() — Write Formatted Data to a Stream
              fputc() — Write Character
              _fputchar - Write Character
              fputs() — Write String
              fputwc() — Write Wide Character
              fputws() — Write Wide-Character String
              fread() — Read Items
              free() — Release Storage Blocks
              freopen() — Redirect Open Files
              frexp() — Separate Floating-Point Value
              fscanf() — Read Formatted Data
              fseek() — fseeko() — Reposition File Position
              fsetpos() — Set File Position
              ftell() — ftello() — Get Current Position
              fwide() — Determine Stream Orientation
              fwprintf() — Format Data as Wide Characters and Write to a Stream
              fwrite() — Write Items
              fwscanf() — Read Data from Stream Using Wide Character
              gamma() — Gamma Function
              _gcvt - Convert Floating-Point to String
              getc() – getchar() — Read a Character
              getenv() — Search for Environment Variables
              _GetExcData() — Get Exception Data
              gets() — Read a Line
              getwc() — Read Wide Character from Stream
              getwchar() — Get Wide Character from stdin
              gmtime() — Convert Time
              gmtime64() — Convert Time
              gmtime_r() — Convert Time (Restartable)
              gmtime64_r() — Convert Time (Restartable)
              hypot() — Calculate Hypotenuse
              isalnum() - isxdigit() — Test Integer Value
              isascii() — Test for Character Representable as ASCII Value
              isblank() — Test for Blank or Tab Character
              iswalnum() to iswxdigit() — Test Wide Integer Value
              iswctype() — Test for Character Property
              _itoa - Convert Integer to String
              labs() — llabs() — Calculate Absolute Value of Long and Long Long Integer
              ldexp() — Multiply by a Power of Two
              ldiv() — lldiv() — Perform Long and Long Long Division
              localeconv() — Retrieve Information from the Environment
              localtime() — Convert Time
              localtime64() — Convert Time
              localtime_r() — Convert Time (Restartable)
              localtime64_r() — Convert Time (Restartable)
              log() — Calculate Natural Logarithm
              log10() — Calculate Base 10 Logarithm
              _ltoa - Convert Long Integer to String
              longjmp() — Restore Stack Environment
              malloc() — Reserve Storage Block
              mblen() — Determine Length of a Multibyte Character
              mbrlen() — Determine Length of a Multibyte Character (Restartable)
              mbrtowc() — Convert a Multibyte Character to a Wide Character (Restartable)
              mbsinit() — Test State Object for Initial State
              mbsrtowcs() — Convert a Multibyte String to a Wide Character String (Restartable)
              mbstowcs() — Convert a Multibyte String to a Wide Character String
              mbtowc() — Convert Multibyte Character to a Wide Character
              memchr() — Search Buffer
              memcmp() — Compare Buffers
              memcpy() — Copy Bytes
              memicmp() - Compare Bytes
              memmove() — Copy Bytes
              memset() — Set Bytes to Value
              mktime() — Convert Local Time
              mktime64() — Convert Local Time
              modf() — Separate Floating-Point Value
              nextafter() — nextafterl()— nexttoward() — nexttowardl() — Calculate the Next Representable Floating-Point Value
              nl_langinfo() —Retrieve Locale Information
              perror() — Print Error Message
              pow() — Compute Power
              printf() — Print Formatted Characters
              putc() – putchar() — Write a Character
              putenv() — Change/Add Environment Variables
              puts() — Write a String
              putwc() — Write Wide Character
              putwchar() — Write Wide Character to stdout
              qsort() — Sort Array
              QXXCHGDA() — Change Data Area
              QXXDTOP() — Convert Double to Packed Decimal
              QXXDTOZ() —Convert Double to Zoned Decimal
              QXXITOP() — Convert Integer to Packed Decimal
              QXXITOZ() — Convert Integer to Zoned Decimal
              QXXPTOD() — Convert Packed Decimal to Double
              QXXPTOI() — Convert Packed Decimal to Integer
              QXXRTVDA() — Retrieve Data Area
              QXXZTOD() — Convert Zoned Decimal to Double
              QXXZTOI() — Convert Zoned Decimal to Integer
              raise() — Send Signal
              rand(), rand_r() — Generate Random Number
              _Racquire() — Acquire a Program Device
              _Rclose() — Close a File
              _Rcommit() — Commit Current Record
              _Rdelete() — Delete a Record
              _Rdevatr() — Get Device Attributes
              realloc() — Change Reserved Storage Block Size
              regcomp() — Compile Regular Expression
              regerror() — Return Error Message for Regular Expression
              regexec() — Execute Compiled Regular Expression
              regfree() — Free Memory for Regular Expression
              remove() — Delete File
              rename() — Rename File
              rewind() — Adjust Current File Position
              _Rfeod() — Force the End-of-Data
              _Rfeov() — Force the End-of-File
              _Rformat() — Set the Record Format Name
              _Rindara() — Set Separate Indicator Area
              _Riofbk() — Obtain I/O Feedback Information
              _Rlocate() — Position a Record
              _Ropen() — Open a Record File for I/O Operations
              _Ropnfbk() — Obtain Open Feedback Information
              _Rpgmdev() — Set Default Program Device
              _Rreadd() — Read a Record by Relative Record Number
              _Rreadf() — Read the First Record
              _Rreadindv() — Read from an Invited Device
              _Rreadk() — Read a Record by Key
              _Rreadl() — Read the Last Record
              _Rreadn() — Read the Next Record
              _Rreadnc() — Read the Next Changed Record in a Subfile
              _Rreadp() — Read the Previous Record
              _Rreads() — Read the Same Record
              _Rrelease() — Release a Program Device
              _Rrlslck() — Release a Record Lock
              _Rrollbck() — Roll Back Commitment Control Changes
              _Rupdate() — Update a Record
              _Rupfb() — Provide Information on Last I/O Operation
              _Rwrite() — Write the Next Record
              _Rwrited() — Write a Record Directly
              _Rwriterd() — Write and Read a Record
              _Rwrread() — Write and Read a Record (separate buffers)
              scanf() — Read Data
              setbuf() — Control Buffering
              setjmp() — Preserve Environment
              setlocale() — Set Locale
              setvbuf() — Control Buffering
              signal() — Handle Interrupt Signals
              sin() — Calculate Sine
              sinh() — Calculate Hyperbolic Sine
              snprintf() — Print Formatted Data to Buffer
              sprintf() — Print Formatted Data to Buffer
              sqrt() — Calculate Square Root
              srand() — Set Seed for rand() Function
              sscanf() — Read Data
              strcasecmp() — Compare Strings without Case Sensitivity
              strcat() — Concatenate Strings
              strchr() — Search for Character
              strcmp() — Compare Strings
              strcmpi() - Compare Strings Without Case Sensitivity
              strcoll() — Compare Strings
              strcpy() — Copy Strings
              strcspn() — Find Offset of First Character Match
              strdup - Duplicate String
              strerror() — Set Pointer to Runtime Error Message
              strfmon() — Convert Monetary Value to String
              strftime() — Convert Date/Time to String
              stricmp() - Compare Strings without Case Sensitivity
              strlen() — Determine String Length
              strncasecmp() — Compare Strings without Case Sensitivity
              strncat() — Concatenate Strings
              strncmp() — Compare Strings
              strncpy() — Copy Strings
              strnicmp - Compare Substrings Without Case Sensitivity
              strnset - strset - Set Characters in String
              strpbrk() — Find Characters in String
              strptime()— Convert String to Date/Time
              strrchr() — Locate Last Occurrence of Character in String
              strspn() —Find Offset of First Non-matching Character
              strstr() — Locate Substring
              strtod() — strtof() — strtold — Convert Character String to Double, Float, and Long Double
              strtod32() — strtod64() — strtod128() — Convert Character String to Decimal Floating-Point
              strtok() — Tokenize String
              strtok_r() — Tokenize String (Restartable)
              strtol() — strtoll() — Convert Character String to Long and Long Long Integer
              strtoul() — strtoull() — Convert Character String to Unsigned Long and Unsigned Long Long Integer
              strxfrm() — Transform String
              swprintf() — Format and Write Wide Characters to Buffer
              swscanf() — Read Wide Character Data
              system() — Execute a Command
              tan() — Calculate Tangent
              tanh() — Calculate Hyperbolic Tangent
              time() — Determine Current Time
              time64() — Determine Current Time
              tmpfile() — Create Temporary File
              tmpnam() — Produce Temporary File Name
              toascii() — Convert Character to Character Representable by ASCII
              tolower() – toupper() — Convert Character Case
              towctrans() — Translate Wide Character
              towlower() –towupper() — Convert Wide Character Case
              _ultoa - Convert Unsigned Long Integer to String
              ungetc() — Push Character onto Input Stream
              ungetwc() — Push Wide Character onto Input Stream
              va_arg() – va_end() – va_start() — Access Function Arguments
              vfprintf() — Print Argument Data to Stream
              vfscanf() — Read Formatted Data
              vfwprintf() — Format Argument Data as Wide Characters and Write to a Stream
              vfwscanf() — Read Formatted Wide Character Data
              vprintf() — Print Argument Data
              vscanf() — Read Formatted Data
              vsnprintf() — Print Argument Data to Buffer
              vsprintf() — Print Argument Data to Buffer
              vsscanf() — Read Formatted Data
              vswprintf() — Format and Write Wide Characters to Buffer
              vswscanf() — Read Formatted Wide Character Data
              vwprintf() — Format Argument Data as Wide Characters and Print
              vwscanf() — Read Formatted Wide Character Data
              wcrtomb() — Convert a Wide Character to a Multibyte Character (Restartable)
              wcscat() — Concatenate Wide-Character Strings
              wcschr() — Search for Wide Character
              wcscmp() — Compare Wide-Character Strings
              wcscoll() —Language Collation String Comparison
     &